SSCM Roads and Bridges - Annex III Technical Specifications 105 C1 PDF

SRI LANKA OPERATIONS CENTRE

Annex III Technical Specification

Special Provisions to Standard Specifications

For

ICTAD‐Construction and Maintenance of Roads
and Bridges

Series 100 – General Page no: 1 of 63
PREAMBLE TO ICTAD
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION AND MAINTENANCE OF ROAD
AND BRIDGES

The works shall be carried out in conformity with the ICTAD standard specifications for
construction and maintenance of Roads and Bridges ICTAD Publication no SCA/5, 1989 issued
under the Authority of the General manager, Road Development Authority, Ministry of
highways, Sri Lanka.

References to the ‘Specification’ in the Contract Documents mean the Sri Lankan‐ICTAD
Construction Specification. The Sri Lankan‐ICTAD Construction Specification is hereby
incorporated into the Contract as a Contract Document and the Contractor will be deemed to
have full knowledge of this Specification.

Copies of the Sri Lankan‐ICTAD Construction Specification are available at the above address
on payment of the relevant fee. In the event of any conflict in the Specification the following
precedence shall be apply:

1. Part A: General Technical Specifications: ICTAD‐Standard Specifications for
Construction and Maintenance of Roads & Bridges

2. Part B: Particular Technical Specifications: Special Provision to Standard
Specification


SERIES 100 ‐ GENERAL

CONTENTS

101. ABBREVIATIONS..................................................................................................................7
102. DEFINITIONS .......................................................................................................................7
103. ARRANGEMENTS FOR TRAFFIC DURING CONSTRUCTION ...................................................11

103.1. GENERAL .............................................................................................................................11
103.2. USING PART OF THE ROAD ......................................................................................................13
103.3. TEMPORARY DIVERSION ..........................................................................................................13
103.4. TRAFFIC SAFETY AND CONTROL ................................................................................................13
104. CONTROL OF WORKS ........................................................................................................14
104.1. AUTHORITY OF THE ENGINEER ..................................................................................................14
104.2. CONFORMITY WITH PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ..........................................................................15
104.3. STANDARDS ..........................................................................................................................15
104.4. HEALTH AND SAFETY ..............................................................................................................15
104.5. PROTECTION OF PUBLIC SERVICE FACILITIES ................................................................................16
104.6. SAFETY RELATING TO TEMPORARY STRUCTURES...........................................................................16
104.7. SAFETY RELATING TO NAVIGABLE WATERWAYS ...........................................................................16
104.8. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENT ..............................................................................................17
Emission standard values for Motor Vehicle Exhaust....................................................................18
Emission standard values for Black Smoke Emission from boat/ship/vessel.................................18
104.9. CONSTRUCTION PROGRAMMING ..............................................................................................21
104.10. PROGRESS MEETINGS .............................................................................................................22
104.11. RETURNS AND REPORTS ..........................................................................................................22
104.12. TELECOMMUNICATIONS ..........................................................................................................23
104.13. COMPACTION – GENERAL .......................................................................................................23
104.14. MIXING & CONTROL OF MOISTURE CONTENT BEFORE COMPACTION ..............................................24
104.15. COMPACTION EQUIPMENT ......................................................................................................24
104.16. WATER AND POWER SUPPLY ARRANGEMENTS ............................................................................24
104.17. DRAINAGE DURING CONSTRUCTION...........................................................................................25
104.18. PREVENTION OF DAMAGES TO EMBANKMENTS, SUB‐GRADE LAYERS, PAVEMENT LAYERS AND SHOULDERS
IN POSITION. ..........................................................................................................................................25
104.19. COMPACTION TRIALS..............................................................................................................25
104.20. COMPACTION CONTROL ..........................................................................................................25
104.21. DISPERSAL OF HAULING EQUIPMENT .........................................................................................26
104.22. PROTECTION TO NEWLY CONSTRUCTED LAYERS ...........................................................................26
104.23. BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE ...........................................................................................26
104.24. MATERIALS TESTING BY INDEPENDENT LABORATORIES ..................................................................27
104.25. SPECIAL AND ADDITIONAL TESTING ...........................................................................................27
104.26. STAFF FOR MATERIALS TESTING ................................................................................................27
104.27. CODES AND STANDARDS .........................................................................................................27
104.28. TEST RESULTS AND RECORDS ...................................................................................................27
104.29. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ................................................................................................27
105. CONTROL OF MATERIALS ..................................................................................................28
105.1. SOURCES OF SUPPLY AND QUALITY REQUIREMENTS......................................................................28
105.2. STORAGE OF MATERIALS .........................................................................................................28
105.3. HANDLING OF MATERIALS .......................................................................................................28
105.4. APPROVAL OF SOURCES OF MATERIAL (ADD THE FOLLOWING) .......................................................29
105.5. STOCKPILING OF MATERIALS (ADD THE FOLLOWING) ....................................................................29

105.6. TEMPORARY STOCKPILING OF MATERIALS (ADD THE FOLLOWING)...................................................29
105.7. CONTROL TESTS ON MATERIAL DURING CONSTRUCTION (ADD THE FOLLOWING) ...............................29
105.8. MATERIAL TESTING (ADD THE FOLLOWING) ................................................................................31
105.9. APPLICABILITY OF GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS (ADD THE FOLLOWING)................................................31
105.10. PAYMENT (ADD THE FOLLOWING).............................................................................................31
106. GENERAL RULES FOR MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT .......................................................31
106.1. OVERHAUL ...........................................................................................................................33
106.2 MEASUREMENT OF PAVEMENT FOR AREA AND VOLUME BASED PAYMENT........................................33
a. Area Basis..............................................................................................................................33
b. Volume Basis .........................................................................................................................33
106.3 SCOPE OF RATES FOR DIFFERENT ITEMS OF WORK .......................................................................33
106.4 FACILITIES FOR VERIFICATION OF MEASUREMENTS .......................................................................33
106.5 SELECTION OF PAY ITEMS ........................................................................................................33
106.6 SUB DIVISIONS WITHIN PAY ITEMS ...........................................................................................33
106.7 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION OF THE WORKS (ADD THE FOLLOWING) ................................................33
107. SIEVE DESIGNATIONS ........................................................................................................34
108. CONTRACTOR’S ESTABLISHMENT ON SITE .........................................................................34

108.1. OFFICE, EQUIPMENT TESTING FACILITIES ETC. .............................................................................34
108.2. LEGAL RELATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITY TO THE PUBLIC ..................................................................34
108.3. MEASUREMENT.....................................................................................................................34
108.4. PAYMENT .............................................................................................................................35
109. INFORMATION FURNISHED BY THE EMPLOYER..................................................................36
110. WORKMANSHIP AND QUALITY CONTROL ..........................................................................36
111. SELECTION OF LABOUR .....................................................................................................37
112. WORK EXECUTED BY THE EMPLOYER OR OTHER CONTRACTORS........................................37
113. PROTECTION OF PUBLIC SERVICE FACILITIES......................................................................38
113.1. EXISTING SERVICES.................................................................................................................38
113.2. PAYMENT .............................................................................................................................38
114. MAINTENANCE OF EXISTING ROADS..................................................................................39
114.1. GENERAL OBLIGATIONS ..........................................................................................................39
114.2. PAYMENT .............................................................................................................................39
115. PROTECTION OF THE WORKS AND REQUIREMENTS TO BE MET BEFORE CONSTRUCTION OF
NEW WORK ON TOP OF COMPLETED WORK IS COMMENCED ........................................................39
115.1. PAYMENT .............................................................................................................................40
116. REMEDIAL WORK ..............................................................................................................41
116.1. EARTHWORKS .......................................................................................................................41
116.2. LOCAL DEFECTS IN PAVEMENT LAYERS .......................................................................................41
116.3. CONCRETE ............................................................................................................................42
116.4. PAYMENT .............................................................................................................................42
117. WATER SUPPLY ARRANGEMENTS ......................................................................................42
117.1. PAYMENT .............................................................................................................................42
118. ELECTRCITY SUPPLY...........................................................................................................42
118.1. PAYMENT .............................................................................................................................42

119. PAYMENTS & TOLERENCES................................................................................................42
119.1. PAYMENT .............................................................................................................................43
120. PHOTOGRAPHIC RECORDS ................................................................................................43
120.1. PAYMENT .............................................................................................................................43
121. ACCESS TO SITE .................................................................................................................43
121.1. PAYMENT .............................................................................................................................44
122. CO‐OPERATION AT SITE.....................................................................................................44
122.1. PAYMENT .............................................................................................................................44
123. ROADS AND SITE TO BE KEPT CLEAN..................................................................................44
123.1. PAYMENT .............................................................................................................................44
124. SECURITY OF THE WORKS..................................................................................................44
124.1. PAYMENT .............................................................................................................................45
125. SUPPRESSION OF NOICE....................................................................................................45
125.1. PAYMENT .............................................................................................................................45
126. SAFETY..............................................................................................................................45
126.1. PAYMENT .............................................................................................................................46
127. METHOD OF WORKING .....................................................................................................46
127.1. PAYMENT .............................................................................................................................46
128. TEMPORARY WORKS.........................................................................................................46
128.1. PAYMENT .............................................................................................................................46
129. SETTING OUT AND CROSS SECTION SURVEY AND DRAWINGS ............................................47
129.1. GENERAL .............................................................................................................................47
129.2. SETTING OUT AND CROSS SECTIONS ..........................................................................................47
129.3. MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT ...................................................................................................48
129.4. PAYMENT .............................................................................................................................48
130. FACILITIES FOR THE ENGINEER AND HIS STAFF...................................................................48
130.1 DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................................................48
130.2 LAND FOR FACILITIES ..............................................................................................................49
130.3 SOLE USE OF FACILITIES ..........................................................................................................50
130.4 SERVICES..............................................................................................................................50
130.5 RENTED PREMISES .................................................................................................................50
130.6 OFFICES AND FURNISHINGS .....................................................................................................50
130.7 ACCOMMODATION FOR THE ENGINEER ......................................................................................52
130.8 ENGINEER’S LABORATORY AND EQUIPMENT ................................................................................54
A) MATERIALS TESTING BY INDEPENDENT LABORATORIES ..................................................................54
B) SPECIAL AND ADDITIONAL TESTING ...........................................................................................54
C) STAFF FOR MATERIALS TESTING ................................................................................................54
130 (15) SPECIAL AND ADDITIONAL TESTING PROVISIONAL SUM .................................................................55
130(16) STAFF FOR MATERIALS TESTING PERSON MONTH .......................................................................55
130.9 STATIONERY FOR THE ENGINEER ...............................................................................................55
130.10 PROVISION OF HOTEL ACCOMMODATION FOR THE ENGINEER AND HIS STAFF ....................................56
130.11 SURVEY EQUIPMENT ..............................................................................................................57
130.12 MAINTENANCE OF ENGINEER’S FACILITIES ..................................................................................58
130.13 CLERICAL AND TECHNICAL STAFF ...............................................................................................59

130.14 VEHICLES FOR THE ENGINEER, ..................................................................................................60

131. PROJECT SIGN BOARDS .....................................................................................................61
131.1 DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................................................61
131.2 MEASUREMENT.....................................................................................................................61
131.3 PAYMENT .............................................................................................................................62
132. PROVISION OF INSURANCES, BONDS AND SECURITIES.......................................................62
132.1 DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................................................62
132.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ................................................................................................62
133. MARBLE STONE FOR FOUNDATION LAYING.......................................................................62
133.1 DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................................................62
133.2 MEASUREMENT.....................................................................................................................62
133.3 PAYMENT .............................................................................................................................63
133 MARBLE STONE FOR FOUNDATION LAYING.......................................................................59
133.1 DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................................................59
133.2 PAYMENT..........................................................................................................................59

SERIES 100 ‐ GENERAL

101. ABBREVIATIONS

Add the following :‐

m metre
km kilometre
Sq.m square metre
Cu.m cubic metre
cm centimetre
mm millimetre
gm. gram
kg kilogram
N Newton
kN kilo newton
HFL High Flood Level
LWL Low Water Level
WMM Wet Mix Macadam
102. DEFINITIONS

Add the following :

Aggregate – Hard mineral elements of construction material mixtures, for example:
sand, gravel (crushed or uncrushed) or crushed rock

Asphalt Concrete – A mixture to predetermined proportions of aggregate, filler and
bituminous binder material plant mix and usually placed by means of a paving
machine.

Asphalt Surfacing ‐ The layer or layers of asphalt concrete constructed on top of the
road base.

Back Fill ‐ Excavated material, which is placed and compacted in trenches and around
foundations.

Batter Board ‐ A board of wood fixed to posts at the top of cuttings or the bottom of
embankments which indicates the slope at which the cutting or embankment is to be
constructed.

Bitumen ‐ A class of black or dark‐coloured (solid, semisolid, or viscous) cementitious
substances, natural or manufactured, composed principally of high molecular weight
hydrocarbons, of which asphalts, tars, pitches, and asphaltites are typical.

Borrow Area/Borrow Pit ‐ An area, within designated boundaries, outside the
Permanent Works, approved for the purpose of obtaining fill or pavement materials.
A borrow pit is the excavated pit in a borrow area.

Borrow Material ‐ Borrow material is a general term used to describe material
obtained from a borrow pit.

Boulder ‐ A rock fragment, usually rounded by weathering or abrasion, with an
average dimension of 300mm or more.

Capping Layer ‐ A layer of selected fill material placed on the top of the topmost
embankment layer or the bottom of excavation.

Chippings ‐ Chippings are single sized particles of crushed rock, crushed boulders or
crushed gravel used for surface dressing.

Coarse Aggregate ‐ Course aggregate is material retained on the 4.75mm sieve.

Compliance Testing ‐ Testing of the completed works to ascertain compliance of the
requirements of the Specification.

Cut ‐ Cut shall mean all excavated material from the road prism including side drains.

Cutting ‐ That portion of the road prism from where material is excavated to sub‐
grade or road bed level.

Earthworks ‐ The excavation of material from cuttings and/or the construction of
embankments.

Embankment ‐ That portion of the road prism composed of approved fill material,
which lies above the original ground and is bounded by the side slopes, described in
the Contract, extending downwards and outwards from the outer shoulder break‐
points and on which the pavement is constructed.

False work – Temporary staging & working platforms.

Fill ‐ Material which is used for the construction of embankments.

Fine Aggregate ‐ Fine aggregate is material passing the 4.75mm sieve.

Footway ‐ An area normally adjacent to the carriageway provided for the use by
pedestrians.

Formwork ‐ Temporary boarding or sheeting erected to contain concrete during
placing, compacting and initial hardening including supports.

Gabions ‐ Gabions consist of woven steel mesh boxes or mattresses filled with stone.

Gravel ‐ Gravel is naturally occurring, rounded, granular material with an average
dimension of more than 5mm and less than 300mm, (it does not apply to Gravel
Wearing Courses).

Prime Coat ‐ A bituminous treatment applied to the surface of a newly constructed
unbound road base prior to the construction of a bituminous layer or surface
treatment.


Quality Control ‐ Procedures, and/or testing, carried out prior to, or during, the
construction of the Works for the purpose of ensuring compliance with the
requirements of the Specification.

Quarry ‐ An area within designated boundaries, approved for the purpose of
obtaining rock.

Road Base ‐ A layer of material of defined thickness and width constructed on top of
the sub‐base, or in the absence thereof, the sub‐grade. A road base may extend
beyond the carriageway.

Roadway ‐ The roadway comprises the carriageway, shoulders and median.

Rock ‐ A mass of hard mineral material which, when excavated, requires the use of
explosives, sawing or splitting by mechanical means.

Rip‐rap ‐ Unbounded stone provided to protect the surfaces of slopes and the beds
of watercourses from erosion and scour.

Scarify ‐ Loosen and break‐up soil or existing pavement layers by means of a machine
fitted with tines.

Shoulder Breakpoint ‐ The point on a cross section at which the extended flat planes
of the surface of the shoulder and the outside slope of the fill and pavement
intersect.

Side Drain ‐ A longitudinal drain offset from, and parallel to, the carriageway.

Stabilisation ‐ The treatment of pavement materials by the addition of lime or
Portland cement.

Sub‐surface Drain ‐ A covered drain constructed to intercept and remove sub‐soil
water. It includes all pipes and filter material in the drain.

Surface Dressing ‐ The sealing or resealing of the surface of the carriageway or
shoulders by means of one or more successive applications of bituminous binder and
chippings.

Tack Coat ‐ A bituminous treatment applied to the surface of an existing bituminous
layer prior to the construction of a new bituminous layer.

Topsoil ‐ A surface layer of soil which contains organic matter and is capable of
supporting the growth of vegetation.

Traffic ‐ Vehicles, pedestrians and animals travelling along a route.

Traffic Lane ‐ Part of a carriageway intended for a single stream of traffic in one
direction, which has normally been demarcated as such by road markings.

California Bearing Ratio (CBR)‐Test method to evaluate the bearing capacity of the
soil.

Maximum Dry Density (MDD)‐ Maximum dry density as determined in the laboratory
using Standard Compaction.

Optimum Moisture Content (OMC)‐ Optimum moisture content as determined from
moisture density relationship tests for Standard Compaction.

Dynamic Cone Penetrometer (DCP)‐ Device for field checking of in situ CBR,

All kinds of Soil‐ The soil type include clay, sand, gravel, boulders, hard rocks etc.

In this Specification the following terms, words or expressions shall have the
meanings hereby assigned to them. For ease of understanding certain cross‐
sectional and pavement structure elements are illustrated in and Figure 2 & Figure 2.

Figure 1 Terms and Definitions for Road Cross Section Elements
Right of Way
Limit of Roadbed
Roadway
Carriageway
Shoulder
Traffic Lane Traffic Lane
Shoulder
Shoulder Break
Point
Embankment
Fill
Pavement Layers
Side Drain
Sub-grade (Top of Capping Layer
Fill Material) (if Required)
Roadbed (Existing Sub-grade (Bottom

Ground under of Excavation)
Embankment)

Figure 2 Terms and Definitions for Pavement Structure
W e a r in g C o u r s e
S u r f a c in g L a y e r s
B a s e C o u r s e ( if a n y )
Road Pavement Layers

Road B ase
S u b -b a s e
S u b -g r a d e
C a p p in g L a y e r
( if r e q u ir e d )

Where the definition in the General Conditions of Contract differ from those in the
Standard Specifications and Special provisions to Standard Specifications, the former
shall apply.
103. ARRANGEMENTS FOR TRAFFIC DURING CONSTRUCTION
103.1. General
Delete this sub‐section and substitute the following:‐

From the date of Commencement of the Works to the date of issue of Taking‐over
Certificate for the whole of Works as provided for in the contract the Contractor
shall be responsible for maintaining the uninterrupted passage of vehicles and
pedestrians along the project road/right of way. The road is extensively used and
due attention shall be paid by the Contractor to the maintenance and riding comfort
of all roads/detours/diversions.

The types of maintenance situations described below include:

(i) Construction and maintenance of temporary detours (away from existing
road embankment) required to be built because the full width of the existing
road is under construction or where works on cross drainage structures
requires the provision of a temporary detour including maintenance of the
existing Bridge.

(ii) Construction and maintenance of temporary diversions along an existing
embankment when road construction is progressing half width beyond the
proposed centerline.

(iii) Maintenance of the existing road prior to commencement of construction.

(iv) Maintenance of completed half width of road and shoulder opened to
traffic.

(v) Maintenance of traffic on exposed granular layers in a carriageway under
construction.


The Contractor’s responsibilities shall include the rectification of any deterioration or
damage to the road, intersections or driveways, and drainage structures; due to
passage of traffic, or rains or flood. The specific locations of any detour or diversions
shall depend upon the Contractor’s method of working and the Contractor shall be
deemed to have covered the same in quoting his rates.

Upon completion of a days work, or if the Works are to be left unattended, the
Contractor shall leave the Works in such a condition so as to allow the safe passage
of traffic. The Contractor shall be responsible for complying with all regulations
relating to the temporary closure of roads in Sri Lanka.

The Contractor shall provide and maintain for the period of construction, traffic
control and safety devices including Traffic Signs, Barricade Boards, Traffic Cones,
Lighting Devices etc., at all locations where work is in progress in accordance with
Part II of the “Manual of Traffic Control Devices, Road Development Authority,
Ministry of Transport and Highways”.

The Contractor shall so conduct his operations as to offer the least possible
obstruction and inconvenience to the public. He shall have under construction no
greater length or amount of works than he can properly manage at a time with due
regard to the rights of the public in maintaining a free flow of traffic. Unless provided
otherwise in this specification all traffic shall be permitted to pass through the
sections of the works, which have been completed and opened to traffic in
accordance with the contract.

Area of existing public roadway, traffic diversions or detours shall not be obstructed
or used in any way by the Contractor for the dumping or stockpiling of materials, or
parking of Contractor’s equipment

At least 15 days before commencing work on any section of the works the
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer his proposals for the maintenance of traffic
including Working Drawings of traffic control arrangements, road signs, and any
temporary road works including detailed typical cross sections of proposed
detours/diversions indicating clearly the type of diversion, proposed material and
thickness of pavement structure and surfacing not inferior to specifications stated
hereinafter, and a program showing the time over which the diversion is required to
carry the traffic.

The Engineer may require changes to the Contractor’s proposals prior to approving
the proposal of temporary works and program. The standard of road surfacing
required may depend on the duration that the detour/diversion is required to be
operational. Approval to the Contractor’s proposal shall not take away the
Contractor’s obligation to provide for the uninterrupted passage of vehicles and
pedestrians at all times. Where necessary the Contractor shall strengthen by the
addition of pavement layers or by additional compaction or other means, any
detours or diversions that may be found inadequate for traffic no extra cost to the
contract.

Material and equipment temporarily stored on, or adjacent to, the existing roadway
shall be so placed, and the work at all times, shall be so conducted as to cause

minimum disruption to the travelling public. Warning signs and barrels will be
required to separate the Contractor’s material and equipment from the public.

The Contractor will not be permitted to have excavations open on both sides of the
road at a particular chainage such that there is a step adjacent to public traffic which
may create a danger to traffic i.e. the excavation and backfilling with sub‐base or
base shall be flush with the existing road level on one side before excavation can
proceed on the other side of the road.

The maximum length of one‐way working controlled by stop/go boards or flagmen
shall be 500 metres. This length may be further reduced if visibility is reduced at
bends on increased where appropriate at the Engineer’s discretion.

During construction for operations which require one way traffic the Contractor shall
be responsible for the removal of broken down vehicles including vehicles damaged
in accidents and shall maintain one way uninterrupted traffic flow at all times
As an alternative or in addition to one‐way working, traffic diversions may be
arranged where this is feasible. Such diversions shall be approved by the Engineer in
conjunction with the Traffic Police. The Contractor shall be responsible for the
provision and maintenance of adequate signing for the duration of any diversion.

The Contractor shall arrange for the Traffic Police to be in attendance for traffic
management whenever required.

No separate payment for the maintenance or any other costs incurred whilst utilising
the diversion shall be made. All costs shall be deemed to be included in the
Contractor’s rates.

All earth and gravel by‐passes and existing gravel roads used as by‐passes shall be
maintained in a safe trafficable condition by the Contractor. Wherever required by
the Engineer, the roads and by‐passes shall be graded by motor grader or by
approved means to provide a smooth riding surface free of corrugation. All pot‐
holes shall be promptly repaired by the contractor. Drainage shall be kept in good
order and the Contractor shall water the by‐passes as often as is necessary to keep
dust down.
103.2. Using Part of the Road
No change.
103.3. Temporary Diversion
No change
103.4. Traffic Safety and Control
Delete this sub‐section and substitute the following:

The Contractor shall, after consultation with the Engineer, all the concerned Local
Authorities and Police prepare a scheme of traffic management for carrying out the
Works. Such proposals shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval, together
with written approval / no objection certificates from the concerned authorities, not
less than 30 days before the planned implementation of each proposal.

The Contractor shall not commence any works affecting any public highway until all
approved traffic safety measures conforming to the Engineer’s prior approval have
been fully implemented to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

The Contractor shall take necessary measures for the safety of traffic and third
parties by providing, erecting and maintaining all signs, lamps, barriers, traffic
control signals, road markings, etc. in a clean and legible condition, and shall
position, re‐position, cover or remove them as required by the progress of the
Works. The barriers shall be strong. Red lanterns or warning lights shall be mounted
on the barriers at nights and shall be kept lit till sunrise. If the Contractor fails to
comply with these requirements, the Engineer shall order a third party to rectify the
shortcomings and shall recover the cost of such works from the Contractor.

a. Measurement

Arrangements for traffic during construction shall be measured per month for the
period during which the Contractor maintains the arrangement to achieve full
compliance with the requirement of Section 103.

b. Payment

The quantities measured in month and tenths of a month will be paid at the Contract
rate per month.
Payment will commence from the day that the Contractor commences a section of
road work on bridge work which require one way traffic working or when be
constructs a diversion in accordance with Section 103.

Payment will continue while such one way working or traffic diversions are in proper
operation in accordance with the Contractor’s programme and to the satisfaction of
the Engineer. Payment will cease when no one way working or traffic diversions are
in place. The pay item shall be deemed to include for compliance with Section 103
for as many locations that the Contractor is operating one way working or diversions
for traffic at any one time whether this be one or several.

No additional payment will be made for compliance with this clause.

Pay items shall be:‐

Item No. Description Pay unit

103(1) Provision and Maintenance of
Arrangements for traffic during
construction. month.

104. CONTROL OF WORKS
104.1. Authority of the Engineer
No change.

104.2. Conformity with Plans and Specifications
No change.

Add sub‐clause 104.3 :‐

104.3. Standards

When materials or workmanship are required by these Specifications to meet or
exceed specifically named codes or standards, it is the Contractor's responsibility to
provide such specifically named codes or standards. The specified codes and
standards establish the quality requirements for the various types of work to be
performed and the methods for testing for determination that the required quality is
achieved.

All the codes of practice, standards and specifications applicable shall be the latest
edition with all corrections and incorporations as on 30 days before the final date for
submission of the bid.

In the absence of any definite provisions in the specifications on any particular issue
reference may be made to the latest codes of ASTM and BS standards which ensure
an equal or higher quality than the standards mentioned. Where even these are
silent, the construction and completion of the Works and relevant tests shall
conform to sound engineering practice and, in case of any dispute arising out of the
interpretation of the above, the decision of the Engineer shall be final and binding on
the Contractor.
104.4. Health and Safety

The Contractor shall in addition to complying with the specific requirements of the
General Conditions and with the national standards of the Government of Sri Lanka
in respect of health and safety, observe and maintain standards, towards all of his
employees, not less than those laid down by his own national standards or statutory
regulations.

He should take all reasonable steps including training and safety drill to ensure the
safety of all persons on the site, whether in his employ or not. Safety is paramount.

The contractor shall provide all appropriate protective clothing and equipment for
the work to be done and ensure its proper use. Where required safety nets, belts,
belts harnesses and life belts and rescue boats shall be provided. All safety and
rescue equipment shall be fully maintained and available for use at all times.

The contractor shall provide and maintain in prominent and well‐marked positions
all necessary first‐aid equipment, medical supplies and other facilities. A sufficient
number or trained personnel shall be available at all times to render first aid. A
suitably equipped room shall be made available with beds and stretchers for
emergency medical treatment, and a planned system for removal to hospital for
authorised persons requiring further treatment shall be provided by the contractor.

The contractor shall report to the Engineer promptly and in writing particulars of any
accident or unusual or unforeseen the occurrences on the site, whether likely to
affect progress of the work or not.

No payment would be made for services under this clause as the same shall be
deemed to have been included in the general obligation of the Contractor.
104.5. Protection of Public Service Facilities

Immediately on receipt of the notice to commence the works, the Contractor shall
make a survey to identify all surface and under ground Electric/Telephone poles,
service lines viz gas/fuel pipe, water line, survey Bench Marks (BM) and other
facilities etc. likely to impede/obstruct his works and shall submit a survey and
chainage wise list of these obstructions to the Engineer.

Any services affected by the Works shall be temporarily supported by the Contractor
who shall also take all measures reasonably required by the various bodies to
protect their services and property during the progress of the works.

No separate payment shall be made for the survey, identification and any temporary
support or protection of services, as it will be deemed to be under the general
obligation of the Contractor.

As directed by the Engineer, the Contractor will arrange for the relocation and/or
removal of public services by the appropriate authority.

Payment for any charges made by these authorities shall be made as shown in
Section‐203.

104.6. Safety Relating to Temporary Structures

The contractor must submit complete design calculations plans and technical details
of all proposed temporary structures for the engineers prior approval before their
construction commences. The Engineers approval will not relieve the contractor of
any contractual liabilities.

The contractor must also ensure that all necessary safety regulations and
precautions must be complied with during the erection, use and dismantling of
temporary structures no separate payment will be made for temporary structures
which are not scheduled in the Bill of Quantities. They will have been deemed to
have been included in the rate items listed in the Bill of Quantities.
104.7. Safety Relating to Navigable Waterways

The Contractor shall in addition to complying with the specific requirements of the
General Conditions and with the national standards of the Government of Sri Lanka
in respect of navigable waterways, shall comply with all orders and directions given
by the Engineer in respect of the safety of navigation and with requirements for
marking watching and lighting any structure, craft or equipment which may be used
in the construction of the works.


The contractor shall not lay down or provide permanent moorings for his floating
plant. The Contractor’s temporary moorings shall be positioned and installed to the
approval of the Engineer. Prior notification of their installation shall be officially
given to all users of the waterway.

Spoil excavated or dredged by the Contractor shall not be deposited in such
locations as will infill or cause silting up of existing low water channels.

The Contractor shall without delay raise and remove or recover any material,
construction plant (floating or otherwise) or vessel belonging to or hired by him
which may be sunk stranded or gone adrift in the course of construction completion
or maintenance of the works, or otherwise deal with the same as the Engineer may
direct.

The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions and measures to avoid
interruption of service of the existing ferry or navigation as a consequence of his
temporary works or construction of the permanent works.

104.8. Environmental Requirement

The Contractor shall comply, with the Environmental Monitoring guideline in
accordance with the requirement of Statutes/Law of the Government of Sri Lanka
and International standards. In respect of controlling damage to the environment
and controlling pollution the Contractor shall be bound to follow the regulation/law
of the Government of Sri Lanka and any statutory bodies or the requirement of such
laws of his own home country whichever is more stringent

(1) Specific Environmental Concerns

The specific environmental concerns are:

• Emissions to air (dust, smoke etc.)
• Emissions to land (solid and liquid domestic & industrial waste etc.)
• Emission to water (dredge spoil, surface & foul water drainage etc.)
• Noise and visual pollution

These are now discussed one by one while it will be indicated to which particular
contract they are applicable.

(2) Emissions to air

• Generation of dust

The spread of wind blown soil particles derived from unpaved haulage and access
roads, reclaimed areas and stockpiles of soil, and dust from rock handling may cause

a problem during the dry season if strong winds prevail. Such dust may cause health
risks for the labourers and for the population living nearby.

As part of his obligation to minimise disturbance to other users. The Contractor is
required to water unpaved roads under dry weather conditions and impose speed
limits on access and haulage roads.

The nature of a major earthworks operation inevitably gives rise to a dust nuisance
the effects of which are to be minimized as far as practicable by watering and route
and speed control of vehicles. The dust nuisance from the Contractor’s crushing
plant is to be controlled by the use of water sprays.

• Air pollution

Exhaust emissions caused by the use of vehicles, machinery and other engine driven
equipment used by the contractors should not exceed the exhaust emission
standards as set forward in the tables below.

Emission standard values for Motor Vehicle Exhaust

Parameters Unit Standard
determinates Value
‐ Black smoke (1) Hattridge Smoke Unit (HSU) 65(3)
(2)
‐ CO g/m3 24
(2)
‐ hydrocarbon percent volume 4(4)
(2)
‐ NOx g/m3 2
ppm 180
g/m3 2
ppm 600

(1) measured at two thirds of maximum rotating speed
(2) whichever is lower out of two values expressed in two different units
(3) For vehicles more than 5 years old, or that have completed 80,000 km the standard
value is 75 HSU
(4) Two and tree wheeler vehicles with engine displacement less than cm3 the standard
value is 5 volume percentage.

Emission standard values for Black Smoke Emission from boat/ship/vessel

Parameters determinats Unit Standard
Value
‐ Black smoke (1) Hattridge Smoke Unit (HSU) 65(3)

(1) measured at two thirds of maximum rotating speed

The ambient air quality in and around the work site should meet the standard values
for ambient air quality described in the following table. Regular maintenance of
engines and equipment is considered to be important for reducing emission and
emissions.


Ambient air quality standards for different categories of environments.

Concentration {μg/m3]
Category of Environment Suspended Particu SO2 CO Nox
Mater
• industrial and mixed use 500 120 5000 100
• commercial and mixed use 400 100 5000 100
• residential and rural 200 80 2000 800
• sensitive 100 30 1000 300

The category of environment of the area surrounding the work site can be characterized as
rural. For ambient air quality the standards for residential and rural areas should therefore
be met.

• Garbage separation

- All chemical products must be collected separately from the “normal garbage
- Used oil must be collected into “used oil” drums.
- Used batteries must be collected in “used batteries” storage for recycling
- Used oil fuel filters must be collected in a leakage free drum

Garbage collecting system: The location of the garbage containers will be set out in the plan
of the working area and camp area. The garbage from any vessels will be brought ashore.

Garbage discharge: The garbage will be brought to a dedicated area approved for disposal
by the Engineer.

• Other environmental procedures:

- Building/construction material must be ordered from the stores in the exact
amounts needed, if possible in the right size, to minimize wastage.
- All material must be stored in the correct way.
- Leftover material (usable) must be re‐used or recycled.
- Discharging or charging of chemicals shall take place above a “leakage bin”
- Cleaning of tools (painting) shall take place in a bin, suitable for handling solvents.
- Causing nuisance shall be kept to a minimum
- The working area must be kept clean and tidy
- Effective maintenance of equipment is demanded.

(3) Emission to water

The Engineer is required to approve all work method associated with the excavating of soil
below water level and subsequent disposal. Locations for disposal of soil excavated from
below water level in order of preference are:

(1) Disposal on land through hydraulic fill;
(2) Disposal on char land if not occupied for agriculture;
(3) Aquatic disposal into the deepest channels of the river.

Unless approved otherwise, dredged material shall be deposited on land.

• Land disposal

‐ Test have revealed the presence of any toxic or polluting substance in the river bed
material.
‐ the bunds or embankments for the hydraulic fill are to be of such quality that no
spills or breaches occur, damaging neighboring land;
‐ to prevent water logging of agricultural areas in the flood plains surrounding
hydraulic fill areas, drains shall be constructed around the embankments to evacuate
water by gravity to the river;

• Aquate disposal

‐ The concentration of suspended sediment in the effluent from the excavation works,
discharged into natural or existing water courses shall never exceed 4,000 ppm.
‐ Disposal of dredged material shall only take place on char land if not occupied for
agricultural purposes or in the major river channel minimizing the impact on riverine
transport and on aquatic (organisms living in or at the river bottom);

(4) Noise and visual pollution

• Visual pollution

The contractor shall ensure all temporary works are kept neat and tidy and the site
cleaned regularly.

• Noise pollution

The Contractor, in planning his works must recognize the distinction between noise
pollution as experienced by the villagers living around the works and noise hazards
to the labour working on the construction sites

In the case of villagers the main forms of noise pollution will be:

- pile driving
- crushing plant
- generators
- haulage and compaction equipment
- earth and rock moving equipment is of consideration.

These activities should be confined to day time operation and not after 10pm.
In the case of Contractors labour the impact of noise pollution on operators and
adjacent personnel could be much more of a problem:

Ear protectors shall be used in any environment where the noise may exceed the
level of 80 dB (A).

Notice boards must be placed in areas where the noise exceeds this level and where
ear protectors must be worn. Noise levels should be measured if any doubt exists.

Spot checks shall be made by Engineer with the assistance of Department of
Environment to verify whether ear protectors (a) are provided by the various
contractor and (b) are in fact used by the labour working in the noisy area.

No payment will be made for services under this clause as the same shall be deemed
to have been included in the general obligation of the Contractor.
104.9. Construction Programming

The programme required by Clause‐13 of the General Conditions of Contract shall be
updated monthly, unless agreed otherwise with the Engineer, and shall be in the
form of a bar chart and time/location chart, covering all the main items of work,
showing their interrelation with and interdependence on other items of work, and
be laid out in a format which will permit progress of the various items to be
indicated on it throughout the execution of the work. It shall be supported by a
critical path network in form capable of being updated, showing all requisite
operations, earliest and latest start and finish dates, durations, float and critical
activities.

The programme shall show inter alia:

a) The dates by which the contractor requires information from the Engineer in respect
of further detailed Drawings or schedules.

b) The dates by which the contractor requires instruction from the Engineer to carry
out work described in the contract as provisional sums.

c) The dates by which the contractor will require to place any Nominated Sub‐
contracts.

d) The delivery periods and dates of arrival on site of all major plant and materials and
their relationship with the river regime.

e) The dates and periods during which the contractor will require to enter onto sites
allocated to other contracts in the execution of his works.

f) The dates and periods set out on Drawings and described more fully in Volumes‐2
and 3 of the Particular Specification.

The method statement required in accordance with Clause‐13 of the General
Conditions of Contract shall include a list of major items of plant and equipment to
be used, methods of movement of materials, temporary works and other like
mattress.

The contractor must submit working drawings as necessary with programme details.
No work should be carried out on the programme submitted without the Engineer’s
prior written approval should the contractor carry out work prior to the Engineer
approval the Engineer will have the right to withhold payment for such work.

If the programme is to be revised by reason of the Contractor falling behind his
programme, he shall produce a revised programme showing the modifications to the

original programme necessary to ensure completion of the works or any part thereof
within the time for completion as defined in Clause 13 of the Conditions of Contract
or any extended time granted pursuant to Clause 43 of the Conditions of Contract.
Any proposal to increase the tempo of the work must be accompanied by positive
steps to increase production by providing more labour and plant on Site, or by using
the available labour and plant in a more efficient manner.

Failure on the part of the Contractor to work according to the programme or revised
programme, shall be sufficient reason for the Employer to take steps as provided for
in the Conditions of Contract and shall be construed as not executing the Works in
accordance with the Contract.

The approval by the Engineer of any programme shall have no contractual significance
other than that the Engineer would be satisfied if the work is carried out according to
such programme and that the Contractor undertakes to carry out the work in
accordance with the programme, nor shall it limit the right of the Engineer to instruct
the Contractor to vary the programme should circumstances make this necessary. The
above shall not be taken to limit the right of the Contractor to claim for damages or
extension of time to which he may be fairly entitled to in terms of the General
Conditions of Contract for delay or disruption of his activities.

Should the Employer request and the Contractor undertake to finish the whole or part
of the Works ahead of the time originally required by the Contract, payment for
accelerating the work shall only be made if agreed to beforehand in writing and
according to the terms of such agreement

104.10. Progress Meetings

Meeting will be held at intervals not exceeding one month between the Engineer
and the contractor to discuss the progress of the works and any problems that may
have arisen. The contractor shall give to the Engineer at these meetings details of his
progress to date in relation to the programme.

104.11. Returns and Reports

At monthly intervals the contractor shall, in accordance with his obligations under
Clause 35 of the General Conditions of Contract, supply to the Engineer, returns of
labour and constructional Plant and, in addition, a schedule of the main work items
in each section of the works showing progress during the previous week and
proposed progress for the coming week and total progress to date.

At monthly intervals, and not later than the first week in every month, the
contractor shall submit to the Engineer a progress report for the previous month
that shall include, but not be limited to the following:

a) a programme marked up with any agreed amendments and showing the
actual percentage completion of each of the main items of work, in such a
way that comparison can be made with the scheduled percentage
completion of each item.

b) Weather and other conditions, including daily temperature range, humidity
rainfall, wind speed and direction, river levels etc.

c) Summary of staff and labour employed on the site.

d) Schedule of Constructional Equipment on site with dates of arrival and
departure as appropriate including equipment operational condition..

e) Schedule of principal material items with dates of placing orders progress of
manufacture, dates of delivery to site etc.

f) Record of site safety

All reports, statements, returns, diagrams or drawings etc. which the contractor is
required to submit to the Engineer during the progress of the works shall be
furnished in quadruplicate unless otherwise directed.
104.12. Telecommunications

The Contractor shall provide and maintain telephone, fax and e‐mail and mobile
telephone with necessary connections and facilities in the site office during the
period of the construction and maintenance. The Contractor shall also maintain the
telephone facilities and pay all bills for the whole period as stated above.
104.13. Compaction – General

Compaction of materials shall be carried out in layers of uniform thickness using
approved compaction equipment including combinations thereof if required by the
Engineer to achieve the specified compaction.

Compaction with rollers shall commence at the edges and progress towards the
centre except in super elevated and other stretches of unidirectional cross‐fall,
where the rolling shall commence at the lower edge and progress towards the upper
edge. When commencing rolling from an edge, rollers shall run forward and
backward along the edge several times till the edge strip becomes firm to provide
lateral support. The roller shall then move inwards parallel to the centre line of the
road in successive passes with the tracks made by successive passes overlapping.
Rolling shall continue till the specified degree of compaction is achieved throughout.
When rolling is terminated at an edge, the procedure similar to that for commencing
rolling at an edge shall be adopted. During rolling, the top of the layer being rolled
shall be checked for levels and cross‐fall and any irregularities in these regards,
corrected by scarifying the material in the affected area and by removing or adding
materials and continuing with the rolling until the entire area being rolled has been
brought to a state of uniform and desired compaction.

104.14. Mixing & Control of Moisture Content Before Compaction

Before compaction is commenced (other than for bituminous mixes), each layer of
uncompacted material shall be brought to a state of uniform composition, texture
and moisture content by thorough mixing and addition of water or drying as
required. The Contractor shall be deemed to have taken account of the fact that the
materials encountered may vary widely with respect to their in‐situ moisture
contents and the moisture contents at which the materials are to be compacted as
to be specified separately for each type of material. Accordingly, the materials may
have to be wetted by adding water or dried to the required degree, along with
intimate mixing of the entire mass of the materials.
104.15. Compaction Equipment

Mechanical equipment shall be used for compacting materials by rolling, tamping
and watering the materials (if needed) before compaction. For other operation such
as spreading, mixing and shaping, manually operated tools and equipment is
preferred on mechanical equipment alone or a combination of two shall be used.
The choice of equipment and the procedure of their use shall be subject to the
approval of the Engineer, upon his being satisfied about their effectiveness on the
basis of trial compactions.

It shall be understood by the Contractor that different type of materials are likely to
require different kind of compaction equipment, including successive applications
thereof, for achieving the specified degrees of compaction and the Contractor shall
keep available a fleet of compaction equipment of the requisite kinds, sizes and
number.

For compacting along narrow strips e.g. along widening of pavements and in
restricted areas e.g. behind bridge abutments, appropriate sized purpose made
compacting equipment will be required and the same shall be provided by the
Contractor.

All equipment shall be of modern construction by established manufacturers and of
proven efficiency and shall be operated and maintained at all times by skilled
personnel in a manner acceptable to the Engineer.

104.16. Water and Power Supply Arrangements

The Contractor shall

a. provide at his own risk and cost all water, lighting and electric power required for
use in the works at such frequent locations as are necessary and shall pay all costs,
fees and charges in connection therewith and allow all sub‐contractors free use of
the same. The Contractor shall make his own arrangement for his requirements of
potable water, by

b. provide and maintain temporary water storage together with any distribution piping
which may be necessary and subsequently remove all installations to the approval of
the Engineers.

c. Provide, wire for, and connect lighting and power for the works.

d. Provide mechanically driven and operated water bowsers with effective spray
equipment at all times to ensure that compaction can proceed without any hold up
on account of watering.

104.17. Drainage during Construction

All embankment, sub‐grade, shoulder and pavement layers under construction shall
be protected from any accumulation of water due to rains or other causes and from
erosion due to flow of water. All such layers under construction shall be provided
with cross fall to facilitate surface run‐off and, if necessary, the cross fall shall be
supplemented with temporary drains to prevent accumulation of water.

104.18. Prevention of Damages to Embankments, Sub‐grade Layers, Pavement Layers and
Shoulders in Position.

Excavations for new constructions and placement of materials and their in situ
processing and compaction for new construction shall be done in such a manner and
with such precautions as not to cause any damage to embankments, sub‐grade
layers, shoulders and pavement layers in position including those pre‐existing and
intended to form part of the improved road.

104.19. Compaction Trials
For demonstrating the efficacy of mixing and compaction equipment and the
working methods proposed to be used by the Contractor for different kinds of
materials, the Contractor shall carry out compaction trials before full‐scale
construction on the road and during construction throughout the course of the
contract as required by and in close cooperation with the Engineer. Based on results
of compaction trials and construction observation, the Engineer shall reserve the
right to direct the use of particular mixing and compaction equipment and methods
and disallow the use of others for compacting different kinds of materials in
accordance with these specifications.
104.20. Compaction Control

After the compaction of each layer of material, field density tests shall be done on
the compacted material. For locating test points, successive compaction panels
covering the entire area of work shall be designated in advance of compaction. The
frequency of the tests (in terms of square metres of compacted area of each layer
for which minimum one test is to be done) shall be separately specified for different
kinds of material. The test locations shall be chosen through random sampling
techniques.


Acceptance of compaction by the Engineer shall be based on the mean value of 5 to
10 determinations of field dry density. The mean dry density of a set of tests shall be
equal to or exceeding the specified value and the standard deviation shall not
exceed 4 percent of the mean dry density. If this is not satisfied the entire work to,
which the set of density tests relates shall be treated as ‘non‐acceptable’.

For material other than bituminous mixes, the compaction panels in which the
compaction work is found as non‐acceptable shall be given re‐compaction
accompanied with scarifying and wetting/drying for the entire thickness of the
compacted layer to achieve the specified degree of compaction. In case of
bituminous mixes, the compaction panels in which the compaction work is found as
non‐acceptable shall be stripped off and re‐laid with fresh bituminous mix and re‐
compacted.
104.21. Dispersal of Hauling Equipment

Hauling equipment bringing materials to the site of work shall be dispersed
uniformly over the surface of the previously constructed layers in order to avoid
rutting and uneven compaction. The materials from hauling equipment shall not be
dumped in concentrated heaps but deposited as evenly distributed layers.
104.22. Protection to Newly Constructed Layers

No traffic other than construction traffic shall be allowed on any earthwork or
pavement layer until a surfacing has been applied either as single surface treatment
or an asphalt concrete layer. The approval of the Engineer shall be required before
traffic is allowed to pass over newly constructed road. Any defects caused by traffic
passing over the construction layers shall be remedied in accordance with these
Specifications.
104.23. Bridge Construction Sequence

The Contractor shall programme the construction sequences for all bridges and
submit a written statement thereof for the approval of the Engineer. The bridge
construction sequence shall consider, as a minimum, each phase of bridge
construction with respect to traffic control the effects on the existing bridges and the
completed bridges. Where the Contractor proposes to partially demolish an existing
bridge to allow for phased construction, he shall demonstrate to the Engineer’s
approval that the partially demolished bridge is safe for use by his equipment and
other road users.

The control of traffic during the construction of the bridge will be in accordance with
the Specification, 103. Where the bridge construction sequence has been specified
on the Drawings, the Contractor shall follow the sequence specified. The Contractor
may propose an alternative construction sequence provided he can demonstrate, in
a written statement, that the sequence is not detrimental to the Works or road users
in any way.

No work shall commence on a bridge until the written consent to the construction
sequence has been given by the Engineer in compliance with clause 13 of the
General Conditions of Contract.

104.24. Materials Testing by Independent Laboratories

In addition to the Site testing facilities described Sub Section 130.8, the Contractor
shall be responsible for arranging for the field and off‐Site laboratory tests indicated
as the responsibility of the Contractor in the Specifications, to be performed by
testing laboratories approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible
for all attendance on staff from these approved testing laboratories, including if
necessary the provision of transport for personnel, equipment and test specimens.
104.25. Special and Additional Testing

In addition to the testing described above, the Engineer may require further testing
to be carried out. Such special and additional testing shall be arranged by the
Contractor under the direction of the Engineer.
104.26. Staff for Materials Testing

The Contractor shall provide qualified laboratory engineers, technicians, assistants,
labourers, etc. to carry out sampling and testing of materials in accordance with
these Specifications. Laboratory staff shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer
and be available to assist the Engineer with materials testing, as and when required.
104.27. Codes and Standards

All the codes of practice, standards and specifications applicable shall be the latest
edition with all corrections and incorporations as on 30 (thirty) days before the final
date for submission of the tender. The Contractor will supply two (2) copies of the
codes of practices, standards, one to the Engineer and other to the Contractor’s use.
104.28. Test Results and Records

The Contractor shall maintain complete records of test results which may be
inspected by the Engineer at any time. All test results shall be recorded on standard
forms approved by the Engineer and shall be countersigned by the Engineer.
Completed forms shall clearly show the locations of samples, sampling dates and
testing dates. Samples shall be numbered serially at the time of sampling. The
Engineer may witness any sampling or testing carried out in the laboratory. The
Contractor shall have the right to witness any sampling or testing carried out by the
Engineer. On completion of the Contract the original copies of all test results shall be
handed over to the Employer, via the Engineer.
104.29. Measurement and Payment

No separate payment shall be made for compliance items under this section.
Payment shall be deemed to be included in the contractor’s rates.

105. CONTROL OF MATERIALS
105.1. Sources of Supply and Quality Requirements
Delete the text of sub‐clause 105.1 and substitute the following :‐

The Contractor shall be responsible for the provision of all materials required to
construct the Works. All material salvaged and/or removed from the works remains
the property of the Government. The Contractor shall be responsible for the cost of
replacement in the event of unauthorised use or removal.

The Contractor shall be responsible for opening up all quarries and borrow areas and
shall organise his method of operations so that only materials of a type and quality
approved by the Engineer shall be selected for use in the Works.

The Contractor is at liberty to select and use material from his own sources providing
the requirements of this section are fully met.
105.2. Storage of Materials
Delete the text of sub‐clause 105.2 and substitute the following :‐

Materials shall be stored in such a manner as to ensure preservation of their specific
quality and suitability for use in the Works. Stored materials shall be located so that
they are readily available for use and can be easily inspected by the Engineer. Private
property shall not be used for storage purposes without the written permission of
the owner or lessee.

Storage sites shall be free of vegetation and debris, free draining and if necessary
shall be elevated. Material placed directly on the ground shall not be used in the
Works unless the site has been prepared and surfaced with a 10 (ten) centimeter
layer of sand or gravel to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

Stockpiled material shall be stored in such a manner as to prevent segregation and
excessive moisture content. The maximum height of stockpiles shall be limited to
five metres.

Stockpiling of the various aggregates to be used for asphalt concrete, bituminous
surface treatment, penetration macadam or concrete will be permitted only in
separate stockpiles for each nominal size of aggregate. These shall be separated to
prevent mixing of materials.

Aggregate stockpiles for base course and sub‐base shall be protected from rain to
prevent saturation of the aggregates which would result in a reduction in the quality
of the placed material or adversely affect the placement of the material.

105.3. Handling of Materials
No change.

105.4. Approval of Sources of Material (Add the following)
The sources of the materials shall be selected by the Contractor, but approved by
the Engineer before the materials are haulage to be used on the site. For this
purpose, the Contractor shall furnish all relevant test data for representative
samples from each source area as desired by the Engineer and also afford
opportunities for the Engineer to visit the sources areas.

Notwithstanding approval of sources of materials, materials as brought to the work
site for use in the Works shall be subject to acceptance or rejection by the Engineer
based on quality control tests to be performed before use in construction.
105.5. Stockpiling of Materials (Add the following)

All materials brought to the Site shall be stockpiled and stored carefully at approved
locations and in a systematic manner so as to prevent deterioration or mixing of
different materials or contamination. Materials which have suffered contamination
or deterioration due to improper storage shall not be used in Works and shall be
removed from the stock piling area.

The materials shall be free from foreign, organic or any other deleterious substances
such as vegetation and perishable matters, or any other substance which in the
opinion of the Engineer may affect placing mixing and compaction of the material or
adversely affect the future performance of the Works. Material may be tested in
stockpiles by the Engineer to check suitability for use in the Works.
105.6. Temporary Stockpiling of Materials (Add the following)

Where the work programme is such that materials cannot be placed directly in their
required position or mixing of two or more materials is required to meet the
requirements of the Specification for a material the Engineer may authorise their
removal into temporary stockpiles. Stockpile sites shall be to the Engineer’s
approval and shall be prepared by clearing and grading followed by compaction.

The material shall be stockpiled in successive layers of approved thickness over the
full stockpile area to the approximate dimensions required by the Engineer and shall
subsequently be reloaded and placed.
105.7. Control Tests on Material During Construction (Add the following)

The Contractor shall use only such materials in construction as conform to the
requirements regarding composition, grading, physical properties and engineering
characteristics, as specified for different kinds of materials. For this purpose pre‐
construction control tests shall be carried out on representative samples collected at
random of materials brought to construction site or at stockpiles on the following
scale. The Engineer shall have the authority to have these tests at more frequent
intervals where quality of a material is in doubt.

Table 105‐7‐A

Qty. of material for
which minimum one
Type of Material Type of Test
test or one set of
test is to be done

Ordinary fill for Particle size analysis 4000 cu.m.
embankment Atterberg limits 4000 cu.m.
Moisture density 4000 cu.m.
relationship 4000 cu.m
CBR Test (set of 3
specimens)
Selected fill for Particle size analysis 2000 cu.m.
granular capping Atterberg limits 2000 cu.m
layer
relationship
CBR test (set of 3 2000 cu.m.
specimens)
Aggregates for Particle size analysis 500 cu.m.
granular sub‐base Plasticity Index 2000 cu.m.
relationship
CBR Test (set of 3 2000 cu.m.
specimens)
Los Angeles abrasion 2000 cu.m.
test
Water Absorption 2000 cu.m.
Aggregates for bit Particle size analysis 250 cu.m.
road base and Plasticity Index 1000 cu.m.
wearing course
Water absorption 1000 cu.m.
Los Angeles abrasion 1000 cu.m.
test
Bulk specific gravity 1000 cu.m.
Flakiness index 1000 cu.m.

Moisture content test before compaction of materials shall be carried out on a layer
by layer basis for each compaction panel on the following scale:

Table 105‐7‐B
Area of layer under compaction for
Type of Materials which minimum one moisture
content test is to be done

Ordinary fill for embankment 1000 m2
Granular capping layer 750 m2
Aggregates for granular sub‐base 500 m2

Moisture content test shall be repeated whenever the moisture content of the
material changes due to drying or wetting or if there be uncertainty (e.g. due to

variability) in the results of earlier tests.
105.8. Material Testing (Add the following)

The physical properties and engineering characteristics of the materials mentioned
in these specifications shall be established through appropriate tests on
representative samples collected in such manners and at such frequency as
described in Table‐105‐7‐A or as directed by the Engineer. The tests shall be carried
out in accordance with test methods as mentioned in these specifications or as
required by the Engineer.

Moisture density relationship tests on fill materials, sands, soil‐sand mixes and
aggregates of different kind shall be carried out (as per AASHTO:T180).

105.9. Applicability of General Specifications (Add the following)

These General Specifications shall apply in combinations with specifications in
particular for embankments, pavement layers and shoulders, etc, given separately.
In case of any conflict between the General Specifications and the separate
specifications given in particular, the provisions of the later shall govern.

105.10. Payment (Add the following)

No separate payment shall be made for items under this section. Payment shall be
deemed to be included in the Contractor’s rates.
106. GENERAL RULES FOR MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT


Unless stated to the contrary, any thickness, area or volume in any items of the
Works shall be measured only on finished work after compaction.

The payments for the various items shown in the Bill of Quantities shall constitute
full compensation for performing all of the requirements of the Contract for the item
of work as specified including furnishing all necessary materials, labour, tools,
equipment, supplies, testing, and incidentals.

The Contractor shall be deemed to have complied with the requirements of Bill of
Quantities, Contract Rates, Pay Items, Material at site, Provisional Sums, as listed
below. Contractor should also fulfil with the requirement of General Conditions of
Contract clause 12 Sufficiency of Tender.

Bill of Quantities

The quantities set out in the Bill of Quantities are estimated quantities and are used
for the comparison of Tenders and awarding the Contract. It must be clearly
understood that only the actual quantities of work done or materials supplied will be

measured for payment, and that the billed quantities may be increased or decreased
as provided for by the General Conditions of Contract.

Contract Rates

In computing the final contract amount, payments shall be based on actual
quantities only of authorised work done in accordance with the Specifications and/or
Drawings. The tendered rates shall apply, subject to the provisions of the General
Conditions of Contract, irrespective of whether the actual quantities are more or less
than the billed quantities.

The Contractor shall accept the payment provided in the Contract and represented
by the prices tendered by him in the Bill of Quantities, as payment in full for
executing and completing the work as specified, for procuring and furnishing all
materials, labour, supervision, plant, tools and equipment, for wastage, transport,
loading and offloading, handling, maintenance, temporary work, testing, quality
control including process control, overheads, profit, risk and other obligations and
for all other incidentals necessary for the completion of the work and maintenance
during the Period of Maintenance.

This Clause shall be applicable in full to all pay items except as these requirements
may be specifically amended in each case.

In particular the Contractor shall be deemed to have included time related and fixed
costs as specified in sub section108 under the appropriate items in the General and
Preliminary section of the Bill of Quantities and not in rates for work items.

Pay Items

The descriptions under the pay items in the various sections of the Specifications,
indicating the work to be allowed for in the tendered prices for such pay items, are
for the guidance of the Contractor and do not necessarily repeat all the details of
work and materials required by and described in the Specifications.

These descriptions shall be read in conjunction with the relevant Specifications
and/or Drawings and the Contractor shall, when tendering, allow for his prices to be
inclusive as indicated above.

Materials on Site

No payment will be made in any Certificate for any materials on site until such time
as they have been incorporated in the permanent works and approved.

Provisional Sums

The Bill of Quantities may contain certain Provisional Sums so designated and
entered as a preliminary allowance to cover the cost of work, materials, goods or
services to be provided by the Contractor and which have not been fully specified or
measured or to cover the cost of unforeseen items of work or contingent
expenditure. Work done under a Provisional Sum shall only be executed upon a
written order by the Engineer which order shall also specify the method of payment.


The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer such receipts or other vouchers as may be
necessary to prove the amounts paid and, before ordering materials, shall submit to
the Engineer quotations for the same for his approval. In respect of such of the works
executed on a day works basis, the Contractor shall, during the continuance of such
work, deliver each day to the Engineer an exact list of the names, occupation and time
of all workmen employed on such work and a statement showing the description and
quantity of all materials and equipment used other than the Contractors equipment
which is included in the percentage addition in accordance with such day work
schedule. Each list and statement will, if correct, or when agreed, be signed by the
Engineer and a copy returned to the Contractor.

The Contractor shall not be entitled to any payment unless such lists and statements
have been fully and punctually provided. Where the Engineer considers that for any
reason the provision of such lists was impracticable he shall nevertheless be entitled to
authorise payment for such work provided that, such work or value thereof shall, in his
opinion, be fair and reasonable
106.1. Overhaul
No overhaul on materials shall be measured or paid. The cost of haulage is deemed
to be included in tendered rates for supply of materials in accordance with
Conditions of Contract Clause No. 12
106.2 Measurement of Pavement for Area and Volume Based Payment
a. Area Basis
Add the following paragraph:

Dimensions used to determine area shall be measured horizontally.
b. Volume Basis
No change.
106.3 Scope of Rates for Different Items of Work
No change.
106.4 Facilities for Verification of Measurements
No change.
106.5 Selection of Pay Items
No change.
106.6 Sub Divisions Within Pay Items
No change.
106.7 Substantial Completion of the Works (Add the following)

The Contractor shall note that the Engineer reserves the right not to certify the
Works to be "substantially completed" as required by the General Conditions of the

Contract, unless the following portions of the Works are completed according to the
Specifications:

(a) all bituminous seal works or, where a seal is not included, the uppermost
gravel layer.

(b) all drains and drainage structures, for the construction of which timeous
instructions were given by the Engineer.

(c) finishing of all support or retaining structures.

Opening of individual sections or lots shall not entitle the Contractor to receive a
Completion Certificate unless the sections are separately identified in the contract or
qualifies otherwise in terms of Clause 46 of the Conditions of Contract.

107. SIEVE DESIGNATIONS

No changes to Standard Specifications.
108. CONTRACTOR’S ESTABLISHMENT ON SITE
108.1. Office, Equipment Testing Facilities etc.

It is the Contractor’s responsibility to acquire land for the siting of all his offices,
accommodation, stores, testing facilities, equipment yards and workshops and for all
temporary works and for the reinstatement of such land on completion of the
Contract to the satisfaction of the owners. The Contractor shall obtain the approval
of the Engineer to the siting of offices, accommodation, stores, testing facilities
equipment yards and workshops before such land is acquired and he shall indemnify
the Employer against all claims and charges in respect of the occupation, use and
reinstatement of the land.

The Contractor is solely responsible for the satisfactory accommodation of all his
employees and for complying with all regulations and requirements in this respect.
108.2. Legal relations and Responsibility to the Public

The Contractor shall take the steps necessary to comply with the terms of the
Conditions of Contract, particularly in respect of the insurances and indemnities
required, and he shall comply with all regulations of statutory authorities.
108.3. Measurement

The Contractor’s Site Establishment shall be measured under three items :‐

(a) as a lump sum for Establishing of all the facilities on or adjacent to the
Site that the Contractor deems necessary for fulfilment of all his obligations
under the Contract. These facilities shall include but not be limited to:
Transport of plant, buildings, temporary facilities to the site, Provision and

erection of temporary buildings, office facilities on the site, Provision of
access roads, hard standings etc. within construction camps, Airfares,
temporary accommodation during the mobilisation phase, permits, bonds
etc. necessary to establish expatriate supervisory personnel upon the site,
Establishment of testing and process control facilities on the site, Erection of
contract signboards, Provision of transportation facilities for supervisory,
administrative and technical personnel, Provision of housing for supervisory,
administrative and technical personnel.

The Contractor’s price for the lump sum shall be a true reflection of the
Contractor’s costs taking into account the Advanced Payment and the
Contractor shall provide a breakdown of the lump sum with proof of actual
costs to justify the lump sum price to the Engineer. Payment for mobilisation
shall be made when the Contractor has established himself upon the site to
the satisfaction of the Engineer.

(b) by month or weeks for maintaining the Contractor’s Site Establishment
for as long as necessary to execute and complete the Works. The monthly
rate for maintaining the facilities shall be deemed to include for but not be
limited to: Salaries, leave fares, gratuities and miscellaneous entitlements of
supervisory personnel, technical personnel, surveyors, administrative
personnel, security personnel, store men etc, Maintenance of offices,
buildings, laboratories and transportation facilities for administrative,
supervisory and technical personnel, Communications, Maintenance of
housing for administrative, supervisory and technical personnel, Overheads
off site, Financing charges, Compliance with the provisions of the contract
whether specified or implied.

This item shall not include for maintenance or depreciation of plant, the
cost of which shall be deemed to be included in the relevant work item.

(c) Payment for demobilisation shall be compensation in full for the costs of
removing plant, equipment, facilities and personnel from the site and shall
include (but not necessarily be limited to):Transport of plant, buildings,
temporary facilities from the site and export if required, Dismantling and
removal of all temporary facilities on the site, Airfares for repatriation of
expatriate personnel, Removal of contract sign boards, Restoration of all
construction camp areas to a satisfactory condition.

108.4. Payment
Item Unit
108(1) Mobilisation Lump Sum

108(2) Maintenance of the Contractor's
Establishment Month

108(3) Demobilisation Lump Sum

109. INFORMATION FURNISHED BY THE EMPLOYER

Certain information contained in these Contract documents or provided separately
prior to Tender by the Employer is being offered in good faith but the type of
information supplied, no guarantee can be given that any or all of the information is
correct or representative of the actual conditions.

The Employer accepts no liability for the correctness or otherwise of the information
supplied or for the resulting damages, whether direct or consequential, should it
prove during the course of the Contract that the information supplied is either not
correct or not representative. Any reliance which the Contractor places on this
information shall be at his own risk and the Contractor shall be deemed to have
checked the correctness of the information prior to submission of his Tender.
110. WORKMANSHIP AND QUALITY CONTROL

The Contractor in responsible for producing work which conforms in quality and
accuracy of detail to the requirements of the Contract see such clause 6 of General
Conditions of Contract and the Contractor shall, at his own expense, institute a
quality control system and provide experienced engineers, foremen, surveyors,
materials technicians, other technicians and other technical staff, together with all
transport, instruments and equipment, to ensure adequate supervision and quality
control of the Works at all times.

The cost of all supervision and quality control, including testing, carried out by the
Contractor shall be deemed to be included in the rates tendered for the related
items of work, except where as specifically provided for in the Contract.

The Contractor’s attention is drawn to the provisions of the various sections of the
Specifications regarding the minimum frequency of testing that will be required for
quality control. The Contractor shall, at his own initiative, increase this frequency
where necessary to ensure adequate control.

On completion of every part of the Works and submission to the Engineer for
examination, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the results of all relevant
tests and survey checks that he has carried out indicating compliance with the
Specifications.

For cement, bitumen, mild steel deformed bars, high tensile steel, pre‐stressing
materials, bearings, and similar other materials the Contractor shall furnish the
manufactures test certificates to the Engineer. When required by the Engineer to
carry out some essential tests at the manufactures’ plants or at laboratories other
than the site laboratory, the cost of samples, sampling, testing and furnishing of test
certificates shall be borne by the Contractor.

The method of sampling and testing of materials shall be as required under relevant
clauses stipulated in these Specifications or as approved by the Engineer.

The Contractor shall be required to demonstrate the adequacy of the equipment for
each operation to establish its their capability to achieve the requirements to the
Specification to the satisfaction of the Engineer before commencement of the work.


All equipment provided shall be of proven efficiency and purpose made for the
required operation and shall be operated by skilled operators and maintained at all
times to perform its proper function in a manner acceptable to the Engineer.

No equipment or personnel will be removed from Site without Consult of the
Engineer [see sub‐clause 49(1) of General Conditions of Contract].

111. SELECTION OF LABOUR

The Contractor will be expected to maximise the use of labour for all operations
where it can be effectively used to attain the required standards. The Contractor is
expected to show number of Labourers used each month including participation of
female worker if appropriate in specific project area in the form shown below:

Month Work Days Generated Number of Labourers
Male Female Total Male Female Total

Initiation of Equal participation of women for the work shall be encouraged. To
achieve this, the Contractor is expected to select the labour force by lottery for the
local community as much as possible if the skilled people are available. Prior to
recruiting the labour, the Contractor should inform the people in the surrounding
area at least 5 days before the selection takes place by announcing through a public
announcement system and by displaying posters in public places of the target
villages (Any person within than 3 km of the work site). All participants of the lottery
will be registered as per their identification card. Two parallel draws will be arranged
for men and women separately, so that equal numbers of men and women are
selected. The Contractor can select more people than he needs, keeping them in a
reserve list, to allow for changes in the attendance. A new lottery should take place
if the work proceeds for more than two months.

No Child labour shall be selected for the works; the age limitation of the child shall
be in accordance to Sri Lankan Labour standard.

The Contractor is responsible for training the labourers.

112. WORK EXECUTED BY THE EMPLOYER OR OTHER CONTRACTORS

The Employer reserves the right to execute, on the Site, works not included in the
Contract and to employ for this purpose either his own employees or other
contractors (see clause 31 of the General Conditions of Contract)

The Contractor shall ensure that neither his own operations nor the actions of his
employees shall interfere with the operations of the Employer or his contractors on
such works and the same obligations shall be imposed on the Employer or
contractors in respect of work being executed under the Contract.

The Contractor shall provide unhindered access to all parts of the Site to the
Employer and authorised representatives of the Employer and of public bodies and
corporations and to contractors employed by the Employer and he shall make
available to such authorised persons the use of all temporary access tracks in or
about the Site.
113. PROTECTION OF PUBLIC SERVICE FACILITIES

Any work involved in moving and reinstating existing services that may be affected
by the construction of the Works shall be undertaken by the appropriate statutory
authority.
113.1. Existing Services

The Contractor may be ordered to carry out certain works for and on behalf of
various statutory service authorities and he shall also provide, with the prior
approval of the Engineer, such assistance to the various bodies as, may be
authorised by the Engineer.

No removal of or alterations to any public utility shall be carried out unless ordered
by the Engineer.

The Contractor shall take all reasonable precautions to protect, and shall provide
temporary support to, existing services during construction and during relocation of
such services.

Whenever services are encountered that interferes with the execution of the works
and requires moving or relocation, the Contractor shall advise the Engineer who will
determine the extent of the work involved.

Any pipe, cable, conduit or other known service of any nature whatsoever, which has
been damaged as a result of the Contractor’s operations shall be repaired and
reinstated forthwith by the Contractor or by the authority concerned, all at the
expense of the Contractor and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

The Employer will not be held liable or responsible for any delay in completion of the
Works under this Contract which may occur due to any damage occurring to such
services in consequence of the Contractor’s operations.
113.2. Payment

The work of temporarily supporting and protecting public utility services during
execution of the Works shall be deemed to be included in the Contractor’s rates and
prices and no extra payment shall be made for the same.

The Engineer may instruct the Contractor to assist in the demolition and/or
rebuilding of property within or outside the ROW. The amount of work involved
shall be determined on Site and as instructed by the Engineer.

Payment for such work shall be made under a Provisional Sum and shall be based on
the Special Schedule of Rates for such work in force at the time.


The Pay Item shall be :‐

Item No Description Pay Unit

113.1 Demolition/Rebuilding of Property Prov. Sum
114. MAINTENANCE OF EXISTING ROADS
114.1. General Obligations

The Contractor shall take all reasonable steps to minimise nuisance during the
construction of the works (see clause 22 of General Conditions of Contract).

All existing highway and roads used by vehicles of the Contractor or any of his sub‐
contractors or suppliers of materials or plant, and similarly any new roads which are
part of the Works and which are being used by traffic, shall be kept clean and clear
of all dust/mud/extraneous materials dropped by the said vehicles or their tyres.
Similarly, all dust/mud/extraneous materials from the Works spreading on these
highways shall be immediately cleared by the Contractor.

Clearance shall be affected immediately by manual sweeping and removal of debris,
or, if directed by the Engineer, by mechanical sweeping and clearing equipment, and
all dust, mud and other debris shall be removed entirely from the road surface.
Additionally, if so directed by the Engineer, the road surface shall be hosed or
watered using suitable equipment.

Any structural damage caused to the existing roads by the Contractor’s
constructional plant or equipment shall be made good at Contractor’s expense.

114.2. Payment

All these activities shall be deemed to be the included in the Contractor’s rates and
prices and no separate payment will be made therefore.

115. PROTECTION OF THE WORKS AND REQUIREMENTS TO BE MET BEFORE
CONSTRUCTION OF NEW WORK ON TOP OF COMPLETED WORK IS COMMENCED

The general obligations of the Contractor in terms of the Conditions of Contract
“Care of the Works” shall include, inter alia, the following :‐

i) The provision of temporary drainage works such as drains, open channels, banks
etc. and the furnishing and operation of temporary pumps and such other
equipment as may be necessary to adequately drain, protect and dewater the
Works and Temporary Works. This will be in addition to any permanent drainage
works specified and installed, and in addition to any temporary drainage works
specifically paid for separately.


ii) Care shall be exercised not to allow material in borrow pits to become excessively
wet, to keep all completed layers properly drained, to avoid dumps of material on
completed layer work that shall inhibit surface drainage or form wet spots under
and around dumps, and to protect all parts of the Works against erosion by floods
and rain.

iii) Material shall not be spread on a layer that is so wet that damage could be
caused to the layer during compaction of a subsequent layer when the road is
open to traffic

iv) When material is spread out on the road, it shall, during wet periods, be given a
good cross fall and a light compaction on the surface with a steel‐wheeled roller,
in order to facilitate run‐off during rainy weather.

v) Fill and cut slopes shall be promptly repaired whenever damaged by surface
water.

vi) Excavations for pipe drains, culverts, service ducts and similar structures shall be
adequately protected against possible ingress of water during rainstorms

vii) All completed layer work shall be protected and maintained until the following
layer is applied. Maintenance shall include immediate repair of any damage or
defects which may occur and shall be repeated as often as necessary to keep the
layer in tact and in good condition.

viii) Before any completed layer is primed or a following layer is constructed
thereon, any damage to the existing layer shall be repaired in a manner approved
by the Engineer, so that after repair, or reconstruction if necessary, it will
conform in all respects to the requirements specified for that layer. All repair
work shall be submitted to the Engineer for inspection before covering up.

ix) The Contractor shall inform the Engineer of damage or defects to any work
before repair or maintenance and the Engineer shall instruct the extent and
method of repair. The previously constructed layer shall be thoroughly cleaned
of all foreign material and the Contractor shall request its inspection by the
Engineer before construction of the following layer or application of a prime coat,
surfacing or surface treatment. In the case of all bituminous work in particular
the existing layer shall be thoroughly broomed and all dung, clay, and other
deleterious material completely removed. Where necessary the surface shall be
sprayed with water before, during and after brooming to remove all foreign
material.
115.1. Payment

Work performed as part of the above obligations shall not be measured and paid for
separately and the cost thereof is deemed to be included in the Contractor’s rates
and prices.

116. REMEDIAL WORK

When upon examination by the Engineer any part of the Works or any plant fails to
conform to the Specification requirements, or is at any stage before final acceptance
damaged so that it no longer conforms to the requirements of the Specifications, the
Engineer shall instruct its complete removal and replacement, at the Contractor’s
expense, with satisfactory work, plant or material. In special cases the Engineer may
instruct the Contractor to apply remedial measures in order to make good any such
defects or damage. The actual remedial measures taken shall be entirely at the
Contractor’s own cost but subject to the Engineer’s approval regarding the details
thereof.

In particular remedial measures shall ensure that the final product is in full
compliance with the Specifications, shall not endanger or damage any other part of
the Works and shall be carefully controlled and submitted to the Engineer for
examination when completed or at any intermediate stage as may be required.
For the guidance of the Contractor an indication about what may be required in the
more common cases of defects or damage is given below, but the Engineer will in no
way be bound to approve of or adhere to the measures indicated, as the actual
remedial measures will be dictated by the circumstances of each particular case.
116.1. Earthworks

i) Where a cut slope has been over‐excavated, reinstatement by backfilling will not
normally be permitted and the entire slope may need to be re‐trimmed to obtain
a uniform slope
ii) Where the floor of a cutting has been over excavated it will normally require
backfilling and re‐compaction with approved material of higher quality then the
cut material. All necessary measures shall be taken to drain ground water that
may accumulate in backfilled sections.
iii) Excess widths of fills will need to be trimmed to the design profile.
iv) Where erosion has occurred on the surface of cuts or fills, the damage shall be
made good by backfilling with suitable material and re‐trimming. In more serious
cases the slope may have to be cut back and backfilled after benching and
compacted to the required standard of compaction with suitable small
equipment followed by re‐trimming.
116.2. Local Defects in Pavement Layers

i) Where remedial measures are taken to make good localised defects the length
and width of the area to be repaired by equipment shall be such as to
accommodate the full width of the equipment used and of a reasonable length to
ensure effective repair.

ii) The depth to which material will have to be removed will depend on the defect
and the type of material. Gravel layers will need to be broken up to a depth of at
least 75mm and crushed stone will usually need breaking up over its full depth.
Asphalt material will normally require removal for its full depth.

116.3. Concrete

Defective concrete work will normally need the cutting back and complete removal
of any weak or honey‐combed sections and making good using approved bonding
agents to bind fresh concrete to old concrete. Cracks, of permitted to remain, shall
be injected with approved compounds and test cores drilled to test the efficacy of
the injection process.

116.4. Payment

The Contractor shall undertake remedial work at his own expense.
117. WATER SUPPLY ARRANGEMENTS

The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for the procurement,
transportation, storage, distribution and application of water needed for
construction and other purposes except where otherwise specified.

Only clean water free from undesirable concentrations of deleterious salts and other
materials shall be used. All sources of water used shall be approved by the Engineer.

The Contractor shall ensure that sufficient supply of water is at all times available to
ensure that sufficient supply of water is at all times available to ensure continuity of
work.
117.1. Payment

No direct payment shall be made for providing water and the cost thereof shall be
included in the rates tendered for the various items of work for which water is
needed.
118. ELECTRCITY SUPPLY

The Contractor shall provide and maintain at his own expense his own electrical
supply and shall provide and maintain all temporary power and lighting and all
associated apparatus for the duration of the Contract at his own expense. Once
equipment becomes redundant, and having received the approval from the
Engineer, the Contractor shall disconnect and remove said equipment and make
good any works disturbed at his own expense.
118.1. Payment

No direct payment shall be made for providing electricity supply and the cost thereof
shall be included in the rates tendered for the various items of work for which
electricity is needed.
119. PAYMENTS & TOLERENCES

The work specified in the various sections of these Specifications shall comply with
the various dimensional and other tolerances specified in each case. Where no
tolerances are specified, the standard of workmanship shall be in accordance with
normal good practice.

Where the work is not constructed in accordance with the "authorised" dimensions,
plus or minus any tolerances allowed, the engineer may nevertheless in his sole
discretion accept the work for payment. In such cases no payment will be made in
respect of quantities of work or material in excess of those calculated from the
"authorised" dimensions and where the actual dimensions are less than the
"authorised" dimensions, minus any tolerance allowed, quantities for payment shall be
based on the actual dimensions as constructed.
119.1. Payment

and prices.
120. PHOTOGRAPHIC RECORDS
The Engineer shall make photographs and other records to be agreed with the
Contractor of the condition of the surfaces of the site immediately before entering
upon them for the purpose of constructing the Works. Each month, the Contractor
shall make a set of up to 100 digital colour photographs illustrating progress of the
Works, or any other photograph that he may deem necessary for record purposes,
and provide these to the Engineer for his records. The copyright of all photographs
shall be vested in the Employer and the Contractor shall not use any photograph for
any purpose whatsoever without the Engineer's approval
120.1. Payment

and prices.
121. ACCESS TO SITE

The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for access to the various parts of
the Site where works are to be constructed but all such accesses shall be subject to
the approval of the Engineer.

Where the access to the Site proposed to be used by the Contractor lies across the land
of any third party the Contractor shall produce to the Engineer the written consent of
the owner and the occupier of the land over which the access lies before making use of
the same.

The Contractor shall also make a record to be agreed by the Engineer of the conditions
of the surfaces of any land (and of any crops on such land) over which access lies
before he uses it for access purposes and he shall keep all such surfaces in a reasonable
state of repair during the executing of the Works. On the termination of the

Contractor's use of such access he shall restore any lands, roads or other property to a
condition at least equal to that existing before his first entry upon them.
121.1. Payment

and prices.
122. CO‐OPERATION AT SITE

All work shall be carried out in such a way as to allow access and afford all
reasonable facilities for any other contractor and his workmen and for the workmen
of the Employer and any other person who may be employed in the execution
and/or operation at or near the site of any work in connection with the Contract or
otherwise.

The Contractor shall use his best endeavours to co‐operate with such persons without
interfering with them and shall observe all the instructions and orders of the Engineer
in that connection.

In the preparation of his programme of work the Contractor shall at all times take full
account of and co‐ordinate with the programming of work of other contractors.
.
122.1. Payment

and prices.
123. ROADS AND SITE TO BE KEPT CLEAN

The Contractor shall take great care and all reasonable precautions to ensure that
roads and thoroughfares used by him either for the construction of the Works or for
the transport of plant, labour and materials are not made dirty as a result of such
construction or transport and in the event of their becoming thus dirtied in the
opinion of the Engineer the Contractor shall take all necessary and immediate steps
to clean them.
123.1. Payment

and prices.
124. SECURITY OF THE WORKS

The contractor’s responsibility for the security and safe working environment of the
site commences from the time possession is given to him by the Employer.


As soon as possible after possession has been given, the boundary of the site shall be
marked out, and the contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval his
proposals for maintaining the boundary and the security within.

The contractor’s proposals shall include a security control system which shall consist
of sufficient equipment and personnel to prevent unauthorized access and which can
meet the prevailing circumstances to ensure the safety and security of persons and
property on the site.

The contractor shall erect and maintain at his own expense suitable and approval
temporary fencing and gates to enclose certain areas of the works being carried out,
the office and accommodation compounds, and other areas of land as may be
necessary to implement his obligations under the contract or as directed by the
Engineer.

All authorized persons shall be registered by the Engineer and this register shall be
provided and maintained by the contractor.

124.1. Payment

and prices.
125. SUPPRESSION OF NOICE

The Contractor shall make every reasonable endeavour both by means of temporary
works and by the use of appropriate plant or silencing devices to ensure that the
level of noise resulting from the execution of the Works does not constitute a
nuisance.
125.1. Payment

and prices.
126. SAFETY

The Engineer shall be notified by the Contractor immediately any accident occurs
whether on Site or off Site in which the Contractor is directly involved which results
in any injury to any person whether directly concerned with the Site or whether a
third party. Such initial notification may be verbal and shall be followed by a written
comprehensive report within 24 hours of the accident.

Transportation of any material by the Contractor shall be in suitable vehicles which
when loaded do not cause spillage and all loads shall be suitably secured. Any vehicle

which does not comply with this requirement or any of the local traffic regulations and
laws shall be removed from the Site.
126.1. Payment

and prices.
127. METHOD OF WORKING

The Contractor shall adopt a method of working such as to permit the satisfactory
and timely completion of the Works and to limit disturbance and damage to a
minimum.

The Contractor shall only open up sections of the Works for which his resources are
sufficient to maintain continuous and methodical progress. If in the opinion of the
Engineer, the Contractor has not complied with the foregoing, he shall be entitled to
suspend sections of the works pursuant to clause 40 of the General Conditions of
Contract until other sections have been completed to a stage where risk of damage
through exposure to traffic and the elements and inconvenience to public traffic has
been minimised.

Constructional Plant used in the execution of the Works shall be of a design and used in
a manner approved by the Engineer. The Engineer may at any time withdraw his
approval for any method of working proposed by the Contractor and the Contractor
shall immediately adopt another method of Working. If such change shall be required
to achieve satisfactory progress or workmanship, the Contractor shall have no claim
against the Employer for costs incurred by him in changing the method of working or in
the provision and use of other plant.
127.1. Payment

and prices.
128. TEMPORARY WORKS

The Contractor shall provide, maintain and remove on completion of the Works all
temporary works necessary for the construction of this permanent works. All
temporary works shall be properly designed and constructed to carry such loads as
may be imposed upon them and shall be safe and suitable in every respect for
providing access or carrying plant or for the construction of the Works or other
purposes.
128.1. Payment

and prices.

129. SETTING OUT AND CROSS SECTION SURVEY AND DRAWINGS
129.1. General

The Contractor’s attention is drawn to the requirements of clause 18 of the General
Conditions of Contract regarding setting out.

The Contractor shall check the condition of all permanent Ground Markers and shall
satisfy himself that they have not been damaged or disturbed and are true in regard
to position and level. Where markers have been destroyed, damaged or displaced
the Contractor shall reinstate a new marker based on the markers which remain. A
new marker shall not be used unless its true position and level has been established
and the new values verified by the Engineer.

Where a marker is likely to be disturbed during construction operations the
Contractor shall establish suitable reference markers at locations where they will not
be disturbed during construction. No marker shall be covered, disturbed or
destroyed before accurate reference markers have been established and the details
of the position and levels of such markers have been submitted to the Engineer and
approved by him. The Contractor’s reference markers shall be of at least the same
quality and durability as that of the existing markers.

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the method of setting out he proposes
to employ. To ensure beyond doubt that the complex elements of the road or
structure are truly and correctly located the Contractor shall check all setting out by
a different approved method. The Engineer may at any time request the Contractor
to submit proof that his setting out has been satisfactorily checked.

Accurate control of line and level shall be provided by the Contractor at all stages of
construction. In respect of the road itself control shall be at 20m intervals, or such
closer intervals as may be directed, on horizontal and vertical curves. Wherever
necessary, but particularly on completion of the sub grade, sub base and the base
the Contractor shall re‐establish stake‐line pegs at sufficiently close intervals to
accurately determine the edges of the base, surfacing and kerbing, guard‐rails and
other road elements permanently exposed to the eye.

The Contractor shall make all provisions necessary for the Engineer to check and
measure the setting out of the Works and shall be in attendance to agree
measurements and levels before construction works commence.
129.2. Setting Out and Cross Sections

The Contractor shall set out the centre‐line and establish chainage reference points
which are to be marked out on site and recorded. Level Bench Marks at the both
sides of the bridge shall be established and checked regularly and tied into the
Permanent Ground Markers.


The Contractor shall survey the existing ground along cross sections to the centre
line at 20m intervals, or such closer intervals as may be directed by the Engineer.
Levels shall be taken at all changes of slope and all features to a distance of 5 metres
beyond the right of way. Distance between levels shall not exceed 5 metres.

The Contractor shall prepare cross sections in AutoCAD format indicating the existing
road, shoulder and other features, Chainage, offset and agreed levels, to a format
agreed with the Engineer. The cross sections shall be suitable for plotting to a
horizontal scale of 1:50 and a vertical scale of 1:20 on A3 size page.

The Contractor shall complete the cross section drawings by adding the new
carriageway, shoulder, ditches, side slopes and pavement construction layers

The cross sections shall be the basis for measurement and payment.

The Contractor shall complete the setting out of the centre‐line within four weeks
following the date of the Engineer’s Notice to Commence the Works. Sufficient
survey and drafting staff shall be available to enable the full setting out of the Works
and for the drawing up of cross sections to be complete such that no delay is caused
to the setting out of the Works.

The Contractor shall employ on the Works sufficient qualified surveyors with at least
2 years experience in similar works and have a thorough knowledge and experience
of computer methods for calculating quantities. The surveyors shall have available
sufficient modern survey equipment and instruments which shall be to the
Engineer’s approval. The Contractor shall assist and supply services of his surveyor
and his team to the Engineer whenever required by the Engineer or his
Representatives in checking and measuring the Works.

No construction work shall commence on any section of the road until the cross
sections for the whole of that section have been completed.

129.3. Measurement & Payment

No separate payment shall be made for compliance items under this section.
Payment shall be deemed to be included in the contractor’s rates.
129.4. Payment

No separate payment shall be made for items under this section. Payment shall be
deemed to be included in the Contractor’s rates.

130. FACILITIES FOR THE ENGINEER AND HIS STAFF
130.1 Description

“The Contractor shall provide offices, laboratories (with equipment), housing,

vehicles, survey equipment and support staff for the Engineer and his staff as
described in Appendices 2 to 7 inclusive”.

For the purpose of this Clause the phrase “Engineer and his staff” shall be taken to
describe any of the following:

a) Supervision consultant’s staff
b) Road Development Authority (RDA) staff

The facilities shall include the provision of the land, site grading, access roads,
parking facilities for vehicles, construction of buildings and all other necessary
appurtenance such as drainage systems, fences, utilities, area development etc.

The Contractor shall supply furniture, fittings, equipment, labour and material as
detailed in the Appendices in order to provide fully functioning and usable facilities
and to provide the Engineer’s staff with the necessary resources for the
administration and supervision of the Works.

After providing the facilities, the Contractor shall maintain them for the required
duration of the Contract. “The cost of such maintenance is deemed to be included in
the Contract Price and shall include but shall not be limited to the following :‐

− Keeping buildings in good repair and decorative order, and free from pests,
insects etc.

− Cleaning offices and laboratory daily.

− Maintaining the grounds around buildings.

− Supplying kitchen‐ware and crockery and cleaning materials.

− Supplying toilet and cleaning equipment and materials.

− Providing power, drainage , telephone services, fax and E‐mail facilities &
cellelular telephones.

− Servicing and repairing all fittings and equipment installed.
eg : air ‐ conditioners, fans, cookers etc.

− Provide adequate security for offices and Engineer’s laboratory.

Upon Completion of the Works and when instructed by the Engineer the Contractor
shall remove the facilities to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
130.2 Land for Facilities

The Contractor shall construct the facilities on land purchased or leased by the
Contractor.

Where the Contractor leases land for construction of the facilities, the Contractor
shall ensure the terms of the land lease allow the use of the premises for as long as
they are required and shall take into account possible extension or overrun of the
Contract period and use of the facilities after the issue of the Defects Liability
Certificates. The terms of the lease shall incorporate provisions whereby the
Contractor may assign his interests to the Employer.

The Employer may elect to provide land for facilities in which case adjustment will be
made to the appropriate Bill of Quantities. The Employer shall not be, or deemed to
be, responsible or obligated to provide land for facilities.
130.3 Sole Use of Facilities

The facilities shall be for the sole use of the Engineer and his staff during the period
of the Contract and as further required to finalise measurement, payment etc., but
shall revert to the Contractor when no longer required, unless otherwise stated or
directed.
130.4 Services

The Contractor shall arrange, where possible, for the connection of water mains,
drainage and sewerage and mains electricity to all facilities. In circumstances where
location of facilities makes such connections impracticable, the Contractor shall
provide and operate generators to supply adequate power and shall provide pumps
to supply water from wells or storage tanks.

Telephone services including at least one direct line shall be provided as indicated in
the Appendices.
130.5 Rented Premises

Rented offices and housing accommodation as an alternative to constructing
buildings may be considered by the Engineer in locations where large town centres
are conveniently situated along the Works. Rents payable shall be at normal market
rates and shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. The total cost for using
the alternative of rented offices and/or accommodation shall be such that there is
no extra cost to the Employer compared with the priced items. Payment for such
accommodation would be made monthly through the monthly Certificate, on the
basis of approved rent charges plus 10%. Where rented accommodation is chosen
by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide and
fix, those items of furniture, equipment and fittings as listed in Appendices which the
Engineer shall select. In this case, the Contractor shall provide a breakdown of the
relevant Bill Item detailing his rate per item of furniture. Payment shall be made on
the basis of the rate multiplied by the number of items provided.
When rented accommodation is approved by the Engineer, a Variation Order will be
issued to cover changes on the above pricing basis.
130.6 Offices and Furnishings

Description


The offices to be provided are described in Appendix 2. The offices including fittings,
furnishings and equipment, shall be completed within 12 weeks from the date of the
Engineer’s Notice to Commence the Works. Where the Engineer approves, the
Contractor may rent suitable premises in accordance with the Specifications. The
offices shall remain the property of the Contractor on Completion of the Works.
Any rented offices provided shall be available and ready for use within 6 weeks of
the above date.
The Contractor shall provide temporary office space for the period from 6 weeks
from the date of the Notice to Commence the Works until completion of the
permanent offices. In the event of the Contractor failing to provide such temporary
or permanent office facilities the Engineer will provide suitable offices for his use
and any costs may be deducted by the Employer from the Contractor in accordance
with Clause 49.4 of the conditions of Contract.

The fittings, furnishings and equipment to be provided in the offices are described in
Appendix 2, and shall remain the property of the Contractor on completion of
Works.

Measurement

Offices for the Engineer shall be measured as the number of each type of office
provided.

Furniture for the offices of the Engineer shall be measured as a lump sum item for
each complete set of fittings, furnishings and equipment provided for Type 1 or Type
2 office.

Payment

Payment for each type of office shall include for:

(1) Acquisition and payment for land whether purchased or leased.
(2) Provision and subsequent removal of the building and access roads, hard
standing and fences etc.
(3) Connection and subsequent disconnection of electricity, telephone and water
services or alternative provision of same.
(4) Provision of drainage systems for both sewerage and surface waters.
(5) Reinstatement of all land to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

Payment for each office shall be made upon completion of each office and upon
occupation by the Chief Resident Engineer/Resident Engineer and his staff to the
extent that they can properly perform their duties under the Contract to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.

Payment for Furniture for each type of office shall include procurement, delivery and
installation of all the items detailed in Appendix 3.

Payment for each set of Furniture provided shall be made upon satisfactory
installation and acceptance by the Engineer of all items to be provided.

The payment for offices furniture and services shall represent full and final payment
for the Contract Items and Contractor shall not be entitled to any further
compensation irrespective of any extension to the Contract period for whatever
reason.



130 (1) Provide office Type 1 Lump Sum

130 (2) Provide office Type 2 Lump Sum

130 (3) Provide Engineer’s Laboratory Lump Sum

130 (4) Provide furniture for Office Type 1 Lump Sum

130 (5) Provide equipment for Office Type 1 Lump Sum

130 (6) Provide furniture for Office Type 2 Lump Sum

130 (7) Provide equipment for Office Type 2 Lump Sum

130 (8) Provide furniture for Engineer’s Laboratory Lump Sum

130 (9) Provide equipment for Laboratory Lump Sum

130.7 Accommodation for the Engineer

Description

The accommodation to be provided for the Engineer and staff is described in
Appendix 3. The furniture, fittings and equipment for each house are also detailed
and listed in Appendix 3. The houses and furniture etc. remain the property of the
Contractor on contract completion.

The accommodation together with furniture, etc., shall be complete and ready for
occupation within 12 weeks from the date of the Engineer’s notice to Commence the
Works.

Where the Engineer approves, the Contractor may rent suitable accommodation.

Any rented accommodation provided shall be available and ready for occupation
within 6 weeks of the above date.

Where the Contractor fails to provide the houses within the time specified, the
Contractor shall provide, at no cost to the Employer, suitable hotel or other
accommodation as approved by the Engineer for the site staff intended to occupy
the houses until such time as the houses are ready for occupation.


Measurement

Accommodation for the Engineer shall be measured as the number of each type of
house provided.

Furniture, fittings, equipment etc., for the houses for the Engineer and his staff shall
be measured as a lump sum item for each complete set of furniture, fittings and
equipment provided for each type of house.

Payment

Payment for each type of house shall include :

(1) Acquisition and payment for land, whether purchased or leased.
(2) Provision and subsequent removal of building, access roads, hard standing,
fences etc.
(3) Connection and subsequent disconnection of electrical, telephone and water
services or alternative provisions for same.
(4) Provision of drainage systems, for both sewerage and surface water
(5) Reinstatement of land to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

Payment for each house shall be made upon satisfactory completion of each house
and upon occupation by the intended resident(s).
Payment for furniture, fittings, and equipment for each type of house shall include
procurement, delivery and installation of all the items detailed in Appendix 5.

Payment for each set of furniture provided will be made upon satisfactory
installation and acceptance by the Engineer of all the items to be provided.

The payments for houses and furniture shall represent full and final payments for
the Contract Items and the Contractor shall not be entitled to any further
compensation irrespective of any extension to the Contact period for whatever
reason.

Pay items shall be :‐


130(10) Provide Type 1 accommodation Lump Sum

130(11) Provide Type 2 accommodation Lump Sum

130(12) Provide furniture, fittings and
equipment to Type 1 accommodation Lump Sum

130(13) Provide furniture, fittings and
equipment to Type 2 accommodation Lump Sum

130.8 Engineer’s Laboratory and Equipment

Description

The Engineer’s Laboratory to be provided is described in Appendix 6. The Laboratory
is required for testing materials used for the Permanent Works therefore priority
shall be given to its construction and the supply of equipment required as detailed in
Appendix 7. The operational Laboratory facility, complete with equipment, shall be
ready for use within 12 weeks from the date of the Engineer’s Notice to Commence
the Works.
At the end of its use the Laboratory and equipment shall become the property of the
Contractor.
a) Materials Testing by Independent Laboratories

In addition to the Site testing facilities described Sub Section 130.8, the Contractor
shall be responsible for arranging for the field and off‐Site laboratory tests indicated
as the responsibility of the Contractor in the Specifications, to be performed by
testing laboratories approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible
for all attendance on staff from these approved testing laboratories, including if
necessary the provision of transport for personnel, equipment and test specimens.
b) Special and Additional Testing

In addition to the testing described above, the Engineer may require further testing
to be carried out. Such special and additional testing shall be arranged by the
Contractor under the direction of the Engineer.
c) Staff for Materials Testing

The Contractor shall provide qualified laboratory engineers, technicians, assistants,
labourers, etc. to carry out sampling and testing of materials in accordance with
these Specifications. Laboratory staff shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer
and be available to assist the Engineer with materials testing, as and when required.

Measurement

The Engineer’s Laboratory shall be measured as the unit number provided.

Laboratory equipment shall be measured as a Provisional sum item for the set of
equipment provided and installed and tested.

Payment

Payment for the Engineer’s Laboratory shall include for:

(1) Acquisition and payment for land whether purchased or leased.
(2) Provision and subsequent removal of the building, access road, hardstanding,
fences etc.

(3) Connection and subsequent disconnection of electrical and water services, or
alternative provisions.
(4) Provision of drainage systems for waste, sewerage and surface water.
(5) Reinstatement of land to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

Payment for the Engineer’s laboratory shall be made upon satisfactory completion of
the Laboratory and upon occupation and use of the Laboratory by the Engineer’s
Representative to the extent laboratory staff can properly perform their duties
under the Contract to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

Payment for the Laboratory Equipment shall include procurement, delivery,
installation and testing of all the items listed in Appendix 9. Contractor shall
maintain the equipment in good serviceable order through the Contract period.

Payment for the set of Laboratory Equipment will be made upon satisfactory
installation and testing and acceptance by the Engineer of all the items to be
provided.

The payments for the Laboratory and Equipment shall represent full and final
payments for the Contract items and the Contractor shall not be entitled to any
further compensation irrespective of any extension to the Contract period for
whatever reason.


130 (14) Provide Engineer’s Laboratory Provisional sum
Building includingEquipment as
per Appendix 7

130 (15) Special and Additional Testing Provisional sum
130(16) Staff for Materials Testing Person Month

130.9 Stationery for the Engineer

Description

The Contractor shall provide stationery for the Engineer and his staff as required and
duly requisitioned by authorised personnel. Stationery shall include all consumable
items and shall include paper, printing materials (e.g. printer cartridges, printer
ribbons, copier toner etc.) and all general office requisites. This item excludes parts,
etc., required for repair or replacement in equipment supplied by the Contractor for
the offices. Such parts would be included in the Contractor’s obligation for
maintenance of offices.

Measurement

Stationery for the Engineer shall not be measured but payment shall be based on the
original invoices and receipts for stationery material ordered and received by the
Project Manager/Engineer’s Representative’s staff.

Payment
Payment for stationery shall be the actual net invoiced price of stationery provided
(with all suppliers’ discounts deducted) with a fixed 10 % (Ten percent) of the net
invoiced price added to allow for all procurement and delivery costs incurred by the
Contractor. Payment of invoiced cost with the 10 % mark‐up shall be full payment
for stationery provided and shall be made from the provisional sum item contained
in the Bill of Quantities.



130 (17) Provide Stationery for the month
Engineer
130.10 Provision of Hotel Accommodation for the Engineer and his Staff

Description

The Contractor shall be responsible for providing hotel or other approved
accommodation (including meals etc. but excluding alcoholic beverages) for the
Resident Engineer and other staff who should be provided with housing during the
mobilisation period until the housing and furnishing specified in the Contract are
ready for occupation by the staff.

The standards of the hotel accommodation shall be to the approval of the Engineer.

Measurement

Provision of Hotel Accommodation shall be measured as the number of man‐weeks
of accommodation provided. Accommodation provided after the time the houses
for the Engineer are due to be completed will not be measured, and shall be
supplied at the Contractor’s expense.

Payment

Payment will be made against accommodation invoices as instructed by the
Engineer.



130 (18) Provide hotel accommodation Provisional Sum
for Engineer’s staff

130.11 Survey Equipment

Description

The equipment to be provided is detailed in Appendix 5.

The equipment shall be provided within 10 weeks from the date of the Engineer’s
Notice to Commence the Works.

The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the equipment which shall include:‐

(a) Maintaining, calibrating and servicing equipment as required.
(b) Repairing all defects including accidental damage as required.
(c) Replacing any lost or stolen items.
(d) Effecting insurance of the equipment against damage or loss.

The equipment shall be supplied and maintained for as long as it is required
including period after the Completion of construction for final measurement
purposes.

The equipment with the exception of consumable items shall be returned to the
Contractor when no longer required by the Engineers and shall remain the property
of the Contractor.

Measurement

Survey Equipment shall be measured as a lump sum item for complete set of
instruments and items detailed in Appendix 5 satisfactorily provided, and
maintained.

Payment

Payment for Survey Equipment shall be made at the stated Provisional sum price and
shall be payable when all the items are provided. This payment shall represent full
and final payment to the Contractor for the Contract Item for the complete period of
use and the Contractor shall not be entitled for further compensation irrespective of
any increase to the Contract period for whatever reason.

In the event the Contractor fails to maintain, repair or replace any Equipment item,
the Engineer shall effect such maintenance, repairs or replacement and shall deduct
the cost from payment due under this Contract Item.



130 (19) Provide Survey Equipment Lump sum
as per Appendix 5

130.12 Maintenance of Engineer’s Facilities

Description

The Contractor shall maintain in good decorative and working order all the buildings
and the contents thereof supplied under the Contract. The Contractor shall be
responsible for supplying all power, water and telephone services to all the facilities,
and shall meet all costs for these services unless otherwise stated.

The Maintenance of the Engineer’s offices and Laboratory shall include daily cleaning
to the satisfaction of the Engineer’s Representative and provision of toilet materials.
Cleaning of housing is excluded from the Contract scope.

The Contractor shall maintain all grounds and gardens that surround the buildings to
the satisfaction of the Engineer.

The Contractor shall maintain in good condition, service regularly and repair or
replace as required all items of furniture, fittings and equipment supplied and
installed in the offices, laboratory and houses.

The Contractor shall provide adequate security to guard and secure the facilities on a
24 hours per day basis.

The Contractor shall be responsible for the cost of all local telephone charges but
shall not be responsible for the cost of any overseas calls made from telephones
provided in offices and any calls made from telephones provided in houses.

The Contractor shall provide adequate number of driver, fuel, oil, insurance, license
maintenance, repairs and all other running and maintenance for vehicle.

Measurement

Maintenance of each facility shall be measured as the number of weeks during which
maintenance for each facility is satisfactorily provided. Maintenance shall not be
measured during any period occurring between the expiration of the Contract period
(including awarded Extension of Time) and the date the Works are certified as
complete. Measurement will be made for maintenance performed after the
certified completion of the Works, during the time the facilities are required by the
Engineer’s staff for post‐construction Contract completion activities.

Payment

Payment for Maintenance of each facility shall include, all labour, materials and
equipment required for satisfactory maintenance of the facilities and shall include all
other costs including but not limited to supply of electricity, water and telephone,
cleaning, disposal of rubbish, guarding, repairing equipment and all other work
required to ensure the facilities and equipment provided are in good operational
order.




130 (20) Maintenance of office Type 1 Month
Including furniture, fittings
and equipment

130 (21) Maintenance of office Type 2 Month
including furniture, fittings
and equipment

130 (21A) Maintenance of Engineer’s Laboratory Month
including furniture, fittings
and equipment

130(22) Maintenance of accommodation Month
Type 1 including furniture,
fittings and equipment

130(23) Maintenance of accommodation Month
Type 2 including furniture,
fittings and equipment

130(24) Maintenance of vehicle type 1 Month
Including driver, fuel, oil, insurance,
license maintenance, repairs and
all other running and maintenance

130(25) Maintenance of vehicle type 2 Month
Including (boat man,) fuel, oil, insurance,
license maintenance, repairs and
all other running and maintenance
130.13 Clerical and Technical Staff

Description

The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with staff to assist in the administration
and supervision of the Works. The staff provided shall be experienced and be
capable of performing their allotted duties. Engineer shall obtain Employer’s prior
approval for recruitment of these staff. The Contractor shall ensure the continuity of
the services of the selected personnel.

In particular, laboratory and survey assistants shall be capable of assisting the
Engineer’s staff in material testing and survey work respectively and have at least
five years experience in similar works. Draughtsman shall be conversant in civil
works and have at least 3 years experience in AutoCAD Drafting. Secretaries and the
Administrators/Clerks shall be experienced in using computers/word processors and
be capable of using the latest version of Microsoft Office computer software and
have a good command of the English Language.

Measurement

Measurement of staff for the Engineer shall be by the number of weeks during which
each person is provided and actually works. Measurement will exclude periods
during which the person is absent for any reason. Such absence shall include
approved vacation, sick leave, etc., but not public mercantile holidays.

The working hours per day and the days per week shall be the same as those worked
by the Contractor’s own site personnel in similar positions plus all necessary
overtime as required by the Engineer.

Payment

Payment for staff shall be at the unit rate for each classification as stated in the Bill
of Quantities and which shall include all costs associated with their employment. No
additional payment for any extra hours worked or other reasons will be made.


130 (26) Workmen (classified unskilled) Person Month

130 (27) Workmen (classified skilled) Person Month

130 (28) Survey Assistants (classified skilled) Person Month

130 (29) Secretary Person Month

130 (30) Administrator/Clerk Person Month

130 (31) Office /Field Assistant Person Month

130 (32) Draughtsman Person Month
130.14 Vehicles for the Engineer,

Description

The Contractor shall provide new plain coloured air‐conditioned motor vehicles as
described in Appendix 4 for the exclusive use of the Engineer, and his staff for any
purpose in connection with the Project. Each vehicle shall be to the approval of the
Engineer. The vehicles shall be licensed and insured for use on the public highway
with comprehensive insurance cover for any qualified driver authorised by the
Engineer, together with any authorised passengers and the carriage of good or
samples. For each vehicle, the Contractor shall provide a competent, qualified
driver, subject to approval by Engineer, or Engineer’s Representative, holding a valid
driver’s licence. The Contractor shall provide fuel, oil and maintenance in conformity
with the vehicle manufacture’s recommendations and shall clean the vehicles inside
and outside as required during the period of the Contract. A suitable replacement
shall be provided for any vehicle out of service for more than 24 hours. Vehicles

shall be provided for as long as they are required by the Engineer’s staff including a
period beyond the certified date for Completion of the Works and shall remain the
property of the Engineer on completion.

Measurement

Vehicles for the Engineer’s staff shall be measured as the number of weeks each
type of vehicle is provided and maintained. Measurement shall be made during the
total period the vehicles in use by the Engineer’s staff as instructed by the Engineer.
Vehicles not provided for the full day will be measured for deduction on pro‐rata
basis of Contract unit rate.

Payment

Payment for vehicles shall be made at the unit price for each type of vehicle as
contained in the Bill of Quantities. Payment shall only the supply of the vehicle costs.



130 (33) Provide Provsional Sum
vehicle Type 1

130 (34) Provide Provsional Sum
vehicle Type 2

131. PROJECT SIGN BOARDS
131.1 Description

The Contractor shall erect where directed sign boards in a format acceptable to the
Engineer. At the end of the defect liability period all such signs shall be removed and the
ground reinstated to the approval of the Engineer. Each sign shall be of no less than 2 m2
area and comprise white lettering on a blue background. The following information should
be given on each board:

° Project Title (Construction of Permanent Steel Bridges programme)
° Description & Location of the Project
° Name of Funding Agency (Spanish Government)
° Name of Project Implementation Organisation (United Nations Office
for Project Services (UNOPS)
° Contractor's Name
° Duration of Contract
131.2 Measurement
Project signboards shall be measured as the number of sign boards, satisfactorily
provided, installed, maintained and removed throughout the Contract period.

131.3 Payment
Payment shall be made at the stated unit rate per signboard. The price shall be full
compensation for all materials and labour required to perform the work described.



131(1) Provide and maintain
Project Sign Board Number

132. PROVISION OF INSURANCES, BONDS AND SECURITIES
132.1 Description

The Contractor shall provide all necessary Insurances, Bonds, Guarantees and
Securities as are required and detailed in the Tender Documents, Conditions of
Contract or this Specification.
132.2 Measurement and Payment

Measurement shall be as a lump sum payment for all expenditure with regard to the
provision of Insurances, Bonds and Securities.

Payment shall be made on submission of the original Insurance, Bond, Guarantee or
Security or proof of payment of the same provided that the original shall be made
available to the Engineer within a reasonable time after proof of payment.


Item No. Description Pay Unit

132(1) Provide all necessary Insurances for workforce Lump Sum
For all Risks

132(2) Provide all necessary Bonds, Securities Lump Sum

133. MARBLE STONE FOR FOUNDATION LAYING
133.1 Description

The Contractor shall erect where directed Marble stone for foundation laying in a
format acceptable to the Engineer. Marble stone shall be of no less than 1 m2 area
and the stand (Stone masonry work) height no less than 2m, width no less than 2m
thickness no less than 1m.
133.2 Measurement

Marble stone with stand shall be measured as the number, satisfactorily provided,
installed, maintained throughout the Contract period.
133.3 Payment

Payment shall be made at the stated unit rate per Marble stone with stand. The
price shall be full compensation for all materials and labour required to perform the
work described.



133(1) Provide and maintain
Marble stone for foundation laying Number

SERIES 200 ‐ SITE CLEARING

CONTENTS

201. CLEARING AND GRUBBING ..................................................................................................2
201.1. Description ......................................................................................................................... 2
201.2. Preservation of Property .................................................................................................... 2
201.3. Construction Methods........................................................................................................ 2
.a. General.................................................................................................................................... 2
.b. Clearing and grubbing............................................................................................................. 2
.c. Disposal of Cleared Material................................................................................................... 3
201.4. Measurement ..................................................................................................................... 4
201.5. Payment.............................................................................................................................. 4
.a. Clearing and grubbing............................................................................................................. 4
.b. Removal of trees and removal of stumps of previously felled trees ....................................... 5
202. REMOVAL OF EXISTING STRUCTURES ..................................................................................6
202.1. Description ......................................................................................................................... 6
202.2. Dismantling of Structures ................................................................................................... 6
202.3. Salvaged Materials.............................................................................................................. 7
202.4. Removal of Fences.............................................................................................................. 7
202.5. Back‐filling .......................................................................................................................... 7
202.6. Measurement ..................................................................................................................... 8
202.7. Payment.............................................................................................................................. 8
203. REMOVAL OF ELECTRIC/TELEPHONE POLES .........................................................................8
204. REMOVAL OF EXISTING PAVEMENT.....................................................................................8
204.1. Description ......................................................................................................................... 8
204.2. METHOD ............................................................................................................................. 9
204.3. MEASUREMENT .................................................................................................................. 9
204.4. PAYMENT............................................................................................................................ 9

Series 200 – Site Clearing Page no: 1 of 9
SERIES 200 ‐ SITE CLEARING

201. CLEARING AND GRUBBING
.
Delete the whole text of clause 201 and substitute the following :‐
201.1. Description
.
This work shall consist of all clearing and grubbing necessary for the performance of the
work covered by the Contract in accordance with the Specifications.

The work shall consist of clearing and grubbing the designated areas within the right of way
of all trees, dead wood, snags, vegetation, rubbish and objectionable material and shall
include grubbing stumps and roots and disposing of all material resulting from the clearing
and grubbing. It shall also include the demolition, removal and disposal of structures (other
than those to be removed in accordance with clause 202) that obtrude into or encroach
upon or obstruct the work except where provided for otherwise.
201.2. Preservation of Property
.
Existing roads, improvements, facilities, adjacent property, utilities, services, and trees and
plants designated for preservation shall be carefully protected from injury or damage which
could result from the Contractor’s operations.
201.3. Construction Methods
a. General

Generally clearing and grubbing shall be performed on the areas designated by staking or
detailed in the Contract Documents. If no areas are designated in the Special Provisions or
on the Drawings the areas shall in principle be as follows :

Clearing and grubbing shall be carried out over the area designated by the Engineer.
b. Clearing and grubbing

Where embankment fill is to be constructed all topsoil shall be removed to an average depth
of 0.15m. All surface objects, all trees, including stumps and roots, stumps and roots of
previously felled trees, overhanging branches, except those trees and objects the Engineer
directs to be left undisturbed, shall be cleared and grubbing subject to the following
provisions :

(i) Outside the limits of the earthworks these are allowed to remain provided that the
top of the stumps are not more than 0.30m above ground level. However, trees
within these limits shall be cut so that the stumps are in line with the natural
ground level as far as practicable.

(ii) In areas of embankment construction stumps and roots and solid objects shall be
removed to a minimum depth of 0.5m below the top level of the subgrade or
(perpendicular) below the slopes of the embankments; the removal of these
materials shall be to an extent of 1m outside the embankments.
.

(iii) Where lined drains or ditches are to be constructed stumps and roots shall be
removed to a minimum depth of 0.25m below the excavated bottom or into the
shaped slope.

(iv) Where the embankment fill is more than 3m high non‐perishable solid objects may
be permitted to remain provided that the top of such objects is not more than 0.5m
above natural ground level and the compaction of earthworks will not be hindered.

(v) In cut areas stumps and roots shall be removed to a depth of at least 0.5m below
the top of the subgrade over which the pavement is to be constructed to an extent
of at least 0.5m outside the limits of the base course.

(vi) When instructed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall demolish wholly or in part,
remove and dispose of all buildings, foundation, underground chambers, pits, tanks,
structures, fences and any other obstructions, which have not been designated to
remain. Prior to demolition the Contractor shall ensure that services have been
disconnected to the satisfaction of the appropriate authorities and/or owner. All
holes resulting from the removal of the structures shall be backfilled with approved
material compacted to 92%MDD (AASHTO 180) up to existing ground level or to
such level as directed by the Engineer.

The Contractor shall carefully dismantle such structures and stack in separate
heaps. All materials, which in the opinion of the Engineer, are not suitable for re‐use
shall be removed from the site to spoil areas. Re‐usable materials shall remain the
property of the employer and shall be preserved and protected by the Contractor
until removed by the Employer or until the expiry of the Defects Liability Period or
its equivalent.

(vii) Where, as a consequence of clearing and grubbing, fill material is required in order
to restore the original ground level, it shall be acceptable fill material which shall be
compacted to the density prescribed for layers at that depth below finished sub‐
grade. Such replacement of materials shall be considered incidental to clearing and
grubbing and shall not be measured for payment. Acceptable fill material for
backfilling depressions or excavations shall include brick, stone and concrete debris
if approved by the Engineer and this material shall be compacted in layers to
achieve stable backfill to the approval of the Engineer.
c. Disposal of Cleared Material

(i) Saleable timber as designated by the Engineer shall be neatly stored in an approved
accessible place within or near the right of way as directed and shall be trimmed
and staked in accordance with the requirements of the appropriate Government
Agency to which the timber belongs.

(ii) Unsaleable timber may be used by the Contractor for his own purposes in
connection with the Contract always provided that he has ascertained and complied
with the requirements of the appropriate Government Agencies or Authorities.

(iii) All unsaleable timber except that to be used and all brushes, stumps, roots, logs and
other refuse from the clearing and from the grubbing operations shall be burned or
be disposed by other means approved by the Engineer.

In such cases the Contractor will be solely responsible for making the necessary
agreements and for paying the resulting expenses.

Piles of material for burning shall be placed either at or near the centre of the
cleared area, or in adjacent open spaces where no damage to trees, other
vegetation and adjacent property shall occur.

All burning shall be done in conformance with the regulations and at such times and
in such a manner as to prevent the fire from spreading to areas adjoining the right
of way.

(iv) should the clearing and grubbing be done at a time when burning is not permitted,
the Contractor shall pile all material which is to be burned outside the slope lines
and at a time when burning is permitted he shall return such material to the grade
and burn it.

(v) At the end of such operations the roadway and adjacent areas shall be left with a
neat and finished appearance. No accumulation of burnt, half burnt or other
material shall remain on or adjacent to the right of way.
201.4. Measurement

Clearing and grubbing will be measured on an area basis by the square metre, as indicated in
the Bills of Quantities. The work of clearing and grubbing at disposal sites, material sites, and
borrow pit sites shall not be paid for when such are outside the areas designated for clearing
or grubbing and the Contractor is permitted to exercise his own option as to whether he
elects to use such disposal sites or borrow pit sites.

Any areas occupied by an existing asphaltic concrete, concrete or sealed road or otherwise
maintained area are excluded from the designated areas and shall not be included in
measurement as defined in this sub‐clause.

Removal of trees including stumps and roots unless otherwise specified, of girth less than
500 mm shall be considered as included in clearing and grubbing.

Removal of trees including stumps and roots, as well as stumps and roots of previously felled
trees of girth greater than 500 mm shall be measured in numbers and separately assessed
according to the size categories given below :

(i) girth greater than or equal to 250 mm and less than 1000 mm
(ii) girth greater than or equal to 1000 mm and less than 2000 mm
(iii) girth greater than or equal to 2000 mm and less than 3000 mm
(iv) girth greater than or equal to 3000 mm
For the above purpose the girth shall be measured as follows :

− for trees at a level of 1 m above average ground level
− for stumps of previously felled trees at a level of 1 m above average ground level or
in case the stumps are lower, at the highest level of the stumps.

Branches of overhanging trees of girth greater than 300 mm shall be measured as directed
by the Engineer. The girth shall be the girth of cut.
201.5. Payment
a. Clearing and grubbing

This work measured as provided above shall be paid for at the Contract unit as detailed
below per square metre. The rates shall be full compensation for furnishing all labour,
materials, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to do the work and for doing all the
clearing and grubbing in the designated areas and as specified in these Specifications and the
Special Provisions and as directed by the Engineer including the removal and disposal of all
the resulting material.
b. Removal of trees and removal of stumps of previously felled trees

Payment for removal of trees and stumps shall be made at the Contract unit rates and shall
be the payment in full for carrying out the required operations including full compensation
for all labour, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work.
These will include felling, excavating, backfilling, handling, transporting and disposal.

Pay Items and Pay Units shall be as follows :‐

No Pay Item Pay Unit
201.(1) Clearing and grubbing Sq. metre
201.(2) Removal of trees; girth 250 ‐ 1000 mm Number
201.(3) Removal of trees; girth 1000 ‐2000 mm Number
201.(4) Removal of trees; girth 2000 ‐3000 mm Number
201.(5) Removal of trees; girth 3000 mm and over Number
201.(6) Removal of stumps of previously felled trees; girth 250 ‐ Number
1000 mm
201.(7) Removal of stumps of previously felled trees; girth 1000 ‐ Number
2000 mm
201.(7.1) Removal of stumps of previously felled trees; girth 2000 ‐ Number
3000 mm
201.(7.2) Removal of stumps of previously felled trees; girth 3000 Number
mm and over
201.(7.3) Removal of overhanging branches; girth 300 mm and over Number

202. REMOVAL OF EXISTING STRUCTURES

Delete the entire Clause and substitute with the following :‐
202.1. Description

This work shall consist of dismantling and removing, as hereinafter set forth, existing
culverts, masonry and brickwork structures, walkways, medians, kerbs and other structures
such as guard‐rails, manholes, catch basins, inlets etc. which are in place, but interfere with
the new construction and are not suitable to remain in place, and salvaging/disposing of the
resulting materials. All materials obtained from dismantling shall be the property of the
Employer.

Culverts and other structures, which are within the existing highway boundary and which are
designated to be removed, shall be removed down to the limits and extent specified
hereinafter or as shown in the Drawings or as indicated by the Engineer.

Dismantling and removal operations shall be carried out with such equipment and in such a
manner as to level undisturbed, adjacent pavement, structures and any other specified to be
left in place.

All operations necessary for the removal of any existing structure which might endanger new
construction shall be completed prior to the start of new work.

Dismantling of bridges and parts of bridges for reconstruction, extension, redecking and so
on are included as separate items in each separate Bridges Bill of Quantities and are not
included in this item. Demolition, removal and disposal of private and public buildings etc.
necessary to widen the existing highway boundary to achieve the full right of way are
deemed to be included in the item. Clearing and grubbing where not previously removed by
the Engineer or land occupier.
202.2. Dismantling of Structures

The structures shall be dismantled carefully and the resulting materials so removed as not to
cause any damage to the serviceable materials to be salvaged, the part of the structure to be
retained and any other properties or structures nearby.

Unless otherwise specified, the superstructure portion of culverts shall be entirely removed
and other parts removed to below the ground level or as necessary depending upon the
interference they cause to the new construction. Removal of overlaying or adjacent material
if required in connection with the dismantling of the structures, shall be deemed to be
included in this item.

Where existing culverts are to be rehabilitated only such part or parts of the existing
structure shall be removed as are necessary to provide a proper connection to the new work.
The connecting edges shall be cut, chipped and trimmed to the required lines and grades
without weakening or damaging any part of the structure to be retained. Reinforcing bars
which are to be left in place so as to project into new work as dowels or ties shall not be
damaged during removal of concrete.

Pipe culverts shall be carefully removed in such a manner as to avoid damage to the pipes
where instructed by the Engineer.

Masonry and brick work structures shall be dismantled to the extent shown in the drawing
and as directed by the Engineer.

All concrete pavement in carriageway designated for removal shall be broken up for ease of
removal and carried to stockpiles at locations designated by the Engineer.

Where the existing road signs, kilometre posts, mile posts or guard stones are to be removed
they shall be carefully excavated and removed including breaking of the concrete base. The
serviceable materials shall be transported and stacked at locations approved by the
Engineer, and the unserviceable materials shall be disposed of as directed by the Engineer
202.3. Salvaged Materials

Materials which may be used directly in the Permanent Works shall be stockpiled separately
from those which require processing for reuse. The materials selected for processing should
be of such quality as will meet the Specifications after breaking, screening and/or mixing
with better quality materials if necessary. The responsibility of selecting a particular material
for processing and/or incorporating in the Permanent Works shall lie with the Contractor.

Acceptability of the materials (after processing as the case may be) shall be determined by
the Engineer and only such materials that fully satisfy the Specifications in all respects shall
be permitted for incorporation in the Permanent Works. The materials failing to satisfy the
Specifications may be used in the Temporary Works or may be used in the lower layers of
embankments or to fill depressions, stump holes etc. with the approval of the Engineer. The
materials not required by the Contractor for incorporation in the Works, but which are of use
to the Employer shall be neatly stockpiled as directed by the Engineer.

Structural/reinforcing steel obtained from dismantling of the existing structures shall not be
considered suitable for use in the Permanent Works and shall be stored in a neat and
presentable manner in locations suitable for loading. Structures or portions thereof which
are specified in the Contract for re‐erection shall be stored in separate stockpiles.

Pipe culverts that are removed in good condition shall be cleaned and neatly stockpiled at
points designated by the Engineer.

All the products of dismantling operations which in the opinion of the Engineer cannot be
used in the Works or reused by the Employer shall be disposed of outside the highway right‐
of‐way or may be spread in deep borrow pits, as directed by the Engineer.

The Contractor shall comply with all laws, ordinances, building regulations etc. as prevailing
in Sri Lanka. Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish, erect
and maintain suitable barricades to prevent personal injury or damage to property.
202.4. Removal of Fences

The work shall consist of removal at locations as instructed by the Engineer. The re‐useable
material shall be removed with due care and stacked and stored for re‐use. The unusable
material and debris shall be transported and disposed as instructed by the Engineer.
202.5. Back‐filling

As instructed by the Engineer, holes and depressions caused by dismantling operations shall
be back‐filled with excavated or other approved materials and thoroughly compacted to
match surrounding areas.

202.6. Measurement

The required and accepted work of dismantling and removal of the structures etc. shall be
paid as lump sum amount for each structure.
202.7. Payment

Payment of the lump sum for dismantling and removal of structures shall be made.

Payment shall include full compensation for carrying out the operations described including
but not limited to excavation, backfilling of excavations using approved materials, preparing
and shaping, handling, sorting out, salvaging, stockpiling, disposing etc. of material.

Pay Items shall be :‐

Pay Item Pay Unit

202(1) Removal of Existing Structures (Specify the structure) Lump Sum

203. REMOVAL OF ELECTRIC/TELEPHONE POLES

The work of removal of electric/telephone poles, transmission pylons and/or line, where
required shall be carried out by the appropriate service authority. The contractor, however,
may be required to provide assistance to such authorities.

Payment for any such assistance shall be paid under Dayworks.

204. REMOVAL OF EXISTING PAVEMENT
204.1. Description

This item shall consist of the removal of existing pavement (flexible or rigid) including base
course, sub‐base and shoulders as applicable and as directed by the Engineer. Materials
suitable for re‐use shall be indicated by the Engineer and shall be stored as instructed by the
Engineer at locations provided by the Contractor.

The existing pavement and shoulders may consist of layers of varying thickness of the
following materials:

- blended and natural sands and soil;
- brick soling;
- broken brick and sand aggregate;
- herring‐bone brick;
- broken stone aggregate, water‐bound or bitumen penetrated;
- broken stone with sand, water‐bound or bitumen penetrated;
- broken stone aggregate/sand bitumen pre‐mix;
- river gravel/sand bitumen/ pre‐mix;
- seal‐coats with river pebble chipping stone;
- seal‐coats with broken stone chipping;
- other combinations of bricks, stone ,sand and bitumen.

Prior to the removal of any existing road pavement the contractor shall excavate trial pits and
trenches as required by the Engineer to ascertain in detail the depth and composition of the
pavement and this cost shall be included in the Contractor’s rates generally.

All bituminous seal coats, wearing course and leveling course shall be removed, and if not suitable for
use elsewhere, shall be disposed of by the Contractor.

All bricks and suitable bricks chips shall be removed and the material may be processed for re‐use
where approved by the Engineer.

All recovered material shall be the Contractor’s property. Materials the Contractor considers to be
suitable for re‐use in the Works shall be taken to the Contractor’s materials preparation areas for
stockpiling and re‐processing. The remaining unsuitable material shall be removed off site.

All recovered materials, suitable for re‐use as sub base layer in the works, as approved by the
Engineer are to be reused after processing, in the works and the contractor is expected to take
account of this when submitting his tender.

The Engineer’s approval to the re‐use of the material shall be granted if laboratory test results
confirms the material complies with the Specification’s requirements.
204.2. METHOD

The pavement and base course may be removed by either hand or machine provided the methods
used do not cause an undue wastage of material. All recovered pavement material suitable of re‐use
shall be handled as specified above.
204.3. MEASUREMENT

The unit of measurement for the removal of existing pavement material shall be cubic metres of
bituminous wearing/leveling course, concrete slab or full pavement structure removed, as the case
may be. The volume shall be measured by taking field measurements for length, width and depth of
removed area or as directed by the Engineer.
204.4. PAYMENT

These materials measured as provided here in above shall be paid for at the contract unit price for
the items shown in BoQ. Payment shall be for full compensation for removing separating, loading,
transporting and stock‐piling or otherwise disposing of all materials, and for all labour, equipment,
tools and incidentals necessary to complete this item of the works. While quoting rate for this work it
is expected that the contractor shall include discount for the cost of unusable salvaged materials.

Pay Items shall be :‐

Pay Item Pay Unit

204(1) Removal of Existing Pavement Lump Sum

SERIES 400 ‐ SUB‐BASES, BASES AND SHOULDERS

CONTENTS

401. SOIL SUB‐BASES ............................................................................................................................. 3
401.1. DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................................................. 3
401.2. MATERIALS ............................................................................................................................... 3
401.3. MECHANICAL STABILISATION (BLENDING)........................................................................................... 4
401.4. CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS ...................................................................................................... 7
a. Preliminaries .............................................................................................................................. 7
b. Placing and Compaction of Subbase Material................................................................................ 7
c. Degree of Compaction of Subbase................................................................................................ 8
d. Quality Control ........................................................................................................................... 8
e. Finishing Operations ................................................................................................................... 8
f. Protection of Subbase ................................................................................................................. 8
401.5. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ....................................................................................................... 9
a. Measurement............................................................................................................................. 9
b. Payments ................................................................................................................................... 9
402. STABILISED SOIL SUBBASES AND BASES........................................................................................... 9
403. SINGLE SIZED AGGREGATE BASES.................................................................................................... 9
404. WATER BOUND AND DRY BOUND MACADAM BASES....................................................................... 9
405. DENSE GRADED AGGREGATE BASES ................................................................................................ 9

405.1. DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................................................. 9
405.2. MATERIALS ............................................................................................................................. 10
Crushed Rock or Boulder Aggregates.................................................................................................. 10
405.3. CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................................... 11
a. Preparation of Existing Surface .................................................................................................. 11
b. Spreading and Rolling ............................................................................................................... 11
c. Field Density Testing ................................................................................................................. 12
d. Finishing Operations and Quality Control.................................................................................... 12
e. Aftercare.................................................................................................................................. 12
405.4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ..................................................................................................... 12
a. Measurement........................................................................................................................... 12
b. Payments ................................................................................................................................. 13
406. PENETRATION MACADAM BASES.................................................................................................. 13
407. BITUMENBOUND BASES ............................................................................................................... 13
408. RECONSTRUCTION OF AGGREGATE BASES..................................................................................... 13
408.1. DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................................................... 13
408.2. MATERIALS ............................................................................................................................. 13
408.3. CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................................... 13
a. Rebuilding of Existing Pavement ................................................................................................ 14
b. Field Density Testing ................................................................................................................. 14
c. Finishing Operations and Quality Control.................................................................................... 14
d. Aftercare.................................................................................................................................. 14
408.4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ..................................................................................................... 14
a. Measurement........................................................................................................................... 14
Series 400 – Sub‐Bases, Bases And Shoulders Page no: 1 of 15
b. Payments ................................................................................................................................. 14
409. SHOULDER CONSTRUCTION .......................................................................................................... 15

SERIES 400 ‐ SUB‐BASES, BASES AND SHOULDERS

401. SOIL SUB‐BASES

Delete the Heading and replace with :‐

SUB‐BASES
401.1. Description

Delete this Subsection and substitute the following :‐

This work shall consist of supplying, processing, hauling with any lead and lift, spreading, watering and
compacting sub‐base material on a existing pavement or prepared and accepted sub‐grade in
accordance with the specifications and to the lines, levels, dimensions and cross‐profiles shown on the
drawings or as required by the Engineer and maintaining the finished sub‐base as required. Processing
shall include, where necessary, crushing, screening, separation, blending, and any other operation
necessary to produce a material conforming to the requirements of this specification.
401.2. Materials


The materials for sub‐base course shall consist of any one of the followings:

‐ gravel/brick aggregates or a mixture of gravel/brick aggregate and sand or a mixture of gravel/brick
aggregates and naturally occurring granular materials finer than 4.75 mm.

‐ recycled materials obtained from salvaged existing pavement including gravel/brick
aggregates, stone aggregates, broken concrete slabs, broken whole bricks etc. with admixture of local
sand or naturally occuring granular materials finer than 4.75 mm but excluding materials mixed with
bituminous binder. They shall be clean, strong, durable, of fairly cubical shape, and free of
disintegrated pieces, organic and other deleterious matter and adherence coatings. The aggregate
shall preferably by hydrophobic and of low porosity. Local sand or naturally occuring granular
materials shall be free from vegetation, soft particles and excess clay or any other substance. The
crushed stone shall comply with the requirements in Section 1708.2

The materials shall be well graded and conform to the following grading limits :

Table 4.1.1

Sieve Size Percentage by Weight
Passing
50 mm 100
25 mm 70‐90
19 mm 60‐80
9.5 mm 40‐70
4.75 mm 25‐60
0.075 mm 0‐15

The sub‐base materials shall meet the following physical requirements:
- The deleterious substances in the sub‐base material shall not exceed the following limits:

Material % (By Weight)

Coal 1.0%
Clay, Clay agglomerates 0.25%
Soft particles 3.0%
Shale/Chert 2.5%

‐ The fraction of the materials passing 0.425 mm sieve shall have a liquid limit less than 30 (AASHTO: T
89) and a plasticity index not more than 6 (AASHTO: T 90).

‐ The aggregates shall have a Los Angeles abrasion loss (AASHTO: T 96) of not more than 40%.

‐ The materials, when tested in accordance with AASHTO: T 193, have a CBR value of not less than 40%
after four days soaking when compacted to 98% of the maximum dry density as determined according
to AASHTO: T 180 Method D.

‐ Stone chips shall be prepared by breaking and/or crushing moderate to Stone. The material shall
comprise hard, durable particles, clean and free from excess thin or elongated pieces.

‐ The bulk specific gravity of stone aggregates and recycled pavement materials shall not be less than
1.60 and

‐ Water absorption shall not exceed 18%.

The material for gravel shall be obtained from approved sources in borrow or cut or from such other
sources of supply as may be specified or approved for use from time to time. The material used shall
be aggregate, as dug soils, or material obtained by blending two or more soils or soil/sand mixes
referred to as mechanical stabilisation.

The Contractor’s attention is drawn to the scarcity of naturally occurring subbase material ad shall
make due allowance for mixing of materials in mechanical stabilisation in accordance with Section
401.3 below.

Material for subbase shall be as specified in Section 1708.2

401.3. Mechanical Stabilisation (Blending)


Material to be Stabilised

Material to be stabilised shall be any naturally occurring cohesive or non‐cohesive soil or processed
material, the properties of which can be permanently improved by the process of stabilisation to
comply with the requirements of this Specification for the relevant material. It shall have a minimum
coefficient of uniformity of 5.

Binder

The binder used shall be either lime or Portland cement, whichever is appropriate for the properties of
the material to be stabilised.
Lime shall comply with the requirements of AASHTO M‐216. The use of un‐slaked lime will not be
permitted.
Portland cement shall comply with the requirements of AASHTO M‐85, Type II or equivalent ISO
standard class. The use of rapid‐hardening Portland cement will not be permitted.

Water

The water used in mixing and curing concrete shall be tested by methods described in AASHTO test
Method T26. All water shall be clean and free from salt, oil or acid, vegetable or other substance
injurious to the finished product. The use of river water will be subject to the approval of the
Engineer. Such approvals may be withdrawn from time to time depending on the condition of the
river.

Mix Design of Material for Stabilisation

Optimum Moisture Content

The moisture content of the mixed material shall be the optimum for compaction by rolling
determined in accordance with AASHTO T‐180.

Binder Content

The binder content that is necessary to achieve the California Bearing Ratio (CBR) requirements of the
stabilised material shall be determined on specimens compacted to 95% of the maximum dry density
determined in accordance with the requirements of AASHTO T‐180 at the optimum moisture content
referred to above.

California Bearing Ratio (CBR) Requirements

The minimum soaked California Bearing Ratio (CBR) of the mixed material when determined in
accordance with AASHTO T‐193 at a density of 95% of the maximum dry density when determined in
accordance with AASHTO T‐180 method D, shall comply with the requirements shown in Table 6‐1.
Table 401‐1 California Bearing Ratio (CBR) Requirements for Mixed Material for Stabilisation

Layer Minimum
CBR
Sub‐grade 15
Sub‐base/Gravel Wearing Course 30
Road‐base 80

Construction Requirements for Stabilisation

Equipment
The binder shall be placed and uniformly spread on the material to be stabilised at the required rate
either, manually or mechanically by means of purpose made equipment approved by the
Engineer/Supervisor.
Mixing equipment shall be either an agricultural rotovator or purpose made rotovating equipment.
The required quantity of water shall be dispensed mechanically through either an attachment on the
mixing equipment or separately by means of a purpose made water bowser.
The material shall be compacted by the use of approved vibrating or non‐vibrating rollers steel
wheeled or pneumatic tyred rollers.
Curing equipment shall be hand held bituminous spraying equipment approved by the
Engineer/Supervisor.

Spreading, Mixing and Compaction

Imported material, which is to be stabilised, shall be mechanically spread to the required thickness by
use of either a grader or a paving machine in such a manner that segregation is avoided.

Immediately prior to the application of the binder, water shall be evenly distributed over the whole of
the surface to be stabilised and thoroughly mixed into the material to be stabilised. The moisture
content of the mixed material shall be adjusted as necessary, either by the uniform application of
water or drying out, to achieve within –1% to +2% of the optimum moisture content when determined
in accordance with AASHTO T‐180.

The binder shall be evenly spread at the required rate of application over the whole of the surface to
be stabilised either manually or by approved mechanical means.

The binder shall be mixed into the material to be stabilised until it is evenly distributed throughout the
mass of the material using the equipment specified above.

Compaction shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of subsections
104.4,104.5,104.6.. The method employed shall ensure that the material can be fully compacted
without the development of shear planes and that a well‐closed uncrazed finish can be is achieved.

A sufficient number of compacting units shall be employed to ensure that, from the time the binder is
first added, the process of spreading, applying water, mixing and compaction, shaping and final
finishing, is completed within 2 hours in the case of Portland cement binder and 4 hours in the case of
lime binder.

Construction Joints

Transverse and longitudinal construction joints shall be formed by cutting back the edges of previously
stabilised areas to form a sound vertical face.

Curing of Completed Work

The stabilised material shall be protected against rapid drying out for a minimum period of seven days
immediately upon completion of the work.

The methods of curing shall be one of the following:

2
The application of bituminous emulsion at a rate of between 0.5 to 1.1 Kg/m of residual bitumen in
accordance with the requirements of AASHTO.

The manual application of saturated hessian covered by impermeable polythene sheeting which shall
be firmly held in position. The hessian shall be kept wet for the whole of the curing period.

Trial Areas

Prior to the commencement of normal working the Contractor shall construct a trial area of not less
than 1000 square metres using the materials and equipment proposed for the work to demonstrate
compliance with the requirements of this Clause.

Defects

Any remedial work, which is required to rectify defects in the completed layer, shall extend through
the full depth of the layer and over an area stipulated by the Engineer/Supervisor.

Traffic

No construction equipment or road traffic shall be permitted on the completed layer until the curing
period has elapsed.

Weather Limitations

In situ stabilisation shall not be undertaken in the following adverse weather conditions:

During wet conditions;

When rain is imminent;

During excessively windy conditions.
401.4. Construction Requirements
a. Preliminaries

No change.
b. Placing and Compaction of Subbase Material


The improved sub‐grade underlying the sub‐base shall remain true to cross fall or super elevation and
be free from any irregularities, cracks, depressions, loose materials or other local defects prior to the
laying of the sub base. To the extent any such defects might exist the affected areas shall be redone to
the requirements of specification and to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the sub grade shall be
protected against any further damage until covered by the sub‐base course.

Mixing or screening of aggregates as required to achieve the specified grading shall be done in a
stacking yard. Mechanical means or a combination of manual labour and machine may do the mixing.
The materials shall be mixed thoroughly and uniformly to have a homogenous mass also satisfying the
grading requirements. During mixing, water shall be added to keep the mixed materials moist so as to
prevent segregation during transportation.

In any stretch, materials of the both halves of the road will be the same source as well as the same
grading of aggregates.

The sub base materials shall be spread in layers, the compacted thickness of which shall not exceed
150mm. The Engineer, may agree, on satisfactory demonstration by the contractor that for the type of
sub‐base materials and equipment used, layer thickness up to 200 mm can be rolled to a the specified
level of uniform compaction. The spreading shall be done using methods acceptable to the Engineer.
The required amount of water, predetermined from laboratory tests and field trials, shall be added if
necessary and mixed thoroughly. If the material is too wet it shall be dried by aeration. The moisture
content of the sub base material during compaction shall be guided by the optimum moisture content
as determined according to AASHTO: T 180 Method D and as decided by the Engineer on the basis of
field compaction trials.

On completion of spreading and watering, the surface shall be shaped as per cross section shown in
drawing and compacted using approved compaction equipment and procedure

Where an existing subbase layer is to be improved by the addition of a layer of material less than
100mm thick, the existing surface shall be scarified to a depth instructed by the Engineer, mixed with
the imported material to form a homogeneous layer of minimum depth 100mm, recompacted to the
dry density specified for the layer and formed to the lines and levels shown on the drawings or as
instructed by the Engineer.

Where subbase is laid over an existing bituminous pavement, the surface shall be punctured to permit
drainage through the surface. Puncturing shall create drainage holes of not less them 20 mm in
diameter though the existing bitumen layer to the underlying base at 500 mm centres on a grid across
the area being prepared.
c. Degree of Compaction of Subbase

Delete this Sub section and substitute the following :‐

The subbase shall be compacted to not less than 98% of the maximum dry density (MDD) of the
material as determined by BS1377, Test 13 (Modified) or AASHTO T180.
d. Quality Control

Delete this sub section and substitute the following :‐

After compaction of each layer field density measurements by BS1377 test 15 and or AASHTO: T 191
will be done at the rate of one test per 300 square metre or less of compacted area. The test shall be
made to the full depth of the layer. Test locations should be chosen through random sampling
techniques or as directed by the Engineer.

e. Finishing Operations


Tests for conformity with the specified surface tolerances as described in Section 1601 of the
specification shall be made immediately after initial compaction, and variations shall be corrected by
removing or adding material as may be necessary. After final rolling, the smoothness of the course
shall be checked again and any irregularity of the surface exceeding the above limits and any areas
defective in texture, compaction or composition shall be corrected as directed by the Engineer.

f. Protection of Subbase


The Contractor shall protect and maintain the subbase at his own expense. Maintenance shall include
the immediate repair of any damage or defects which may occur and shall be repeated as often as is
necessary to keep the subbase continuously intact. Repairs shall be done in such a manner that will
ensure restoration to an even and uniform surface and may involve scarifying, watering and
recompacting.

Where the sub‐base is required to carry traffic in both directions using part width only, the Contractor
shall ensure that the wheel path position is varied, by means of coning or similar traffic control
measures. If exposure to traffic over a part width is expected to be prolonged, the Engineer may order
a protective layer of not less than 100mm of sub‐base quality material to be spread and compacted
over the part width exposed to traffic.

The sub‐base shall be finished to give a hard dense surface throughout and free from irregularities of
any kind. The finished surface levels shall vary not more than tolerances indicated in Table 1601‐1.
The deviation from straight edge 3 metres long laid on the surface parallel to the centreline or at right
angles to the centreline on a cross fall shall not exceed the allowable tolerances. Sub‐base which does
not conform to the above requirements shall be reworked, watered and thoroughly recompacted to
conform.

a. Measurement


The Subbase shall be measured by the cubic metres of material compacted in place and accepted.
Measurement shall be based on the cross section of the sub base shown in the drawings and the
actual length measured horizontally along the centreline of the surface of the road, or in case of edge
widening, along the centreline of the widened section.
b. Payments

Delete after paragraph three and insert the following :‐

The payment for subbase will be based on the contract unit rate for the completed work and accepted
of the subbase which shall include full compensation for providing all materials labour, tools,
equipment and incidentals necessary to carry out the construction works in accordance with the
specifications.

The Pay items and Pay units will be as follows :‐

Pay Item Unit of Measurement

401(1) Provide and place Subbase Cu. Metre
402. STABILISED SOIL SUBBASES AND BASES

No change.
403. SINGLE SIZED AGGREGATE BASES

No change.
404. WATER BOUND AND DRY BOUND MACADAM BASES

No change.
405. DENSE GRADED AGGREGATE BASES
405.1. Description

Delete this Sub‐section and substitute the following :‐

This work shall consist of supplying, processing, hauling, spreading, watering and compacting lower
base materials on a prepared and accepted graded aggregate sub‐base layer in accordance with the
specifications and the lines, levels, dimensions and cross profiles shown on the drawings and as
directed by the Engineer and maintaining the finished aggregate base as required. Processing shall
include, where necessary, crushing screening, separation, blending, and any other operation necessary
to produce a material conforming to the requirements of this specification.
405.2. Materials

The aggregates for the lower base course shall consist of any one of the following:

‐ crushed rock or boulders from natural sources
‐ crushed gravel from natural sources

Different kinds of materials shall not be mixed together except that sand or naturally occurring
granular materials finer than 4.75 mm size can be mixed with any of these materials to meet the
grading requirements. Further within any stretch of road not less than 2 km in length of both sides,
only one kind of material shall be used.

The contractor shall seek prior approval of the Engineer regarding the kind of materials proposed to be
used by him in different stretches of road. Any material larger in size than 4.75 mm shall be of crushed
aggregate with minimum one broken face.

The materials shall be well graded and conforming to the general requirements of sub section 1701.3
(a). and grading requirements of Table 1701 ‐ 5 of sub section 1701.3 (b). and or to the following
grading:
Crushed Rock or Boulder Aggregates

Passing
50 mm 100
25 mm 70‐90
19 mm 60‐80
9.5 mm 35‐70
4.75 mm 27 ‐ 45
0.425 mm 6‐16
0.075 mm 0 – 8

Crushed Gravel Aggregates

Passing
28 mm 100
19 mm 85‐100
9.5 mm 60‐80
4.75 mm 30‐60
2.36 mm 20‐40
0.60 mm 5‐25
0.075 mm 0‐5

The materials shall be free from decomposed stones, organic matters, soft particles, excess clay or any
other substance that is considered deleterious by the Engineer. The base materials shall meet the
following physical requirements:

‐ The fraction of the materials passing 0.425 mm sieve shall have a liquid limit less than 30 (AASHTO: T
89) and a plasticity index not more than 6 (AASHTO: T 90).

‐ The aggregates shall have a Los Angeles abrasion loss (AASHTO: T 96) of not more than 40%.

‐ The materials, when tested in accordance with AASHTO: T 193, have a CBR value of not less than 80%
after four days soaking when compacted to 98% of the maximum dry density as determined according
to AASHTO: T 180 Method D.

a. Preparation of Existing Surface

Prior to laying of Lower Base Course the underlying layer shall be the surface shall be brushed free of
dust and extraneous matter and shall be shaped true to cross fall or super elevation and shall be rolled
as necessary till the surface is smooth, firm and tight. The prepared underlying layer shall be protected
against damage until covered by the base course.

Where the base course is laid over an existing bituminous pavement, the surface shall be lightly
scarified and/or punctured to permit drainage through the surface where the surface shape is not
adequately crowned in the opinion of the Engineer, and cleaned of any scarified material before laying
the base course. During this operation the Contractor shall not damage the underlying pavement
layer. Any damage to the existing underlying layer which results due to careless scarification shall be
rectified forthwith by the Contractor to the approval of the Engineer at the Contractor’s own cost.
b. Spreading and Rolling


The aggregate shall be spread uniformly and without segregation over the prepared surface of an
underlying layer which complies with the specified requirements for the layer concerned, or over the
surfacing of an existing pavement, and in quantities sufficient to ensure that after compaction the
completed layer will comply with all requirements of layer thickness, levels, cross section and density.

Aggregate shall be spread such that the minimum thickness of each layer after compaction shall be not
less than 100 mm. The maximum thickness will depend on the type of compaction equipment used
and on the specified layer thickness but shall not normally exceed 200 mm compacted thickness unless
otherwise agreed or instructed by the Engineer.

In order to minimise for segregation, the material shall be kept wet during transport and spreading.
The dumps of material shall be spread out to a flat‐surfaced layer with a thickness suitable for mixing.
Thereafter the required amount of water shall be added and the material thoroughly mixed with a
suitable approved means until a uniform homogeneous mixture is achieved. The required amount of
water and moisture content shall be determined by carrying out field trials but shall normally be
within 2% of the predetermined optimum moisture content at the time of compaction. The material
deposited on the prepared existing surface may be spread and shaped by any method which will not
cause the segregation of coarse and fine particles. The Contractor shall ensure that joints in
consecutive pavement layers do not coincide. All areas of segregated coarse and fine material shall be
corrected by re‐mixing or removing and replacing with well graded material to the approval of the
Engineer. The base material shall be compacted using approved vibratory compaction equipment
whose vibrators shall function correctly in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

After mixing the material shall be graded to achieve the specified thickness with due allowance made
for decrease in thickness due to compaction such that after compaction the surface of the aggregate
base is within the specified level tolerance. The material shall then be thoroughly compacted by
means of approved equipment so that the specified density is obtained throughout the whole layer.
The rolling shall be carried out by a series of over lapping longitudinal passes working from the edge
towards the centre, except on super elevated sections where the rolling shall proceed from the lower
edge to the higher edge.

The finally compacted layer shall be firm and stable with a closely knit mosaic like surface texture of
exposed aggregate free from surface laminations, portions exhibiting segregation of the fine and
coarse aggregates, corrugations or other defects that may be detrimental to the performance of the
layer. The surface shall be brushed to ensure a surface free from excess fines and loose aggregate.
Where, in the opinion of the Engineer, the completed surface of the base is unacceptable, the surface
shall be rectified in a manner approved by the Engineer.
The aggregate base shall be compacted to not less than 98% of the maximum dry density of the
c. Field Density Testing


The degree of compaction shall be checked by field density measurements (BS1377 test 15 or AASHTO
T191) at the rate of one test for every 300 Sq.m subjected to minimum of two Tests for each section or
as directed by the Engineer.
d. Finishing Operations and Quality Control


On completion of the base the Contractor shall remove all windrows to facilitate proper drainage of
the finished surface.
e. Aftercare

Delete this subsection and substitute the following :‐

The Contractor shall protect and maintain the completed base layer at his own expense until the
surfacing is applied. Maintenance shall include the immediate repair of any damage or defects which
may occur and shall be repeated as often as is necessary to keep the layer continuously intact and in
good condition. Repairs shall be done in such a manner that will ensure restoration to an even and
uniform surface. Traffic shall not be allowed directly on any unprimed base layer unless instructed or
authorized by the Engineer.
The completed base shall be primed as soon as possible after approval from the Engineer.
a. Measurement

Delete this Sub section and insert the following :‐

The dense graded base shall be measured by the cubic metres of material compacted in place and
accepted. Measurement shall be based on the cross section of the base shown in the drawings and
the actual length measured horizontally along the centreline of the surface of the road, or in case of
edge widening, along the centreline of the widened section.
b. Payments

The payment will be based on the contract unit rate for the completed work and accepted of the
dense graded base which shall include full compensation for providing all materials, labour, tools
equipment and incidentals necessary to carry out the construction works to the specifications.



405(1) Provide and place 37.5 (40) mm
Dense Graded Aggregate Base Cu. metre
406. PENETRATION MACADAM BASES

No change.
407. BITUMENBOUND BASES

No change.
408. RECONSTRUCTION OF AGGREGATE BASES

Delete the heading and replace with:‐

RECONSTRUCTION OF EXISTING PAVEMENT
408.1. Description

Delete this Subsection and substitute the following:‐

This work consists of the reconstruction of the existing bitumen surfaced pavement which requires
strengthening and/or reshaping generally in confined areas or patches at locations instructed by the
Engineer.

Work shall be carried out by scarifying the existing pavement to the depth instructed by the Engineer,
addition of approved imported aggregate and thorough mixing with existing pavement material by
grader or by hand or other approved methods in small areas to ensure an unsegregated,
homogeneous material.
408.2. Materials

Delete this Subsection and substitute the following:‐

Material for the reconstruction of existing pavements shall be aggregates which conform to the single
sized aggregates or the graded aggregates as shown in Tables 1701.4 and 1705 of sub‐section
1701.3(b) or as instructed by the Engineer.
The aggregate shall consist of hard durable particles of fragmented rock from a quarry approved by
the Engineer, and shall be free of dust, organic matter, clay and silt or any other deleterious matter.

a. Rebuilding of Existing Pavement

The existing pavement shall be sufficiently scarified to enable the existing bituminous layer to be
removed. In removing the bituminous layer the Contractor shall ensure that as much of the adhering
existing aggregate as possible is dislodged and left remaining to be mixed with the aggregate to be
added.

Where instructed by the Engineer existing material considered of poor quality shall be removed and
disposed of. Extra aggregate shall then be added to the existing pavement material and thoroughly
mixed either in place or alongside the area to be strengthened. Compaction and surface finish shall be
carried out as specified in section 405. Where graded aggregate of 37.5 (40) mm maximum size is
used, the added aggregate shall be in such quantities that after compaction there shall be a minimum
aggregate thickness at any place of 100 mm and the maximum compacted thickness shall not exceed
150 mm unless otherwise specified or agreed by the Engineer.

Once mixed the material shall be compacted to not less than 98% of the maximum dry density of the
b. Field Density Testing

The degree of compaction shall be checked by field density measurements (BS1377 test 15 or AASHTO
T191) at the rate of one test for every 100 Sq.m.
c. Finishing Operations and Quality Control

The rebuilt pavement shall be finished to the requirements of section 1601.

The quality of the material shall be controlled in accordance with section 1602.
d. Aftercare

The Contractor shall protect and maintain the completed pavement layer at his own expense until the
following layer is applied. Maintenance shall include the immediate repair of any damage or defects
which may occur and shall be repeated as often as is necessary to keep the layer continuously intact
and in good condition. Repairs shall be done in such a manner that will ensure restoration to an even
and uniform surface.

a. Measurement

The rebuilt aggregate layer shall be measured by the cubic metres of material compacted in place and
accepted. Measurement shall be based on the dimensions as instructed by the Engineer.

Scarifying and removal of bituminous pieces shall be measured in square metres of surface area.
b. Payments

The payment will be based on the contract unit rate for the completed work of the rebuilt layer which
shall include full compensation for providing all materials other than those specified in the Payment
Item, labour, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to carry out the construction works to the
specifications.



408(1) Scarify and remove existing bitumen layer Sq. metre
408(2) Excavate and dispose of surplus material Cu. metre
408(3) Provide additional aggregate Cu. metre
408(4) Rebuild existing pavement layer Cu. metre
409. SHOULDER CONSTRUCTION

No change.

SERIES 500 ‐ SURFACE APPLICATIONS

CONTENTS

501. PRIME COAT .......................................................................................................................2
501.1. Description .................................................................................................................2
501.2. Materials ....................................................................................................................2
501.3. Construction Requirements ........................................................................................2
501.4. Measurement and Payment........................................................................................5
502. TACK COAT..........................................................................................................................7
503. HOT BITUMEN APPLICATIONS .............................................................................................7
504. SAND SEALING ....................................................................................................................7
505. SEAL COAT TREATMENTS (SURFACE DRESSINGS) .................................................................8

505.1. Description .................................................................................................................8
505.2. Materials ....................................................................................................................8
505.3. Construction Requirements ...................................................................................... 10
506. ASPHALTIC CONCRETE SURFACING .................................................................................... 17
506.1. Description ............................................................................................................... 17
506.2. Materials .................................................................................................................. 18
506.3. Mix Requirements .................................................................................................... 18
506.4. Job Mix Formula ....................................................................................................... 20
506.5. Construction Requirements ...................................................................................... 21
506.6. Measurement and Payment...................................................................................... 28
507. COLD MIX SURFACINGS ..................................................................................................... 30
507.6 Measurement and Payment...................................................................................... 30

Series 500 – Surface Applications Page no: 1 of 30
SERIES 500 ‐ SURFACE APPLICATIONS

501. PRIME COAT
501.1. Description
No change
501.2. Materials
Delete this sub‐section and substitute the following :‐
a. Prime Material
The prime coat shall consist of penetration grade bitumen complying with sub section 1702.1
from a source approved by the Engineer, medium curing cutback bitumen MC‐30, MC‐70 or
MC‐250 complying with sub section 1702.2 from a source approved by the Engineer or
bituminous emulsion of grade CSS‐1 or CSS1h complying with subsection 1702.3. The
application rate of binder to be used shall be instructed by the Engineer on Site after field
trials. These field trials shall be carried out by the Contractor as instructed by and under the
supervision of the Engineer and the cost thereof shall be deemed to be included in the prime
coat rates. The object of the trials is to achieve the optimum penetration and efficacy of the
prime coat.

The indicative rate of spread of bituminous material for the prime coat shall be in the range
2
of 0.5 to 1.5 l/m

b. Mineral Aggregate for blinding

The blinding layer, if any, shall be crushed rock or river sand having a grading within the
limits of table 501‐1. The aggregate shall be clean, hard and free from excessive dust. It shall
contain no clay, loam or other deleterious material.

Table 501‐1 Grading Envelope for Sand for Prime Coat
Sieve size Percentage Passing
(mm) (by mass)

4.75 100
2.36 80 ‐ 100
1.18 60 ‐ 95
.6 30 ‐ 80
.3 20 ‐ 55
.075 10 ‐ 30


a. Weather Limitations

The prime coat shall be applied only when the existing surface is dry or sufficiently low in
moisture to assure uniform distribution of the bituminous material, when the atmospheric
temperature is above 15oC, and when the weather is not foggy or rainy or rain, in the opinion
of the Engineer, is imminent. The temperature requirements may be waived, but only when
so instructed by the Engineer.

b. Preparation of Surface

The layer to be primed shall be cleaned of all loose and deleterious material by means of a
rotary broom and/or hand brooms or other approved means. The brushing force shall be
sufficient to dislodge all adhering material without damaging the pavement surface. Scale,
clay and other foreign material shall be removed by hand where instructed. The exposed
surface shall be kept moist up to the time of spraying. If the moisture content is too high to
permit full penetration of the prime coat in the opinion of the Engineer the Contractor shall
delay prime coat application until the moisture content is satisfactory for full penetration as

The surface shall be prepared in this manner to expose a hard tight mosaic of large aggregate
in the base course. Hardened impervious films or layers of compacted fine material over the
larger aggregate shall be removed by appropriate methods which shall avoid damaging the
underlying surface as approved by the Engineer.

Before any prime material is sprayed the layer to be primed shall be checked for compliance
with the surface and other requirements specified. Any sections not complying with the
specifications shall be corrected and remedial measures taken to the satisfaction of the
Engineer before priming operations are permitted.

c. Application of Prime Coat

Primer shall be applied by the distributor to the prepared upper base at a nominal of 1.0 litre
per sq. metre (residual bitumen) but shall be within the range 0.80 ‐ 1.40 ltires per sq. metre
and temperature defined in Table 501.2 by means of a bitumen distributor or by hand
sprayer or any other means approved by the Engineer. The actual rate of application shall be
decided by the Engineer based on the results of test areas. Sufficient prime coat shall be
applied so that maximum penetration is achieved without excess asphalt remaining on the
surface. The Engineer may alter the previous established rate of application where he deems
it necessary. Additional primer shall be applied where surface conditions indicate it to be
necessary, if the Engineer so directs. No further courses shall be applied until the prime coat
has been cured as indicated below.

The surfaces of structures and trees adjacent to the areas being treated shall be protected in
such a manner as to prevent their being spattered or marred. No asphaltic material shall be
is charged into a borrow pit or gutter.

The distributor shall be functioning properly in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions with all spray nozzles functioning and delivering prime coat at the same evenly
distributed rate. There shall be no leakages or drips of oil, diesel or bituminous material
from the distributor.

The total width of primed surface shall be 300mm wider than the specified width of the final
surfacing or and the edges of the prime shall be parallel to the centre‐line of the road.

The prescribed prime coat application rate may be achieved by two or more repeated
applications when necessary to avoid flow of prime coat on steep crossfalls or gradients.

Any areas deemed by the Engineer to be deficient in prime coat after passage of the
distributor shall be made good by hand‐lance.

Spray record sheets containing details of ambient temperature, spraying temperature, areas
sprayed and quantities of materials used shall be submitted by the Contractor on a daily
basis for approval by the Engineer.

Table 501‐2 Spraying Temperatures for Prime Coat

Prime Coat Type Temperature Degrees
Celsius
MC 30 or 45% Cutback Bitumen 40‐70
CSS‐1 or CSS‐1h Emulsion 20‐70

d. Aftercare

Following the prime coat application, the primed, unblinded surface shall be allowed to cure
for a minimum 24 hours without being disturbed so as to allow the prime coat to fully
penetrate the surface unless full penetration and curing has taken place in the opinion of the
Engineer in a shorter period. If after 24 hours the prime coat has not sufficiently cured to
permit trafficking without being picked up, and the Contractor wishes to open the section to
traffic, the Engineer shall either instruct that the area be left for a further period until the
prime coat has fully penetrated and aired to allow traffic to pass or permit the Contractor to
place mineral aggregate for blinding applied at a rate and in the places instructed to blot up
the excess bitumen.

As soon as the primed surface has cured sufficiently or mineral aggregate for blinding has
been applied to allow traffic to pass over the road without the prime coat being picked up,
the road shall, where practicable, be opened to public traffic for a period of 14 days or less if
agreed by the Engineer. During this period the primed area under traffic shall be maintained
and all damage caused by traffic shall be repaired as instructed by the Engineer at no extra
cost. Thereafter the contractor shall maintain the primed surface and shall protect the
surface until the application of surfacing by taking suitable precautions including for example
supplying and spreading a protective layer of sand at no extra cost.

No payment shall be made for mineral aggregate for blinding which shall only be used for the
convenience of the Contractor in early opening the primed areas to traffic.

e. Quality Control

Samples of the bituminous material that the Contractor proposes to use, together with a
statement as to their source and character shall be submitted and approved before use of
such material. The Contractor shall require the manufacturer or producer of the material to
furnish material subject to this and all other pertinent requirements. Only satisfactory
materials, so demonstrated by service tests, shall be acceptable.

The Contractor shall furnish vendor’s certified test reports for each consignment of
bituminous material supplied. The reports shall be delivered to the Engineer before
permission is granted for use of the material. The furnishing of the vendor’s reports shall not
be interpreted as basis for final acceptance. All such test reports shall be subject to
verification by testing samples of materials received.

Control of the quality of materials and work shall be exercised in accordance with section
1602.



a. Measurement

The measurements shall be made on one of the following three alternatives for prime coat as
specified in Bill of Quantities:

Bitumen Penetration Grade 80‐100 cut back using Kerosene or diesel to the extent instructed
by the Engineer after trails on Site.

The volume of bitumen and the volume of kerosene/diesel will be paid for separately
according to the pay items but the total of the two volumes shall be the volume of
prime coat thoroughly mixed in the correct proportions actually placed on the road
calculated at the instructed rate per square metre over the area specified to be
covered.
Medium curing MC‐70 from an approved source.

The volume of MC‐70 will be paid as the volume actually placed on the road
covered.

Emulsion CSS‐1 or CSS‐1h.

The volume of MC‐70 will be paid as the volume actually placed on the road
covered.

b. Payment

Payment will be made for either alternative (I), (ii) or (iii) at the Contract Unit rates or rate for
the alternative elected and priced by the Contractor and shall include full compensation for
providing all materials, mixing where required, placement, labour equipment total and
incidentals to complete the prime coat as specified.

Pay Item Pay Unit

Alternative (i)

501 (1) Bitumen Penetration grade80‐100 Litres

501 (2) Kerosene/Diesel as Cutter Litres

OR

Alternative (ii)

501 (1)a Prime Coat MC‐70 Litres
OR

Alternative (iii)

501 (1)b Prime Coat Emulsion Litres
502. TACK COAT

No change.
503. HOT BITUMEN APPLICATIONS

No change.
504. SAND SEALING

No change.
505. SEAL COAT TREATMENTS (SURFACE DRESSINGS)

Delete the text of section 505 and substitute the following :‐

505.1. Description

Surface Dressing shall be the process of spraying the surface to be dressed with bituminous
binder, covering the binder with natural or crushed stone cover aggregate and rolling the
resulting surface. The Contractor shall familiarise himself with the contents of the British
Transport & Road Research Laboratory Overseas Road Note 3 ‐ “ A Guide to Surface Dressing
in Tropical and Sub‐Tropical Countries” ‐ hereinafter referred to as TRRL‐ORN 3. Much of the
Specification for Seal Coat Treatment is based on TRRL‐ORN 3, including the design of the
surface dressing and knowledge of the principles of the Surface Dressing Process is essential
to the Contractor.

The requirement for a single or double surface dressing shall be specified on the Drawings.

505.2. Materials
a. Binders

The bitumen binder shall consist of Penetration grade bitumen, cutback bitumen or bitumen
emulsion, as specified in the relevant item of the Bill of Quantities.

Bitumen binder shall comply with sub‐section 1702.1 form a source approved by the
Employer. The grade shall be 80/100 pen unless otherwise specified in the relevant item of
the Bill of Quantities.

Cutback bitumen binder shall comprise penetration grade 80/100 bitumen and cutter which
shall be diesel or kerosene or a mixture of both prepared on Site. The type and proportion of
cutter if required shall be instructed by the Engineer on Site, in the range 1% to 10% after
design of the surface dressing in accordance with the procedures set out in Chapter 5 of
TRRL‐ORN 3.

Approval of the source of supply of bitumen shall be obtained from the Engineer prior to
delivery of the material. The Engineer will require test certificates to confirm compliance
with the specified requirements and may require samples for independent testing prior to
issue of such approval. No bituminous material other than that represented by samples and
test certificates submitted shall be used by the Contractor except with the written consent of
the Engineer and the material shall comply in all respects with the requirements herein.
Blending of bituminous materials from different refineries shall not be permitted without the
knowledge and approval of the Engineer.

Problems have been experienced with bitumen in some parts of Asia that relate to bitumen
chemistry, in particular to undesirably high paraffin wax contents. Some penetration grade
bitumens may comply with standard specification requirements but perform badly in service
due to high paraffin wax content or some other compositional factor. Bitumen proposed for
use shall be tested to establish the following:

• Viscosity characteristics at 60 and 135 degrees centigrade
• Rolling Thin Film Oven Test (RTFOT results indicate the resistance of bitumen to
hardening under the influence of heat and air)
• Paraffin wax content (DIN test procedure)

Bitumen emulsion binder shall be quick‐breaking anionic or cationic, dependent on cover
aggregate type, from a source approved by the Engineer and having a bitumen content (% by
weight) of not less than 60 and viscosity (Degrees Angler at 20°C) between 6 and 20. The
grade shall be that specified in the relevant item of the Bill of Quantities.

b. Cover Aggregate

Cover aggregate specified in the relevant items of the Bill of Quantities shall be obtained
from a source approved by the Engineer and shall be natural screened gravel or crushed hard
rock/stone, clean and free from adhering dust, achieved by washing and drying, or any other
detrimental substance that could impair the adhesion of bitumen and shall conform to the
requirements of sub‐clause 1701.3 Cover Aggregate for surface.

For specific contracts, pre‐coated cover aggregates shall be required as recommended in the
contract drawings. Cover aggregate shall be pre‐coated using cut back bitumen penetration
grade 80‐100 in the ratio of 30% to 70% bitumen to cutter unless otherwise instructed by the
Engineer. Pre‐coating material shall be thinly and evenly applied by means of a fine pressure
spray to a moving stream of aggregate or by mixing with the aggregate in an approved
mixing plant so that all particles are fully coated but do not contain excess material. The
coating shall be such that no material will drip from a particle of aggregate suspended
between the fingers. Mixing in stockpiles will only be permitted of the Contractor can
demonstrate compliance for mixing to the approval of the Engineer. Aggregate shall not
contain sufficient moisture to cause uneven distribution of the pre‐coating material and shall
not be used in the work until the moisture has evaporated and the pre‐coating material has
adhered effectively to the aggregate. Pre‐coating of aggregate shall not be carried out when
rain is imminent unless the aggregate is subsequently covered or unless the mixing of an
adhesion agent in the pre‐coating material has been authorised by the Engineer. In areas
subject to dusty conditions, pre‐coated aggregate shall not be stockpiled for any period
longer than is necessary for moisture to dry out. When there is a visible coating of dust on
the particles the Engineer may direct that portions of the stockpiles be pre‐coated again.

Stockpiling of aggregates will be permitted only at locations approved by the Engineer. A
separate stockpile shall be made for each nominal size of aggregate at each location.

The site of the stockpile shall be cleared of all vegetation and debris, graded and drained,
and where the Engineer deems it necessary, the area shall be surfaced with a 100 mm
compacted layer of approved material to prevent contamination of the lower layer of cover
aggregate.

Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer each stockpile shall be built at least two metes
high by tipping in layers not more than one metre deep over the whole area of the stockpile.
The Contractor shall supply and planking or other material required in connection with
movement of vehicles over and about the stockpiles.

The bottom 50 mm layer of cover aggregate or any contaminated aggregate shall not be
used in the work unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.

Stockpiles shall be kept dry from rainfall or ingress of water by covering with approved
waterproof membranes and maintaining ground drainage to avoid seepage of ground water
into stockpile.

c. Adhesion Agents

Prior to the commencement of the surface dressing, the Contractor shall carry out tests
under the supervision of the Engineer to determine the adhesion qualities of the aggregate
and binder to be used. These adhesion tests will include, but not be limited to , the
Immersion Tray Test described in Appendix 3 of TRRL‐ORN 3. If, in the opinion of the
Engineer, the tests and trials indicate the need, the Engineer shall instruct the use of a
proprietary adhesion agent :as admixture to the bitumen binder; to be applied along with
pre‐coating to the cover aggregate

The Contractor shall supply and apply the specified adhesion agent in the quantities and in
the manner instructed by the Engineer and in accordance with the manufacture’s
instructions. The Contractor shall pre‐coat cover aggregates only when instructed by the
Engineer.

a. Bitumen Distributors

Operation

Distributors shall be of constant volume or preferably constant pressure type, self‐propelled,
equipped with pneumatic tyres and have a minimum binder capacity of 4000 litres and each
machine shall require the approval in writing of the Engineer for use in constructing the
Works.

Approval will depend on fulfilling the following requirements :

Distributors shall be equipped with low range speedometer (fifth wheel) in good working
condition, so located to be visible to the driver to enable him to maintain accurately the
constant speed for spraying binder at the uniform specified rate. They shall be fitted with
either a calibrated pressure gauge which accurately records the pressure of the bitumen at
the spray bar for constant pressure distributors, or a binder pump delivery meter for
constant volume distributors. Binder pumps shall be capable of maintaining constant
pressure or constant volume during spray runs.

Distributors shall be fitted with burners in combination with a circulating pump capable of
maintaining the bitumen without overheating within the specified temperature range and an
accurately calibrated thermometer for indicating the spraying temperature of the bitumen.

The spray bar shall be capable of applying bitumen binder to a minimum width of 2.30
meters with provision for application of lesser widths by closing jets. The spray bar shall
have the capability of being raised and lowered to specified heights above the road and of
being adjusted so that it is parallel with the road surface. The distributors shall be so
designed to allow the circulation of hot binder through the spray bar when not spraying.

Spray bars shall be fitted with either slotted spray jets or preferably whirling spray jets,
whose essential features are the ability to spray binder uniformly at the specified rate of
spray, such that the speed of the distributor can be matched by the following chipping
spreader during its normal chip spreading operation. If whirling spray jets are fitted the
spray bar shall be protected by a hood to reduce wind interference. Distributors shall be
fitted with hand‐lances with nozzle spray attachments for spraying small, inaccessible areas
and to correct deficiencies in the spray rate.

Prior to surface dressing operations, distributors shall be checked for leakages from spray
jets and any other sources and these shall be eliminated. Distributors shall then be
calibrated by a method approved by the Engineer and under his supervision, to establish
uniformity of lateral spray of bitumen to within ±10% permitted variation at any point on the
surface from the mean spray rate. This calibration includes setting the spray bar height
above the surface to be sprayed, in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions, so as to
ensure that the designed overlap of jets is achieved. All spray jets shall be functioning so
that each jet requirement has been achieved. Calibration shall be undertaken in accordance
with the manufacturer’s instructions or in accordance with TRRL‐ORN 3 ‐ Section 6.3
Distributor Speed Control and Calibration ‐ to establish the relationship between spray rate
and road speed for constant pressure distributors and in addition, bitumen pump delivery
rate and spray bar width for constant volume distributors. The distributors shall be capable
of achieving a mean spray rate measured by the TRRL‐ORN 3 Method B, which shall not vary
by more than ±5% from the specified spray rate.

Safety and Maintenance

Bitumen heating, pumping and spraying operations shall be entrusted only to personnel who
have been adequately trained and who are competent in the use of the equipment.
Unauthorised personnel shall not be allowed to remain in the vicinity during the above
operations. Authorised personnel shall be provided with, and be required to wear, suitable
protective clothing, i.e. overalls, heat‐proof gloves, boots, helmets and goggles.

Special care is needed when changing the type of binder being used in the distributor. When
changing from hot binders to bitumen emulsions, all residual binder in the tank and spraying
system shall be drained completely and the spraying system flushed using diesel. When
changing from emulsions to hot binders, all emulsion shall be drained/flushed from the
distributor in order to avoid foaming when hot binder is loaded. When it is necessary to load
hot binder after using the distributor for spraying cutback bitumen, the cutback bitumen
shall be drained completely and the manhole left open for some time to allow solvent vapour
to escape.

The spray bar shall be emptied of binder by blowing with air, or by diesel flushing when
spraying is suspended for lengthy periods and at the end of each day’s work.

The binder shall be introduced into the distributor at a temperature equal to or just above
the spraying temperature after preheating in separate tanks fitted with burners and
circulating pumps for this purpose. The capacity of the decanters/preheating tank shall be
sufficient to preheat the binder required for the full day’s work.

The distributor burners shall be used only to make relatively small adjustments to the binder
temperature and shall not be used to raise the binder from ambient to spraying
temperature. Under no circumstances shall distributor burners be operated during the
spraying operation, or when the level of binder in the tank is less than 150 mm over the top
of the flues, or when the distributor is moving. The need for end of day maintenance of the
distributor is emphasised to reduce fire risk and to ensure its adequate performance when
next used for binder application.

Maintenance of all equipment for the surface dressing operation shall be under the control
of a competent senior mechanic, approved by the Engineer and fully experienced in the
maintenance of all equipment and in the calibration of the bitumen distributor.

The Contractor shall provide all necessary traffic control equipment and shall inform the
engineer at least 14 days before commencing the surface dressing Work, of his detailed
arrangements for traffic control. After review the Engineer will inform the Contractor in
writing of his approval, subject to any modifications to the Contractor’s arrangements which
he requires for traffic and convenience of the public.

b. Workmanship
Preparation of Surface

Surface dressing operations shall not commence until the Engineer has inspected and
approved the primed base course. Major defects or damage shall be rectified by complete
reworking of the base course after removal and disposal of the defective primed base course.

However if the surface to be treated contains small but limited holes or depressions, which in
the opinion of the Engineer require treatment, such irregularities shall be repaired by
removal of all loose and defective material and replacement with a patching mixture
compatible with the surrounding surface or other material approved by the Engineer, which
shall be compacted to produce a tight surface conforming with the adjacent area.

Irregularities which impair the riding qualities shall be corrected as instructed by the
Engineer.

Immediately prior to the application of binder, all loose dust and detrimental material shall
be removed by sweeping and blowing by air compressor or by other means. If necessary,
adhering mud and other material shall be removed by hand using wire brushes and water.
Road furniture (manhole covers etc.), shall be protected from bitumen spray with adhesive
paper or similar material. Kerbstones, roadside furniture and any other objects which will
not benefit from binder spray shall be protected in a manner approved by the Engineer.

c. Application of Binder

The application rate and spraying temperature of specified bitumen binder, cut back or
emulsion shall be instructed by the Engineer on Site after design of the surface dressing, in
accordance with the procedures set out in Chapter 5 of TRRL‐ORN 3. The range of spraying
temperature for binders is given in TRRL‐ORN 3 Table 9.

The Contractor shall present his detailed programme and arrangements and methods for the
planning and execution of the surface dressing process to the Engineer for approval at least
28 days before he intends to commence this Work. The Contractor’s authorised
representative shall be responsible for preparation of the programmes and arrangements
and the Contractor shall not commence surface dressing until the Engineer has approved his
programme.

The Contractor shall base his programme on TRRL‐ORN 3 ‐ Section 7. The Surface Dressing
Process, Sub‐Section 7.1 Planning and 7.2 The Surface Dressing Operation ‐ by selecting the
activities appropriate to his particular Work Programme. The Contractor shall appoint a
surface dressing supervisor approved by the Engineer who shall be fully competent to
organise and implement the surface dressing operation with experience in operating all
essential equipment.

All operations associated with the surface dressing process shall be described in the
Contractor’s arrangements and shall include but not be limited to :

method of bitumen supply, decanting, cutting back where required, heating and storing,
transfer to distributor including lists of equipment and capacities;
location and method of production of cover aggregates and pre‐coating with type and output
of equipment, including crushers where appropriate; and.
method of performing the surface dressing process including type and capacity/weight of all
main and ancillary items of equipment along with workforce details.

The Contractor shall provide, one day in advance, his following day’s surface dressing Work
Programme, including his expected spray lengths and widths for each run with details of the
quantity of cover aggregate available in approved chip spreaders standing by at the
commencement of the spray run. Spraying shall not commence until sufficient cover
aggregate is in this position to cover the area programmed for spraying.

The distributor shall be filled with preheated bitumen binder on the same day, shortly before
start of binder application. The distributor spray bar and jets shall be preheated by
circulating hot binder and the jets operated for at least 10 seconds for testing. This
operation shall be carried out before each spray run, off‐road onto trays, or at a location
where no environmental damage will be created. Jets shall be inspected by the Engineer for
shape, direction, blockage or any other defects which shall be corrected before spraying is
permitted. At the end of each spray run the distributor shall be driven off‐road to avoid
binder drippage on the pavement surface. Binder drippage from any location which may
contaminate the road surface shall be sufficient for the Engineer to order removal of the
offending source from the roadway until repairs are completed.
As emergency/temporary measures, drip protection of the pavement surface shall be
provided by use of buckets/trays etc. These shall be available for use at all times, along with
equipment for removal of binder spillages on the pavement surface, to the approval of the
Engineer.

The Contractor shall carry out a trial section of surface dressing at a location instructed by
the Engineer to demonstrate to the Engineer that his surface dressing operation is capable of
constructing the surface dressing in accordance with the Specification. The trial length shall
be minimum 200 meters using full spray bar width with full width application of cover
aggregate. If the trial section of surface dressing complies with the Specification, the
Contractor shall receive payment for the Work in accordance with the Contract as if it were
Permanent Work. If the trial section of surface dressing fails to comply with the
Specification, the Contractor shall carry out further trials until his surface dressing operation
complies with the Specification. No payment will be made for trial sections that do not
comply with the Specification.

When the Engineer is satisfied that the Contractor is capable of constructing surface dressing
that complies with the Specification after trial section or sections, the Contractor will receive
permission to commence surface dressing as permanent Work on the road pavement.

Application of binder shall only be undertaken when the surface is dry or slightly damp, but
in no circumstances when wet. If in the opinion of the Engineer rainfall is likely before the
application of binder or cover aggregate or the temperature or the pavement surface has
time to fall below the specified minimum temperature of 15°C, the Engineer will instruct the
Contractor to delay surface dressing work until weather conditions are satisfactory. Areas
damaged by rainfall shall be rectified by the Contractor without additional payment, in a
manner instructed by the Engineer.

If in the opinion of the Engineer the ambient temperature is too cold for surface dressing, the
Contractor shall delay this operation until the temperature increases to the specified
minimum level of 15°C.

Building paper or other approved protective material shall be used at the start and finish of
each spray run of sufficient width (not less than 600mm) to enable the distributor to reach
its calibrated road speed with spray jets open before discharging binder onto the pavement
under treatment. Ends of previous surface treatment runs shall be trimmed back to clean,
straight transverse edges and these shall form the start point for subsequent runs, with
completed work suitably protected as described above. Spray runs will be limited to 300
metres length initially until the Contractor demonstrates his ability to plan and execute
longer lengths. Spray widths shall be calculated allowing for 150mm longitudinal overlap
with adjoining passes and for the width that the following chipping spreader is able to cover.
Longitudinal sprayed butt joints will not be permitted. The Contractor shall submit his spray
width and length proposals to the Engineer for approval.

During spraying all passing traffic shall be stopped. If spray jets block, or the chipping
spreader stops, or any other event occurs which may affect the surface treatment process,
then the spray bar operator immediately shall stop spraying. When the defective equipment
or operation is rectified, spraying may restart with the Engineer’s approval.

The distributor shall be dipped and the binder temperature recorded before and after each
spray run and spray length and width recorded on approved Record Sheets. The hot
application rate shall be calculated and recorded and checked against the specified rate. The
calculated actual rate shall not vary by more than ±5% from the specified rate. The actual
quantity of binder sprayed corrected to 15.6°C shall be calculated.

At least eight clean pre‐weighed metal spray trays shall be available for sampling the spray
rate for each spray run, to be used in accordance with TRRL‐ORN 3 ‐ Section 6.3 Method B ‐ if
so instructed by the Engineer.

To ensure that the spray runs are parallel with the road pavement the road centreline or
edgeline shall be marked every 25 metres and a string line laid out for the distributor driver
to follow with the guide bar attached to his side of the cab.

Where a second surface dressing is specified, the first surface dressing shall be left open to
traffic for a minimum period of 21 days and preferably a longer period before applying the
second surface dressing unless special approval is obtained from the Engineer for a shorter
period. Surplus chippings shall be removed by firm hand‐brooming or power‐brooming
before applying the second surface dressing.

The spraying widths shall be so selected that the centreline joint of the second surface
dressing is offset from that in the first surface dressing by a minimum 300 mm.

Hand‐pouring pots or hand‐lances shall be used to touch up carefully any parts of the first
surface missed by the distributor/chipping spreader, or for the treatment of areas in which
the distributor cannot operate and in this case only, chippings may be applied by an
approved manual method.

Areas damaged by excess bitumen or spillages of diesel or other deleterious material shall be
repaired by careful cutting out and removal followed by careful hand‐poured or hand‐lance
application of binder and chipping in a manner approved by the Engineer.

The second surface dressing shall be undertaken when the first surface has been approved
by the Engineer after all surplus chippings are removed, repairs carried out and the surface
thoroughly cleaned as specified. The procedures to be followed are those specified for
Surface Dressing in this Specification.

d. Application of Cover Aggregate

The cover aggregate shall be applied at the rate instructed by the Engineer on Site in square
metres of coverage per cubic metre of loose aggregate after design of the surface dressing,
in accordance with procedures set out in Chapter 5 of TRRL‐ORN 3.

The cover aggregate shall be applied immediately after the binder is applied and with the
approval of the Engineer may be applied slightly damp if not pre‐coated to depress dust and
help adhesion. Aggregate applied to sprayed bitumen emulsion shall, however, be dry.

The cover aggregate shall be applied using approved mechanical spreaders, which shall be
tailgate mounted on tipper trucks, pushed spreaders or self‐propelled spreaders, specifically
manufactured for the purpose and they shall preferably be metered or any other means
approved by the Engineer. They shall be capable of uniformly spreading cover aggregate at
the instructed rate such that they can deliver the rate specified whilst travelling at the same
speed as the binder distributors during spraying.

The bitumen binder surface shall be covered with cover aggregate closely packed in one
layer so that adjacent chippings are touching and no bitumen binder is left uncovered.

A sufficient number of loaded spreaders shall be available at the start of binder application
to provide cover aggregate over the whole area programmed for spraying. The Contractor
shall not commence spraying unless sufficient loaded spreaders are in place. Aggregate
spreading by manual methods will not be permitted except in circumstances where:

a. mechanical spreaders cannot operate effectively or safely;
b. additional aggregate (back‐up work) is required;
c. breakdown of mechanical spreaders occurs during the spreading operations before
stoppage of spraying;
d. minor surface repairs are instructed.
e. Labour based contracts.

The spreader shall follow the distributor at an interval not exceeding 10m for hot binder
work and not exceeding 5m when using bitumen emulsion binder. A back‐up vehicle or
other approved means shall be constantly in attendance during surface dressing, from which
additional aggregate may be hand‐applied to ensure complete and rapid coverage.

Where an adjoining pass of the distributor is required, no aggregate shall be applied to the
binder over a 150 ‐ 200 mm strip so as to permit subsequent overlap.

Under no circumstances will general brooming of the chipped surface be permitted.
Aggregate spillage shall be removed with care and excess aggregates may be brushed off
carefully after a minimum of 3 days under traffic, after approval of the Engineer.

The cover aggregate shall be rolled with pneumatic multi ‐ tyred power rollers. Pneumatic ‐
tyred rollers shall have a wheel load in the 1000 ‐ 2000kg range. Tyre pressures and sizes
shall be in accordance with the manufacture’s recommendations and shall be the same on
each axle and tyres shall be smooth and in good condition to provide uniform rolling of
chippings. Engineer may approve use of smooth wheel roller having sufficient weight to
embed the stone chippings into the binder without crushing them. The roller shall follow
directly behind the spreader and shall continue to roll at a speed of approximately 8 ‐ 10kph.
Engineer shall fix the minimum number of roller passes for each coat, which shall not be less
than four. Each pass shall overlap the previous pass by minimum half width of roller rolling
shall be continued until all cover aggregate particles are firmly bedded. Tyres / Wheels shall
be in good condition and be kept clean and smooth to avoid pick‐up of bitumen and
chippings.

e. Quality Control
Bitumen

The Contractor shall obtain a manufacture’s test certificate clearly cross‐referenced to each
bitumen consignment purchased for use in the Works confirming compliance of that
consignment with the Specification. The Contractor shall not use any bitumen until the test
certificates are received for that batch. The Contractor shall sample in the presence of the
Engineer at least every 100 tonnes and every batch of bitumen after delivery to the Site in
sufficient quantity to carry out one set of tests for compliance of the bitumen with the
Specification. Testing will be carried out at a laboratory in Colombo and the Contractor shall
arrange for transport of the samples in sealed containers to the laboratory.

Bitumen Binder shall comply with the requirement of section 1702.

Cover Aggregate

The Contractor shall sample, in the presence of the Engineer initially one set of 3
representative specimens for each source of supply and subsequently when warranted by
changes in the quality of aggregates for Aggregate Crushing Value or Los Angeles Abrasion
3
Value and at least every 50 m for Grading and Particle shape (flakiness & elongation).
Additional samples shall be taken for testing where visible changes in the properties of the
cover aggregates are observed by the Engineer.

Cover aggregate shall comply with the requirements of sub section 1701.3

Surface finish

The surface finish shall confirm to the requirements of the contract on alignment and surface
regularity sub section 1601.

f. Measurement

The quantity of binder measured for payment of bitumen emulsion or bitumen grade 80/100
pen and, if applicable, cutter shall be the actual number of litres at 15.6°C used in the
accepted Work as instructed by the Engineer on Site. The conversion of binder material from
the spraying temperature at the time of measurement to the volume at 15.6°C shall be
carried out according to ASTM D 1250‐56, ASTM ‐ IP Petroleum Measurement Tables. The
measured quantity shall be calculated as the product of the area sprayed and the application
rate instructed by the Engineer or the actual quantity sprayed on the area and accepted,
whichever is the lower.

If cut‐back bitumen is used as binder, the quantity of binder measured for payment shall be
separated into bitumen grade 80/100 pen and cutter in the proportion instructed by the
Engineer for cut‐back bitumen. The quantities of Bitumen grade 80/100 pen and cutter so
calculated shall be paid separately at the rates in the relevant items in the Bill of Quantities.

The quantity of adhesion agent measured for payment shall be the actual quantity in litres at
15.6°C used as instructed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall inform the Engineer 24
hours in advance of his intention to apply the adhesion agent in the manner and quantity
instructed by the Engineer so that joint measurement of the quantity used for be agreed. If
the Contractor fails to inform the Engineer no payment will be made for adhesion agent.

The quantity of cover aggregate measured for payment shall be the number of cubic metres
used as instructed by the Engineer on Site. The measured quantity shall be calculated as
either the product of the area which received cover aggregate and the application rate
instructed by the Engineer or the actual quantity used and accepted, whichever is the lower.

g. Payment

Payment shall be made at the contract unit rates as per the net quantities of materials
instructed by the Engineer or actually used and measured for the surface dressing works; per
litre for supplying and applying (a) bitumen grade 80/100 pen, (b) cutter, (c) bitumen
emulsion and (a) adhesion agent (Provisional Item); and per cubic metre for supply and
application of cover aggregate. This prices shall be full compensation for furnishing all
materials and for all preparation, delivering and application of these materials and for all
labour, equipment, tools and incidentals required for completing the surface dressing.

Pay Item Pay Unit

505(1) Bitumen per grade (80‐100) Litre
505(2) Kerosene/diesel or other approved cutter Litre
505(1)a Emulsion Litre
505(3) Adhesion agent Litre
3
505(4) 20 mm chips m
505(5) 10 mm chips m3

506. ASPHALTIC CONCRETE SURFACING
506.1. Description

This work shall consist of furnishing materials, mixing at a central mixing plant, and spreading
and compacting asphaltic concrete wearing course on an approved base course as and where
shown on the Drawings and as instructed by the Engineer. The wearing course will be
typically of 50 mm thickness as specified.

506.2. Materials

Materials used shall conform to the requirements of the following, unless otherwise
specified :‐

(a) The bitumen binder shall be 60‐70 penetration grade bitumen to sub section 1702.1.

(b) The coarse aggregate shall be of nominal maximum size 20 mm and the fine aggregate
shall conform to the general requirements of sub section 1701.3 (a). When the coarse
and fine aggregate are combined, along with filler where required, the combined
grading requirements shall be as given in sub section 506.3 for wearing Course Type 3.
The Contractor shall control the production of course aggregate, fine aggregate and
filler for asphaltic concrete at the crushing and screening plant such that the grading
of aggregates in stockpiles shall be uniform and consistent throughout the period of
asphalt production and paving operations. Regular sampling of stockpiles by the
Contractor shall be carried out to demonstrate the uniformity and consistency of
grading of the aggregate production to the satisfaction of the Engineer. If significant
changes occur to the aggregate grading during crushing and screening this will
immediately effect the grading of the asphaltic concrete mix produced by the asphalt
plant rendering it out of compliance with the job mix formula. Therefore the
Contractor shall take immediate steps to rectify the irregularity in aggregate
production and/or submit a new job mix formula based on the changed aggregate
gradings for the approval of the Engineer.

Filler, where separately used in the mix, shall be cement, hydrated lime, crusher fines
or other inert material to section 1706.

506.3. Mix Requirements
a. Combined Grading of Aggregate and Binder Content

The grading requirements for the combined aggregate and the binder content shall be as
given in Table 506‐1 for the wearing courses type 1,2,3,4. The wearing course shall be Type 3
with nominal maximum size of aggregate 20mm.
Table 506.1 ‐ Aggregate grading, binder content and thickness requirements for wearing
courses

Mix classification Wearing Wearing Wearing Wearing
Course Course Course Course
1 2 3 4
Thickness mm ‐ Max. 75 45 75 75
Min. 35 25 40 35
Sieve Size
mm/μm
25.0 ‐ ‐ 100 ‐
19.0 100 100 90 ‐ 100 100
12.5 80 ‐ 100 80 ‐ 100 ‐ 79 ‐ 90
9.5 65 ‐ 93 73 ‐ 93 56 ‐ 80 60 ‐ 80
4.75 45 ‐ 73 52 ‐ 69 35 ‐ 65 40 ‐ 65
2.36 35 ‐ 58 32 ‐ 50 23 ‐ 49 27 ‐ 48
1.18 26 ‐ 48 25 ‐ 43 ‐ 20 ‐ 40
600 18 ‐ 38 19 ‐ 35 ‐ 15 ‐ 35
300 13 ‐ 28 14 ‐ 27 05 ‐ 19 10 ‐ 25
150 08 ‐ 20 09 ‐ 18 ‐ 07 ‐ 17
75 04 ‐ 12 05 ‐ 10 02 ‐ 08 05 ‐ 09

Percentage binder 4.0‐6.5 3.5‐6.0 3.5‐6.0 4.0‐6.5
content by total weight of
mix

Note

The sieve sizes used herein are of ASTM designation. However equivalent BS sizes as given in
Table 107‐1 of section 107, may be used with the prior approval of the Engineer.

b. Mix Characteristics

The mix characteristics as determined by the Marshall Mix Designs procedure shall be as
given in Table 506‐2(a) and 506‐2(b) for binder courses and for wearing courses respectively
for low, medium or high traffic depending on whether the cumulative number of standard
axles, for the design life of the surfacing, is less than 10,000 or between 10,000 and
1,000,000 or greater than 1,000,000 respectively.

In the determination of the above, laboratory samples shall be prepared and tested as
specified in sub section 1802.4(a).

The wearing course mix shall be determined by using Table 506‐2(b) ‐ High Traffic category.

Table 506‐2(a) ‐ Binder Courses

No Description Low Traffic Medium Traffic High Traffic
1 Marshall stability Not less than 2.25 Not less than 4.5 Not less than 7.0
in KN
2 Marshall flow 8 to 20 8 to 18 8 to 16
(0.25 mm)
3 Air voids in mix 3 to 7 3 to 7 3 to 7
percent
4 Voids in mineral Not less than 14 Not less than 14 Not less than 14
aggregate percent

Table 506‐2(b) ‐ Wearing Courses

No Description Low Traffic Medium Traffic High Traffic
1 Marshall stability Not less than 2.25 Not less than 3.33 Not less than 7.0
in KN
2 Marshall flow 8 to 20 8 to 18 8 to 16
(0.25 mm)
3 Air voids in total 3 to 5 3 to 5 3 to 5
mix (percent)
4 Voids in mineral Not less than 14 Not less than 14 Not less than 14
aggregate
(percent)

506.4. Job Mix Formula

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer in writing at least two weeks before the start of
the work, the job mix formula proposed to be used by him for the work based on trial mix
designs carried out in accordance with “Mix Design Methods for Asphalt Concrete (MS ‐ 2)”
published by the American Asphalt Institute or similar approved method which shall give the
following details :‐

(i) A single percentage of aggregate passing each specified test sieve.
(ii) A single percentage of binder content by total weight of total mix.
(iii) A single temperature at which the mix is emptied from the mixer which shall exceed
145 degrees C.
(iv) A single temperature at which the mix is to be delivered to the paver on the road
which shall exceed 135 degrees C.

In addition the Contractor shall given the sources, locations of all materials and the details of
the mix design based on requirements given in Table 506‐2 (a) and (b).

The Engineer shall check the proposed Job Mix Formula for compliance with the Specification
and shall approve the same when compliance is achieved.

All mixes produced shall conform to the job mix formula approved by the Engineer within the
ranges of tolerances given in Table 506‐3.

Table 506‐3 ‐ Job Mix Tolerance for Single Test

Aggregate Passing 12.5 mm and larger ± 8%
Aggregate Passing 9.5 mm and 4.7 mm sieves ± 7%
Aggregate Passing 2.36 mm and 1.18 mm sieves ± 6%
Aggregate Passing 600 μm and 300 μm sieves ± 5%
Aggregate Passing 150 μm sieves ± 4%
Aggregate Passing 75 μm sieves ± 3%
Binder content percent weight of total mix ± 0.4%
Temperature of mixture when emptied from mixer ± 10 C%
Temperature of mixture when delivered on road ± 10 C%

If a change in the materials or source of materials is proposed, or a change in the grading of
the coarse and fine aggregate or filled occurs a new job mix formula shall be submitted and
approved before the mix containing the new material is delivered to site.

When unsatisfactory results or changed conditions make it necessary, the Contractor, if
required, shall submit a new job mix formula to the Engineer for approval.

a. Preparation of Existing Surface

(i) Where asphaltic concrete surfacings are laid over newly constructed aggregate bases,
prior to construction, the surface shall be cleaned of extraneous matter and applied
with a prime coat as per section 501.

(ii) Where asphaltic concrete surfacings are laid on existing pavements, the surfaces of
such pavements shall be corrected to the required width and profile as instructed. All
potholes, ruts, depressions and damaged edges, shall be corrected as given in sections
1102 & 1103. Areas requiring reshaping and strengthening shall be corrected as per
section 408.

On these corrected surfaces, where required, a tack coat shall be applied as per
section 502.

iii. Where the mix is laid over cement concrete pavements or bridge decks, joints and
cracks shall be cleaned and filled with bituminous material as approved, and any
unevenness of the surface shall be corrected as required. A tack coat as per section
502 shall then be applied to the surface.
b. Weather Limitations

The bituminous mix shall not be laid during rainy weather or when the surface on which it is
laid is damp or wet.

c. Limitations Due to Equipment Etc.

No work shall be carried out when there is insufficient equipment for hauling, spreading,
compaction and finishing or insufficient labour to ensure progress at a rate compatible with
the output of the mixing plant to ensure a continuous paving operation.

d. Thickness of Compacted Mix

Tolerances for the wearing coarse thickness shall be in accordance with clause 1601.

e. Mixing Plant and the Preparation of Mix

An approved mixing plant of the automatic batch type or of the continuous type shall be
used for the preparation of the mix, which shall have the capacity sufficient to supply the
paver continuously. The asphalt mixing plant shall generally comply with and be operated in
accordance with the “Asphalt Plant Manual (MS‐3) “ published by the American Asphalt
Institute.

The mixer shall be capable of accurately batching the aggregates, filler and binder and mixing
same thoroughly so that the mixed material on discharge from the mixer is uniform in
composition and that all aggregate particles are completely coated.

Batch type plants, shall be equipped with suitable means for accurately weighing of each bin
size of aggregate and the filler. The scales of such weighing mechanisms shall be calibrated
at the frequencies as instructed by the Engineer using standard weights. The Contractor
shall always have at hand sufficient weights for such calibration.

In continuous type plants the gate openings of the aggregate shall be calibrated by an
approved process of weighing test samples. The bitumen feed line shall have a by‐pass
arrangement in order that the meter can be calibrated. These calibrations shall be carried
out at frequencies instructed by the Engineer.

The mixing plant shall be capable of heating the aggregate and the binder separately to the
appropriate temperatures. When wet aggregate is used, the plant shall have an added
capacity to dry the aggregate before heating.

The binder and mineral aggregate shall be heated separately to temperatures between 140
and 170 degrees C, and 150 and 170 degrees C respectively. The materials shall be mixed at
temperatures within absolute limits of 145 and 170 degrees C, even allowing for tolerances.

The plant shall, if situated in urban areas or required by the Ministry of Transport and
Highways/Environmental Authority be equipped with an approved dust collector so
constructed as to waste or return uniformly to the elevator all or any part of the material
collected.

The mixing plant shall be capable of loading the mix into transport vehicles in such a manner
that segregation does not occur.

In addition the plant shall be provided with the following :‐

Covered protected ladders or stairways with secure hand rails in adequate number
which shall be placed at all points required for accessibility to all operations.
Covering devices for pulleys, belts and drive mechanisms and other moving parts.
Ample and unobstructed space on the mixing platform.
A clear and unobstructed passage at all times in and around the tipper loading space
which shall be kept free from drippings from the mixing platform.
Insulated flexible pipe connections to carry hot bitumen from the heated storage
tanks to the mixer.

f. Transport of Mix

The mix shall be transported from the mixing plant to the point of use in suitable purpose
made tipping trucks.

The trucks shall be in good mechanical condition at all times. They shall have clean and
smooth metal beds, that have been sprayed with water or lime solution or any other
detergent solution approved by the Engineer, to prevent the mix from adhering to the beds.
The amount of sprayed fluid shall however be kept to a practical minimum. All precautions
shall be taken to avoid segregation of mixed materials and to ensure that they do not
become contaminated with dust or foreign matter.

Any truck causing excessive segregation of bituminous material by its spring suspension or
other contributing factors, or that shows oil leaks in detrimental amounts or that causes
undue delays shall, upon instruction of the Engineer, be removed from the Works until such
conditions are corrected.

When instructed by the Engineer, each load shall be covered with a properly fastened canvas
or other suitable material of such size as to protect the mix from the weather or dust. In
order that the mix shall be delivered to the Site within the specified temperature range,
during cold weather or during long hauls, properly fastened insulating covers shall be used.

Loading and transporting shall be co‐ordinated such that spreading, compacting and finishing
shall be completed during daylight hours unless adequate illumination, as approved by the
Engineer, is provided by the Contractor. Working during darkness will not be permitted.

The mix shall be delivered to the paver at the site at a minimum temperature of 135 degrees
Centigrade.

g. Paving Plant and Laying of the Mix
The mix shall be laid immediately after transporting, by means of approved mechanical self
powered pavers. They shall be capable of spreading, finishing and providing initial
compaction to the mix so that, the surfacing can be finished to the required lines, grades,
levels, dimensions and cross sections intended, either over the entire width or over such
other partial widths as may be practicable. The paving operation shall generally be carried
out in accordance with the “Asphalt Paving Manual (MS‐8)” published by the American
Asphalt Institute.

The pavers shall be equipped with receiving hoppers and spreading screws of the reversing
type to place the mix evenly in front of adjustable steering devices and shall have reverse as
well as forward travelling speeds. They shall also be furnished with a vibrating screed
(levelling) unit equipped with suitable burners or heaters and tamping bars or vibration
attachments all operating in accordance with the manufactures instructions.

The pavers shall be able to confine the edges of the pavement to true lines without the use
of stationary side forms. The equipment shall include blending or joint levelling devices for
smoothing and adjusting longitudinal joints between lanes. The assembly shall be adjustable
to achieve the cross sectional shape and level tolerances prescribed and shall be so designed
and operated as to place the required thickness and weight per square metre of material.

A fully trained and experienced operator shall be in direct charge of the paver at all times.
The pavers shall be operated so as to avoid dragging of the material.

The bituminous mix, after spreading, finishing and initial compaction by the paver, shall have
a smooth surface free of irregularities causes by dragging, tearing or gouging.

During construction, if it is seen that the paver in operation leaves on the surfacing tracks or
indented areas or other objectionable irregularities or segregation of mix, which cannot be
satisfactorily corrected by normal operations, the use of such a paver shall be discontinued
forthwith and another satisfactory paver shall be provided by the Contractor.

In narrow widths and in restricted areas where the paver cannot operate, the mix may be
manually laid, in which case, care shall be taken to avoid segregation. Manually laid strips
shall be rolled at the same time as the paver laid work and allowance shall be made for extra
compaction of these strips using appropriate approved purpose made compaction
equipment. Any defects in the laid surface shall immediately be rectified before rolling
commences and there shall be no unnecessary scattering back by hand of material on paver
laid work.
h. Compaction Procedure
Immediately after the mix has been spread as struck off, the surface shall be checked and
any irregularities adjusted. Rolling shall commence as soon as the material will support the
roller without undue displacement or cracking. The mix shall then be thoroughly and
uniformly compacted by rolling, according to the sequence of rolling as given below :‐

(i) Transverse joints
(ii) Longitudinal joints, where applicable
(iii) Outside edge
(iv) Initial or breakdown rolling
(v) Second or intermediate rolling
(vi) Finish or final rolling

Normally the first rolling of all joints and edges and the initial or breakdown rolling, shall all
be done with static weight (tandem or three wheel) or vibratory steel wheeled tandem
rollers and the second or intermediate rolling with pneumatic tyred rollers. Use of any other
rollers for the above purposes shall be with the prior approval of the Engineer. During initial
or breakdown rolling, the direction of travel of the roller shall be such that the powered or
driving wheel passes over the uncompacted mix first, before the driven wheel. The second
intermediate rolling shall follow the initial or breakdown rolling as closely as possible while
the bituminous mix is still plastic and at a temperature that will result in maximum density.
The final rolling shall be accomplished with static weight tandems or vibratory tandems
(without vibration) while the material is still warm enough for removal of roller marks.

In general the type roller or roller combination to be used shall be proposed by the
Contractor for the approval of the Engineer prior to the commencement of work and the
rollers shall satisfy the requirements given in 506.5(j).

The speed of the rollers shall not exceed the limits given in table 506‐4 and shall be at all
times be slow enough to avoid displacement of the hot mix.

Table 506‐4

Type of roller Speed (Km/hr)

Breakdown Intermediate Finish
Steel Wheeled Rollers 3 5 5
Pneumatic Tyred Rollers 5 5 8
Vibratory Rollers 5 5 ‐

During stages of initial, intermediate and final rolling, rolling shall commence at the low side
of the spread and progress towards the higher side parallel to the centre line of the
pavement.

When the roller has passed over the whole area once, any high spots or depressions which
become apparent shall be corrected by either removing or by adding fresh material. The
rolling shall be continued till the entire surface has been compacted adequately and the
roller marks have been eliminated. Each pass of the roller shall uniformly overlap not less
than one half of the proceeding pass. The roller wheels shall be kept damp if required to
avoid the material sticking to the wheels and being picked up. However, the quantity of
water used for this purpose shall be the minimum required and shall not form puddles on the
area under compaction.

When using a vibratory roller for the compaction of a surfacing the vibration shall be turned
off before the roller stops when reversing direction, and turned on after it starts in the new
direction.

Vibratory rollers shall not be used for surfacings of thickness less than 50mm, unless
otherwise approved by the Engineer.

The breakdown and the intermediate rolling shall be carried out at temperature not less than
135 degrees C and 115 degrees C respectively.

The final rolling shall be completed before the temperature of the mix falls below 90 degrees
C.

Rollers shall not be allowed to stand on newly laid material until 6 hours has elapsed after
completion of the compaction of the surfacing.

When the bituminous mix is spread in areas that are inaccessible to rollers such as places
near kerbs and manholes etc., compaction shall be achieved by hand tampers, mechanical
tampers, or small vibrating plate compactors to the approval of the Engineer. In such
locations spreading and compacting shall be carried out promptly before the mix cools below
a minimum of 120 degree C.

The density of all samples taken from the compacted surface course shall not be less than
98% of the Marshall Density at the point appropriate to the locations. The sample densities
shall be determined as given in sub section 1802.4(c).

i. Not in Use
j. Requirements of Compacting Equipment

(i) General
Generally, with each paver, a minimum of 3 rollers shall be provided by the
Contractor. On small projects involving a total of less than 5000 tonnes of material
the minimum requirements shall be one tandem roller.

All rollers shall be self propelled, capable of being reversed without backlash and
equipped with power steering, dual controls allowing operation from either the right
or left side. They shall have water tanks with sprinkler systems to ensure even wetting
of rolls or tyres.

The rolling surface of the wheels of a steel wheel roller shall be checked for wear. If
grooves or pits have worn into the rolling surface, the roller shall not be used on the
work area.

Each roller shall have a calibration chart showing the relationship between depth of
ballast and weight and giving the tare weight of the roller. Each roller shall be in a
good condition and shall be operated by a competent and experienced driver.

(ii) Steel Wheeled Rollers
Steel wheeled rollers (tandem or three wheel) shall weigh not less than 8 metric
tonnes. The minimum rolling pressure of the rear wheels of each three wheeled roller
or at least one roll of each tandem roller shall be 35 KN/m of roller width.

(iii) Pneumatic Tyred Rollers
Pneumatic tyred rollers shall have not less than seven wheels (3 wheels on the front
axle and four on the rear) fitted with smooth tread compactor tyres, of equal size and
construction, capable of operating at inflated pressures upto 850 kN/square metre.
The wheels shall be able to move up and down independently of one another. Wheels
shall be equally spaced along both axle lines and arranged so that tyres on one axle
line tract falls midway between those on the other with an overlap. The tyres shall be
kept inflated to the manufacturers specified operating pressures with variation not
exceeding 36 kN/square metre. Means shall be provided for checking and adjusting
the tyre pressures on the job at all times. For each size and type of tyre used, each
roller shall have charts or tabulations showing the relationship between wheel load,
inflation pressure and tyre contact pressure, width and area. Each roller shall be
equipped with means of adjusting its total weight by ballasting so that the load per
wheel can be varied from 1,500 to 2,500 kilograms. In operation the tyre inflation
pressure and the wheel load shall be adjusted, as required by the Engineer, to meet
the requirements of each particular application in general the compaction of any
course with a pneumatic tyred roller shall be accomplished with contact pressures as
high as the material will support.

(iv) Vibratory Rollers
Generally Vibratory rollers shall be equipped with automatic vibration control which
cuts out the vibratory system before the machine comes to a halt.

The minimum operating weight of the roller shall be 6 tonnes and minimum drum
width 0.9 m, the minimum linear drum applied force 44 KN/m and the minimum
frequency of vibration 33 Hz (200 cycles/min).

k. Joints

Both longitudinal and transverse joints in successive courses shall be staggered so as not to
be one above the other. As far as practicable, longitudinal joints shall be arranged so that
the joints in the top course shall be at the location of the line dividing the traffic lanes, and
the transverse joints shall be staggered at a minimum of 250 mm and be straight.

Longitudinal and transverse joints shall be made in a careful manner so that well bonded
sealed joints are provided for the full depth of the course. No mixture shall be placed against
previously rolled material unless the edge is trimmed vertically to line and the vertical edge
applied with a very thin coating of binder just before additional mix is placed against the
previously compacted material.

Paving shall be as nearly continuous as possible and rollers shall pass over the unprotected
end of freshly laid mix only when authorised by the Engineer. In all such cases provision shall
be made for a properly bonded and sealed joint with the new surface for the full depth of
the course as specified above. Before placing mix against them, all contact surfaces of kerbs,
gutters, manholes, etc., shall be given a thin uniform coating of hot bitumen and the joints
between these structures and the surface mix shall be effectively sealed by the subsequent
spreading, finishing and compaction operations.

l. Miscellaneous Requirements

The Contractor shall provide suitable means for keeping all small tools clean and free from
accumulations of bituminous material. He shall provide and have ready for use at all times
enough tarpaulins or covers, as may be directed by the Engineer, for use in any emergency
such as rain, chilling wind, excessive dust or unavoidable delay, for the purpose of covering
or protecting any material that may have been dumped and not spread. Generally the hot
mix shall be discharged directly from the asphalt delivery trucks into paver receiving hopper
unless the Engineer approves dumping and spreading by hand in difficult areas not accessible
by paver when spreading and compaction shall be carried out promptly at a minimum mix
temperature of 120 degree C.

m. Aftercare

Sections of the newly finished work shall be protected from traffic of any kind until the mix
has sufficiently hardened. Also traffic shall normally, not be permitted over newly laid
surfaces at least for twelve hours after laying or the temperature of the newly laid surfacing
has achieved the ambient temperature.

In the event any binder course is constructed initially the surface so formed shall be
maintained in its finished condition until the surface course is placed thereon, and any
damage caused shall be made good by the contractor. If the damage could be attributed to
the negligence of the contractor is it shall be corrected at his own expense.

n. Surface Finish and Quality Control

The Asphaltic Concrete Surfacings shall be finished to the requirements given in section
1601.

The Contractor on the quality of materials and works shall be exercised in accordance with
section 1602.

a. Measurement

Asphaltic Concrete Surfacings shall be measured by sq.m of mix furnished, spread,
compacted, completed and accepted. Measurements shall be of the areas and thickness as
shown on the Drawings, described in the Specification or instructed by the Engineer.

Deficiencies in thickness of the wearing course shall, unless an overlay is constructed at the
Contractor’s expense, result in a proportion only of the wearing course area being measured
for payment. Proportions shall be determined in accordance with the thickness deficiencies
and area proportions described below.

Thickness of asphaltic concrete wearing course shall be determined by average calliper
measurement of cores, rounded upwards to the nearest mm.

Paved sections to be measured separately shall consist of each 300 lin.m section in each
traffic lane. The last section in each traffic lane shall be 300 m plus the fractional part of 300
m remaining. Other areas such as intersections, entrances, crossovers, ramps, etc. shall be
measured a one section and the thickness of each shall be determined separately. Small
irregular unit areas may be included as part of another section.

One core shall be taken from each section by the Contractor at approved locations and in the
presence of the Engineer. When the measurement of the core from any paved section is not
deficient by more than 5 mm from the specified thickness, the core will be deemed to be of
the specified thickness as shown on the Drawings.

When the measurement of the core from any paved section is deficient by more than 5 mm
but not more than 15 mm, 2 additional cores spaced at not less than 100 m shall be taken
and used together with the first core to determine the average thickness of such section

When the measurement of the core from any paved section is less than the specified
thickness by more than 15 mm, the average thickness of such section shall be determined by
taking additional cores at not less than 5 m intervals parallel to the centreline in each
direction from the affected location until, in each direction, a core is taken which is not
deficient by more than 20 mm. Exploratory cores for deficient thickness will not be used in
average thickness determinations.

Any deficiencies in the total thickness of wearing courses shall be subject to a proportional
reduction in the area of wearing course measured for payment. Alternatively, the Contractor
shall construct all at his own expense, a wearing course overlay, if practicable in the
judgement of the Engineer. Any such overlay shall be a minimum of 40 mm compacted
thickness and to the specified standard of the course it is overlaying.

Where the average total thickness of wearing course is deficient by more than 5 mm but not
more than 20 mm, adjustments shall be made in the area measurements as follows.

Deficiency in Total Thickness of Wearing Courses

Deficiency in Thickness as Proportion of Wearing Course Area
Determined by Cores (mm) Measured for Payment

0.0 to 5.0 100%
5.1 to 10.0 80%
10.1 to 15.0 60%
15.1 to 20.0 40%

b. Payment

Payment for asphaltic concrete surfacing will be made at the contract unit rate for the item
as measured above. The price shall be full compensation for furnishing all materials, for
mixing and placing of the mixed material and for providing all plant, machinery, equipment,
tools, labour and incidentals necessary to complete the work to these specifications.

The Pay Item and Pay Unit will be as follows :‐

Pay Item Pay Unit

506 (1) Asphaltic Concrete Surfacing Wearing Course sq. m.
compacted thickness 50 mm

506 (2) Asphaltic Concrete Surfacing Binder Course sq. m.
compacted thickness 50 mm

507. COLD MIX SURFACINGS
a. Measurement


The Cold mix surfacings shall be measured by the Square metres of material compacted in
place and accepted. Measurement shall be based on the width shown in the cross section
drawings and the actual length measured horizontally along the centreline of the surface of
the road.

b. Payments


The payment for Cold mix surfacing will be based on the contract unit rate for the completed
work of the Cold mix surfacing which shall include full compensation for providing all
materials labour, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to carry out the construction
works in accordance with the specifications.


Pay Item Pay Unit

507(1) Provide and place Cold mix surfacing Sq. Metre

SERIES 600 – UNPAVED ROADS

CONTENTS

601 GRAVELLING OF EARTH ROADS AND REGRAVELLING OF GRAVEL ROADS..................................... 2
601.1. Description......................................................................................................................... 2
601.2. Materials............................................................................................................................ 2
601.3. Mechanical Stabilisation (Blending) .................................................................................... 3
601.4. Construction Requirements ................................................................................................ 3
601.5. Measurement and Payment ............................................................................................... 4

Series 600 – Unpaved Roads Page no: 1 of 4
SERIES 600 – GRAVEL WEARING COURSE

601 GRAVELLING OF EARTH ROADS AND REGRAVELLING OF GRAVEL ROADS

Delete the Heading and replace with:‐

GRAVEL WEARING COURSE
601.1. Description


This work shall consist of the placing and compacting of gravel wearing course on an existing
pavement or prepared subgrade in accordance with lines, levels, grades, dimensions and cross
sections shown on the drawings and as instructed by the Engineer.
601.2. Materials


The material for gravel wearing course shall be obtained from sources located by the contractor and
approved by the Engineer or from existing pavement layers. The material used shall be aggregate, as
dug soils, or material obtained by blending two or more soils or soil / sand mixes referred to as
mechanical stabilisation.

The Contractor’s attention is drawn to the scarcity of naturally occurring gravel and shall make due
allowance for mixing of materials in mechanical stabilisation in accordance with Section 601.3 below.

The material for gravel wearing course shall have the following characteristics :‐

SL Properties Test Method Sub‐base
No. AASHTO
1. Liquid Limit (LL) not to exceed (%) T89 40
2. Plasticity Index (PI) not to exceed T90 12
(%)
3. Plasticity Product (PP) (PI x % 240
passing 0.075) not to exceed
4. Maximum Dry Density not less T180/Bs1377. 1750
than (kg/m3) Test 14
5. 4 ‐ days Soaked CBR at 98% MDD T193 30
not less than (%)

Materials of slightly higher values of PI and LL may be allowed at the discretion of the Engineer if the
plasticity product does not exceed 240.


Grading Requirements for Sub‐base Material :‐

The grading of the material shall be a smooth curve within and approximately parallel to the grading
envelope given below:

Sieve Size (mm) % Passing
37.5 100
20 80 – 100
10 55 ‐ 80
5 40 –60
2.36 30 – 50
0.425 15 ‐ 30
0.075 5 – 15

The Contractor shall make due allowance for mixing of materials in mechanical stabilisation when
necessary.

601.3. Mechanical Stabilisation (Blending)

No change.
a. Minimum Thickness of Gravel Wearing Course


The minimum thickness of gravel wearing surface shall be 100mm, unless otherwise specified.
b. Preparation of Existing Surface

No change.
c. Placing and Compaction of Gravel


Gravel wearing course material shall be spread by means of graders or other equipment or by manual
spreading as approved by the Engineer. Gravel wearing course material shall be compacted by means
of self‐propelled or towed steel wheeled rollers which are capable of achieving the density
requirements stipulated in this Clause. Water shall be applied by means of equipment which is
capable of distributing the applied water uniformly over the surface of the layer. The gravel wearing
course and gravel shoulder material shall be crushed and/or screened at source to remove all oversize
material. The material shall be transported in such a way, that no segregation occurs. The material
shall be spread in layers to achieve the specified thickness requirement.

Prior to compaction, the moisture content of the spread material shall be adjusted as necessary either
by the uniform application of water or drying out, to achieve within ‐1% to +2% of the optimum
moisture content when determined in accordance with by BS1377, Test 13 (Modified) or AASHTO T‐
180.

The material shall be compacted by the use of approved rollers progressing gradually from the outside
towards the centre of the layer, except on superelevated curves, where the rolling shall begin at the
low side and progress to the high side. Each succeeding pass shall overlap the previous pass by at least
one third of the roller width. Rolling shall continue until the entire thickness of each layer is thoroughly
and uniformly compacted to the specified density. Any area, which is inaccessible to rolling
equipment, shall be compacted by means of mechanical tampers or other equipment approved by the
Engineer. Upon completion of compaction, the surface of the completed layer shall be tightly bound,
free from movement under the compaction plant, and free from laminations, ridges, cracks or loose or
segregated material.
The in‐situ density of the completed layer shall not be less than 95% of the maximum dry density when
determined in accordance with the requirements of BS1377, Test 13 (Modified) or AASHTO T‐180
method D. The dry density shall be determined in accordance with the requirements of AASHTO T‐190.
Alternatively, if approved by the Engineer/Supervisor, the dry density may be determined by use of a
nuclear densometer which shall be accurately calibrated before use, and at intervals thereafter,
against results obtained in accordance with AASHTO T‐190.

d. Surface Finish and Quality Control

No Change.


The Gravel wearing course shall be measured as finished and accepted work in position in Cubic
metres. Volume measurements shall be based on cross section drawings and the actual length
measured parallel to the grade line of the road

Payments


The payment for Gravel wearing course will be based on the contract unit rate for the completed work
of the Gravel wearing course which shall include full compensation for providing all materials labour,
tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to carry out the construction works in accordance with the
specifications.



401(1) Provide and place Gravel wearing course Cu. Metre
SERIES 700 ‐ DRAINAGE CONSTRUCTION

CONTENTS

701. ROADSIDE AND LEADAWAY SURFACE DRAINS.................................................................2
701.1. Description .................................................................................................................2
701.2. Materials ....................................................................................................................2
701.3. Construction Requirements. .......................................................................................2
701.4. Measurement & Payment. ..........................................................................................3
702. SUB SURFACE DRAINS (UNDERDRAINS) ...........................................................................4
702.1. Description .................................................................................................................4
702.2. Materials ....................................................................................................................4
703. MANHOLES, CATCHPITS AND INLETS ...............................................................................5
703.1. Description .................................................................................................................5
703.2. Materials ....................................................................................................................5
703.4. Grade Adjustment of Existing Structures .....................................................................5
704. UNDERGROUND PIPE DRAINS .........................................................................................6
705. DRAINAGE BACKFILL BEHIND EARTH RETAINING STRUCTURES ........................................6

705.1. Description .................................................................................................................6
705.2. Materials ....................................................................................................................6
706. WEEP HOLES FOR EARTH RETAINING STRUCTURES ..........................................................8
706.1. Description .................................................................................................................8
706.2. Materials ....................................................................................................................8
707. PIPE CULVERTS................................................................................................................8
707.1. Description .................................................................................................................8
707.2. Materials ....................................................................................................................9
707.4. Jointing..................................................................................................................... 11
707.5. Backfilling ................................................................................................................. 11
707.6. Headwalls, Wingwalls, and other ancillary works ...................................................... 11
707.7. Measurement and Payment...................................................................................... 11

Series 700 –Drainage Construction Page no: 1 of 12
SERIES 700 ‐ DRAINAGE CONSTRUCTION

701. ROADSIDE AND LEADAWAY SURFACE DRAINS
701.1. Description

Delete sub section and substitute the following :‐

This work shall consist of the construction of roadside and leadaway surface drains, unlined
or lined and covered where required, to dimensions grades and in positions shown in the
Drawings or instructed by the Engineer.
701.2. Materials

Add at the end of the sub section :‐

(e) The cover slabs shall be precast and meet the requirements of section 1705.
701.3. Construction Requirements.
a. Cutting and Formation of Earth Drains

Add at the end of the paragraph one :‐

The excavation shall be carried out as section 301A.
b. Lined Drains

Delete paragraphs 2 to 4 and substitute the following :‐

Where the lining is of precast sections, they shall be of A or B class concrete of Grade 20/20
or Grade 20/40, laid on a prepared bed to line and level. Unless otherwise instructed, the
joints shall be filled using 1:3 cement mortar.

Insitu construction with concrete (A or B class concrete of Grade 20/20 or 20/40), R.R
masonry or brick or block work shall be carried out as given in the Drawings and with the
requirements of section1006 & 1007 or as instructed by the Engineer. Where specified, or
where found necessary, they shall be surface lined with 1:3 cement mortar with neat cement
finishing. Bricks, blocks or other material used shall be subject to the approval of the
Engineer.

Rubble paving with mortar jointing, where specified, shall be carried out using selected
rubble, hammer dressed as necessary, to ensure proper embankment of the rubble and also
to obtain a reasonable smoothness to the surface finish after the jointing with 1:3 cement
mortar is completed.

Add at the end of the sub section :‐
c. Cover slabs

Where it is required for the lined drains to be covered, unless otherwise instructed, the slabs
shall be of precast concrete of Class A or B of grade 25/20, and reinforced as indicated in the
Drawings.
701.4. Measurement & Payment.
a. Measurement.

Delete paragraph one and substitute the following :‐

The excavation for lined and unlined drains shall be measured and paid as provided in
section 301A. The quoted rates shall include cost of formwork, reinforcement. Plastering
with neat cement smooth finishing shall be measured separately.
b. Payment.

Delete Pay Items and Pay Units and substitute the following :‐


701(1) Lining of Drains with precast units,
class A or B 20/40 concrete units Ln. metre

701(2) Precast reinforced Cover Slabs 75 mm
thick, with class A or B 25/20 concrete Sq. metre



701(5) Lining of Drains with Insitu class A or B
Grade 20 unreinforced concrete Cu. Metre

701(6) Lining of Drains with Insitu class A or B
20 reinforced concrete Cu. Metre

701(7) Lining of Drains with R.R. Masonry Cu. Metre

701(8) Lining of Drains with Brick Masonry Cu. Metre

701(9) Lining of Drains with Block Masonry Cu. metre

701(10) Rubble Paving in Drains Sq. metre

701(11) Plastering Sq. metre

702. SUB SURFACE DRAINS (UNDERDRAINS)
702.1. Description

No change.
702.2. Materials

(a) Delete paragraph two and substitute the following :‐

Unless otherwise instructed, the perforated pipe to be installed shall be of 150 mm diameter
PVC pipe, at least 4 mm thick. The pipe shall be drilled with 4 rows of 8 mm diameter holes
at 150mm centres on the bottom half of the perimeter of the pipe as shown on the
Drawings.

(a) Underdrains


The permeable material shall be laid and lightly compacted in layers not exceeding 300mm.
Care shall be taken to prevent the contamination of permeable material during construction
of the subsurface drains and all permeable material contaminated by soil or silt or other
deleterious material shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his own expense.

Where specified or ordered by the Engineer, geofabric filter as specified in Section 1710 shall
be installed as shown on the Drawings. Filter fabric shall not be exposed to direct sunlight
for prolonged periods and shall be protected from mechanical damage during installation
and construction.
a. Measurement

The rate for filter fabric shall include full compensation for furnishing, procuring, cutting,
overlap, jointing, placing and protecting the fabric as specified as well as for wastage.
b. Payment

Pay Item Pay Unit

702(3) Provide and place filter fabric Sq. metre

703. MANHOLES, CATCHPITS AND INLETS
703.1. Description

No change
703.2. Materials

Delete the first paragraph and substitute the following :‐

Concrete for precast units or for insitu construction shall be A or B class, and of grade 20/20.
Materials for rubble and brick or block masonry shall be as specified in section 1006 & 1007
respectively.

Delete paragraphs 3 to 5 and substitute the following :‐

Precast units, reinforced or unreinforced, shall be manufactured using concrete of Class A or
B and of grade 20/20 unless specified in the drawings. The installations of precast units shall
be to required lines and on prepared beds of approved soils, concrete or any other material
as indicated in the Drawings or as instructed by the Engineer.

Insitu construction of catchpits and manholes shall be carried out using concrete, rubble
masonry, brick masonry, or block masonry, as specified or instructed on site. The concrete
used shall be of Class A or B and of grade 20/40 unless specified in drawings . Rubble
masonry, brick or block masonry shall conform to the requirements of section 1006 and 1007
respectively,

Insitu construction of inlets shall be carried out using concrete of Class A or B and of grade
20/20.
703.4. Grade Adjustment of Existing Structures
No change.
a. Measurement
No change.
b. Payment


703(1) Manholes cast insitu, concrete Number
703(2) Manholes rubble masonry Number
703(3) Manholes brick masonry Number
703(4) Manholes block masonry Number

703(5) Concrete Manhole reconstructed Number
703(6) Rubble Manholes reconstructed Number
703(7) Brick Manholes reconstructed Number

703(8) Block Manholes reconstructed Number

703(9) Catchpits cast insitu, concrete Number
703(10) Catchpits rubble masonry Number
703(11) Catchpits brick masonry Number
703(12) Catchpits block masonry Number

703(13) Inlets cast insitu, concrete Number

704. UNDERGROUND PIPE DRAINS

No change.
705. DRAINAGE BACKFILL BEHIND EARTH RETAINING STRUCTURES
705.1. Description

No change.
705.2. Materials
a. Aggregate backfill

No Change
b. Filter Medium

Delete the second paragraph and substitute the following :‐

The back of abutment, wing wall, return wall shall be provided with a vertical layer of
granular fill material about 1m thick to serve as a filter media.

Filter shall consist of sound gravel stone, Over Burnt brick ballast and coarse sand and shall
require the Engineers approval prior to use.

The filter material shall be well compacted to a firm condition and constructed along with
selected granular fill materials. The small size materials shall be placed towards soil and
bigger size towards the wall and provided over the entire surface behind walls to the full
height.

Selected Granular Fill Materials

Granular materials to be used for backfilling and bedding underneath foundation for box
culvert shall be granular materials equivalent to subbase standards, Section 400 of this
specification. The extent of granular filling shall be as shown in the drawing or as directed by
the Engineer.

The aggregate and filter medium shall be free of organic material, clay or other materials
which will adversely affect the free drainage of water.

Delete paragraph 2 and 3 and substitute the following :‐

Back filling with filter material shall be done with approved material after concrete or
masonry is fully set and carried out in such a way as not to cause undue thrust on any part of
the structure. All space between foundation masonry or concrete and the sides of
excavation shall be refilled to the original surface making due allowance for settlement in
150mm loose layers each of which shall be compacted to the Engineer’s approval.

The fill materials behind the structure and foundation shall be laid in layers simultaneously
with the laying of filter media on each side of structure and the compaction shall be done
with mechanical tampers or any other methods as approved by the Engineer to avoid
displacement and unequal pressure on the structure.

Construction of embankment shall be suspended at such points to be determined by the
Engineer from where embankment shall form approaches. Filling behind the structures
forming a part of approaches shall be carried out on completion of the work on the main
embankment. In no case there shall there be any interference of construction of abutments,
wings return walls with that of embankment.

The sequence of filling behind abutments wing walls and return walls shall be so controlled
that the assumptions made in the design are fulfilled as indicated in the relevant drawings.
For example, if the earth pressure in front of the abutment is assumed in the design, the
front filling shall also be done simultaneously along with the filling behind abutment, layers
by layers and in case the filling behind abutment before placing the superstructures is
considered not desirable, the filling behind abutment should be deferred to a later date.
Wedging action against structures shall be prevented by taking special precautions and the
slopes bounding the excavation for the structure shall be stepped or serrated to prevent
such wedging action. Adequate numbers of weep holes as per specification Clause No. 3.12
of specification shall be provided to prevent any accumulation of water and build up of
hydrostatic pressure behind the walls.

a. Measurement

Delete and substitute the following :‐

Mode of measurement for filter and bedding material shall be in cubic metre of compacted
volume as shown in drawing or as instructed by the Engineer
b. Payment


Unit rate shall include cost of materials, labour and tools and plants, compaction, testing and
all as specified to complete the work, and shall include the cost of any necessary excavation
of unsuitable material.

Pay Item Pay Unit

705(1) Excavating, as necessary, providing,
placing and compacting approved
granular materials beneath floor slabs
of culverts as per drawings and Section
705 of specification. Cubic Metre

705(2) Providing, laying granular filler back
filling behind abutment and behind
wing walls for Box Culvert including
compaction all complete as per
Section 705 of specification. Cubic Metre

705(3) Providing and filling selected granular
filler materials behind abutments and
behind retaining walls in layers as per
the drawings and specification and
direction of the Engineer. Cubic Metre

706. WEEP HOLES FOR EARTH RETAINING STRUCTURES
706.1. Description

No change.
706.2. Materials

Delete paragraph 1 and substitute the following :‐

Unless otherwise instructed, the pipes shall made of PVC of 75 mm inside diameter.

No change
a. Measurement

No change
b. Payment



706(1) Weepholes using 75 mm dia. PVC pipes Ln. Metre

706(2) Weepholes 75 mm dia. cast insitu Ln. Metre

707. PIPE CULVERTS
707.1. Description


This work shall consist of supplying, jointing, bedding of reinforced concrete pipes of the
required type, diameter and length in the construction of culverts. The scope of work
includes the construction of new culverts, and the extension and modification of existing
drainage structures.

The work also includes the construction of headwalls, wingwalls, aprons, catchpits and other
ancillary items necessary for completion. All work shall be carried out to lines and levels and
dimensions shown in Drawings or as instructed by the Engineer.
707.2. Materials

Delete paragraph 1 &2 and substitute the following :‐

Materials for pipe culverts shall be:

Insert after (c) :‐

(d) Concrete for pipe bedding of class A or B, as instructed by the Engineer or as specified in
the Drawings.
a. Excavation

Add the following at the beginning of this sub‐section:‐

The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to safeguard the stability of all trench
excavations and ensure that the safety of no person shall be placed in jeopardy.

Surface drainage shall be controlled by the construction of temporary earth berms and
drainage channels to prevent storm water from entering the working area. No separate
payment shall be made for such temporary drainage measures.

The amount by which the excavation is to exceed the proposed level of the invert of the
culvert shall be sufficient to allow for the type and thickness of bedding material to be placed
as specified or as shown on the Drawings.

The width of excavation shall be equal to the nominal internal diameter of the pipe plus
0.5m on each side. Where pipe culverts consist of two or more pipes next to each other the
minimum spacing between each pipe shall be 300mm or half the outside pipe diameter
whichever is the greater, up to a maximum of 900mm.

Delete paragraph 4 and substitute the following two paragraphs:‐

Where rock or other unyielding material is encountered it shall be removed below the
foundation level for a depth of 0.3 m, or 0.04 m for each metre of fill over the top of the pipe
whichever is greater, but not to exceed 0.75 of the inside diameter of the pipe.

Where the soil encountered at the designed grade is unstable, soft or spongy such material
under the pipe and for a width of 0.5m on each side of the pipe, shall be removed to a depth
instructed by the Engineer, and replaced by sand or other selected material as instructed by
the Engineer to provide an adequate support for the pipe. When instructed by the Engineer,
the Contractor shall construct a blinding layer of concrete to provide a suitable working floor.
b. Bedding of Pipes

Add the following at the beginning of this sub‐clause :‐

Construction of culverts shall begin at one end, the position of which shall be fixed as shown
on the Drawings or as instructed by the Engineer. The position of the other end of the
culvert shall normally be determined by the end of the last whole unit, the top of which
breaks through the fill slope. However, in the case of skew culverts or culverts with a cover
less than 0.5m at the shoulder, the Engineer may instruct that the end unit be cut to the
length and skew required.

Any units which deform or crack, or which are not constructed to the required lines, levels
and grades, or which become displaced in the process of work or during the Defects Liability
Period, shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his own expense.

Precast units shall be lifted and handled by means of approved lifting devices/methods only.
Lifting eyes shall be caulked with a suitable mortar after the units have been installed.

The Contractor shall exercise due care not to damage, overstress or displace any
prefabricated culvert with his own traffic or compaction equipment and shall provide
additional cover over the culverts to ensure that the culvert is adequately protected from
Site equipment.

Where culverts are constructed on gradients exceeding 1 in 4 particular care shall be taken
to protect excavations against storm water damage and the trenches shall be excavated to
firm ground. The trenches shall be backfilled with selected gravel or concrete if it is
necessary to over‐excavate in order to obtain a firm floor.

After first completing the outlet structure, the culvert units shall be laid in the normal
manner, starting from the lower end and placing successive units firmly against each other to
prevent subsequent movement. The lowest unit shall be securely cast into the outlet
structure and thrust and anchor blocks shall be constructed as required according to the
Drawings.

Backfilling of trenches or around the pipes shall begin at the lower end and be carried out in
horizontal layers.

(I) Concrete Bedding


The pipe shall be bedded in a continuous cradle of class A or B concrete of grade 20/40
having a minimum thickness of 0.25 times the external diameter of the pipe or 200 mm
which ever is greater. The concrete shall extend up the sides of the pipes to a height of at
least 10 % the external diameter or 200 mm which ever is the greater. The minimum width
of the cradle shall be the external diameter of the pipe plus 0.25 times the external diameter
on either side and shall be constructed monolithically without horizontal construction joints.
The cradle shall be such that the pipe can be seated fully in it and the pipe shall be laid on
the concrete bedding before the concrete is set.

Where shown on the Drawings or instructed by the Engineer pipes shall be fully encased in
class A or B concrete of grade 20/40 (reinforced or un reinforced) of minimum thickness
200mm. Temporary supports shall be provided near the pipe ends to support the pipes
during the placing of the concrete. The concrete shall be placed in such a way that all spaces
under the pipe are completely filled. Poker vibrators shall be used to ensure that all spaces
under and around the pipe are properly filled with concrete. Concrete casing shall be cast in
one continuous operation until completed.

(II) Granular Bedding


Granular bedding when required shall be provided by bedding the pipe in a trench of depth
0.1 m plus 0.3 times the external diameter of the pipe. The granular bedding shall be sand or
any other selected fill and shall be accurately shaped by a template to fit the lower part of
the pipe. The selected granular bedding shall surround the pipe up to a height of 0.1 m
above the top of the pipe. In appropriate circumstances the Engineer may permit
compaction of sand bedding by hydraulic compaction (flooding) subject to approval of trials
carried out by the Contractor.
707.4. Jointing

Add the following at the beginning of this sub‐clause:‐

Where partial demolition is required for extension work to existing structures, the contact
face shall be cut to predetermined lines and levels, loose and fragmented material removed
and projecting steel cleaned and bent or cut as instructed by the Engineer. Where no partial
demolition but only extension is required, the contact area shall be roughened and cleaned
of all dirt and loose particles.
Where dowels are required they shall be installed with an approved type of epoxy‐resin
grout in holes drilled into the existing structure in accordance with details shown on the
Drawings.
New concrete shall be bonded to the old concrete by using a cement paste or slurry or an
approved type of bonding agent.

707.5. Backfilling


The material used for the backfilling of those portions of culverts subject to traffic loads shall
be selected material of at least subbase quality or such lower quality as the Engineer may
permit.

The backfilling material shall be thoroughly tamped in under the flanks of the culverts to
provide uniform bedding to the Engineer’s satisfaction. Adequate cover over the culvert
shall be provided before the contractor routes his construction equipment across it.
Hydraulic compaction of backfilling may be permitted in appropriate circumstances after
successful trials.
707.6. Headwalls, Wingwalls, and other ancillary works

No change.
a. Measurement

Delete Paragraph 1 and substitute the following :‐

Concrete for bedding, encasement and granular aggregate bedding shall be measured in
cubic metres of material laid and compacted. The rate shall include shuttering if required.
Payment for shaping and compacting of stable in‐situ bedding material shall be per linear
metre of culvert length.
Reinforcement steel shall be paid by weight

b. Payment



707(1) Concrete Bedding/Cradle Cu. Metre
707(2) Granular Bedding Cu. Metre
707(3) Concrete to Encasement Cu. Metre
707(4) Reinforcement Steel to concrete encasement kg
707(5) In‐situ Bedding material Cu. Metre

707(6) Reinforced concrete pipe 600mm Dia Ln. Metre
707(10)Excavation in unclassified suitable material
and backfill to structures Cu. metre
707(11)Excavation in hard rock
and backfill to structuresCu. metre
707(12)Excavation in unsuitable material
and backfill to structuresCu. Metre
SERIES 800 ‐ INCIDENTAL CONSTRUCTIONS

CONTENTS

801 TOPSOILING ........................................................................................................3
801.1 Description ..................................................................................................3
801.2 Materials .....................................................................................................3
801.3 Construction Methods..................................................................................3
801.4 Measurement and Payment..........................................................................3
802 GRASSING...........................................................................................................4
802.1 Description ..................................................................................................4
802.2 Materials .....................................................................................................4
802.3 Construction Requirements ..........................................................................4
803 PLANTING TREES SHRUBS VINES ETC. ...................................................................5
804 RIP RAP PROTECTION FOR EMBANKMENTS SLOPES...............................................6
804.1 Description ..................................................................................................6
804.2 Materials .....................................................................................................6
805 GABION WALLS ...................................................................................................6
805.1 Description ..................................................................................................6
805.2 Materials .....................................................................................................6
806 PAVED SIDE WALKS .............................................................................................8
806.1 Description ..................................................................................................8
806.2 Materials .....................................................................................................8
807 PRECAST CONCRETE KERBS AND CHANNELS..........................................................9
807.1 Description ..................................................................................................9
807.2 Materials .....................................................................................................9
808 GUARD RAILS AND WALLS, GUARD STONES, AND GUIDE POSTS ...........................10
808.1 Description ................................................................................................10
808.2 Materials ...................................................................................................10
808.3 Construction Requirements ........................................................................10
808.4 Measurement and Payment........................................................................12
809 FENCING ...........................................................................................................12
810 ROAD MARKINGS ..............................................................................................12

810.1 Description ................................................................................................12
Series 800 – Incidental Constructions Page no: 1 of 29
810.2 Materials ...................................................................................................12

811 ROAD SIGNS......................................................................................................14
811.1 Description ................................................................................................14
811.2 Materials ...................................................................................................14
812 BUS BAYS..........................................................................................................15
812.1 Description ................................................................................................15
812.2 Materials ...................................................................................................15
813 CONCRETE KERB INLETS .....................................................................................16
813.1 Description ................................................................................................16
813.2 Materials ...................................................................................................16
814 HNADRAILS, UPRIGHTS AND END PILASTERS.......................................................16
814.1 Description ................................................................................................16
814.2 Materials ...................................................................................................17
815.3 Measurement and Payment .............................................................................27

SERIES 800 ‐ INCIDENTAL CONSTRUCTIONS
801 TOPSOILING
801.1 Description


This work shall consist of supply of topsoil furnished and transported from approved sources
or stockpiles and spread in conformity with these specifications at locations shown on
Drawings or as instructed by the Engineer. Generally where topsoil is stockpiled adjacent to
the Works, embankment slopes shall be topsoiled in accordance with the Engineer’s
instructions.
801.2 Materials

No change.
801.3 Construction Methods

Add to paragraph 2 :‐

Where ordered by the Engineer the area to be top soiled shall be roughened by hand
scarifying, or by any other means approved by the Engineer; to ensure the stability of the
topsoil on the area.


After the Engineer has approved the prepared and graded areas, topsoil shall be spread to a
depth which after settlement shall not be less than 75 mm or as instructed by the Engineer.
Spreading shall not be done when the ground or the topsoil is excessively wet or in a
condition considered detrimental to the work. The topsoil layer shall be levelled off and
raked.

Delete subsection and substitute the following :‐
a. Measurement

The quantities to be paid for shall be the number of square metres of topsoil of 100 mm
loose thickness completed in place and accepted.
b. Payment

The quantities of topsoil will be paid for at the contract unit price which shall be full
compensation for transporting from stockpile and spreading material to the required
thickness, levelling it off to a smooth surface, for removing any stones as specified, and for
roughening the surface to be top soiled and shall including all labour equipment tools and
incidentals necessary to complete the work.

Pay items and Pay Units will be as follows.

801(1) Topsoil spread supplied from
Stock piles (Excavated topsoil) Sq. metre
802 GRASSING
802.1 Description

No change.
802.2 Materials


c. Grass Sods

Grass sods shall be free from noxious weeds and diseases and shall contain a minimum of
50mm of topsoil.

d. Fertilizer

The type of fertilizer to be used shall be one or more of the following and/or any other
fertilizer as ordered or approved by the Engineer :‐

i) Agricultural Lime
ii) Super Phosphate
iii) Limestone ammonium‐nitrate

The Contractor shall have the top 150mm of the prepared surfaces tested to determine the
amount and type of fertilizer required for establishing proper growth conditions for the
grass. The fertilizer shall be evenly applied over all surfaces where grass is to be planted and
shall then be thoroughly mixed with the soil to a depth of 150mm either mechanically or
manually.
802.3 Construction Requirements


Seeding shall be done just before or during the rainy season or as instructed by the Engineer.
The method of seeding and application of fertiliser, water and mulch shall be subject to the
approval of the Engineer.


Sodding shall be done just before or during the rainy season or as instructed by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer not less than 7 days before cutting of sods begin.
Sods will be approved by the Engineer, in its original position before cutting and delivery to
site. Areas to be sodded shall be given a layer of topsoil 75mm thick unless, due to the
presence of suitable subsoil, the Engineer orders that the topsoil be omitted.

The areas to be sodded shall be thoroughly watered beforehand so that they are wet to a
depth of at least 150mm when sodding is to be done.

At the end of paragraph add the following :‐

On side slopes steeper than 2 to 1, the laying of sods shall be started from bottom to
upwards.

At points where water may flow over a sodded area, the upper edges of the sod strips shall
be turned into the soil below the adjacent area and a layer of earth placed over this followed
by its thorough compaction.

Delete last paragraph and substitute the following :‐

Where the side slope is 2 to 1 or steeper and the distance along the slope is more than 2
metres, the sods shall be staked with pegs or nails spaced approximately 500 to 1000 mm
along the longitudinal axis of the sod strips. Stakes shall be driven approximately plumb
through the sods to be almost flush with them.

After the sods have been laid in position, the surface shall be cleaned of loose sod, excess
soil and other foreign material. Thereafter a thin layer of top soil shall be scattered over the
surface of top dressing and the area thoroughly moistened by sprinkling with water.

The sods shall be watered by the Contractor for a period of at least four weeks after laying.
Watering shall be so done as to avoid erosion and prevent damage to sodded areas by
wheels of water tanks.

The Contractor shall erect necessary warning signs and barriers, repair or replace sodded
areas failing to show uniform growth of grass or damaged by his operations and shall
otherwise maintain the sod at his cost until final acceptance.

a. Measurement
No Change.
b. Payment


Payment shall include for pre‐watering and watering the sods, replanting dead areas and for
the supply and placing of timber stakes and for all other incidentals that may be required to
establish an acceptable cover and to maintain the grass.

Delete Pay Item No. 3 and substitute the following :‐


802(1) Sodding (Solid) Sq. metre
802(2) Furnish and apply fertilizer Prov. Sum

803 PLANTING TREES SHRUBS VINES ETC.

No Change.
804 RIP RAP PROTECTION FOR EMBANKMENTS SLOPES
804.1 Description

No change.
804.2 Materials
a. Dumped Rip Rap

Delete this paragraph and substitute the following :‐

‘Stone used for dumped rip‐rap shall be hard, durable, angular in shape and resistant to
weathering and water action. Rounded stones and broken concrete will not be acceptable.
The stone shall be at least 500mm in maximum dimension and more than 100mm minimum
dimension and be well graded between these two limiting dimensions’.

805 GABION WALLS
805.1 Description


This section covers the construction of gabion walls, mattresses and aprons for the
construction of retaining walls, lining of channels, revetments and other anti‐erosion
structures.
Generally gabions shall be flexible, galvanised steel wire mesh cages packed with rock.
805.2 Materials


Unless otherwise specified the material used shall meet the following requirements.

(a) Double twisted hexagonal mesh made of zinc coated mild steel conforming to BS
1052/1980, BS 443/1982
(b) Binding and connecting wire of 3.0 mm diameter galvanised to the same standard
as the mesh wire
(c) Broken rock for filling baskets shall preferably be of sizes normally varying from
about 100 mm in minimum dimension to 300 mm in maximum dimension and they
shall be clean, hard and durable, free from weathered pieces and extraneous
matter. The rock shall be well graded between the two limiting sizes
(d) Where indicated on the Drawings or ordered by the Engineer, a layer of filter fabric,
or approved equivalent material shall be placed on the prepared surface prior to
the placing of the gabions. The material shall be placed as instructed in vertical
strips with a minimum overlap of 300mm and shall be properly fastened to prevent
any movement or slipping during the placing of gabions


In the second paragraph delete : “or rubble masonry”

Delete paragraph 3 and substitute the following.

The concrete shall be of class C grade 15/40 for unreinforced base layer and class B grade
20/20 for reinforced base layer.

To the end of paragraph 4 add the following :‐

Baskets shall, where appropriate, be maintained square and with vertical sides during filling.
Internal tie wires shall be inserted and baskets shall be tensioned.


The wire baskets for gabions shall be made out of double twisted hexagonal mesh. The
width of gabion boxes will be 1‐2 metres or as instructed by the Engineer. The length shall
be multiples of one metre subject to a maximum of 4.0 m. The gabions will have diaphragm
walls at 1.0 m intervals.

The general specifications of gabions area follows :‐

Thickness Mesh type Wire Dia. Stone size D50
(mm) (cmxcm) (mm) (mm) (mm)

500 10 x 12 2.70 120 ‐ 250 190
1000 10 x 12 2.70 120 ‐ 250 190


Mattresses, which are generally only used as single layer aprons in revetments or at the
entrance or exit to culverts to prevent scour and minimise erosion, shall be sub‐divided by
diaphragms into cells having a width of 600 mm or 1.0m as specified or instructed by the
Engineer.

The cut edges of all mesh used in the construction of gabions, except the bottom edge of
diaphragms and end panels, shall be selvedged with galvanised wire having a diameter of at
least 0.5 mm more than that of the mesh wire.
The diaphragms and end panels shall be selvedged on the top and vertical sides only.

Sufficient binding and connecting wire shall be supplied with the gabion cages to perform
the wiring operations in accordance to these specifications. The diameter of the wire shall
be at least 3.2mm.

The methods of assembly shall be in accordance with the manufacturers instructions but the
Contractor shall ensure that sufficient connecting wire braces are provided to prevent
deformation of the cages as they are being filled with stone.
It is essential that the corners of the gabion cages be securely wired together to provide a
uniform surface and to ensure that the structure does not appear as a series of blocks or
panels.

Particular care shall be exercised in filling visible faces of gabion boxes, for which only
selected stone of adequate size shall be used and be so prepacked that a fair faced finish is
obtained. The filling of boxes shall be done in stages in order to prevent deformation and
bulging.

The filling of mattresses shall be carried out by spreading random stones on the first layer
and using selected stones for the top layer so as to present a dry stone‐pitched surface.
a. Measurement

Delete paragraph 2
b. Payment

Delete pay item 805(2)

806 PAVED SIDE WALKS
806.1 Description

No Change.
806.2 Materials

Delete (b) and substitute the following :‐

(b) Bed course material shall consist of sand, gravel, crushed stone or other approved
granular material of 10 mm maximum size.


Delete (c) and substitute the following :‐

The precast concrete slabs as indicated in Drawings shall be laid to line and level on a
prepared bed course material. The bed course material shall be spread and uniformly
compacted on an approved solid foundation to a thickness of not less than 50 mm. Unless
otherwise instructed by the Engineer, the slabs shall be laid side by side to a close fit and the
joints filled with fine sand or crusher dust.
a. Measurement

No Change
b. Payment

Delete Pay Items and substitute the following.


806(1) Paving (precast concrete slabs) Sq. metre

806(2) Bed course material 50mm thick Sq. Metre
807 PRECAST CONCRETE KERBS AND CHANNELS
807.1 Description

No Change.
807.2 Materials


Concrete for precast or cast in place units and concrete for kerbs shall be of Class A or B of
grade 20/20 in accordance with Section 1001.

The other material used shall meet the requirements of the following, unless otherwise
specified :‐

(a) Reinforcement steel to SLS 375 or CS 26
granular material of 10 mm maximum size
(c) Cement mortar for jointing to sub section 1703.2
a. Precast Concrete Units

Delete paragraph 3 & 4 and substitute the following :‐

Where precast kerbs without the channel sections are to be used, they shall be laid over a
concrete bed, 275 mm wide and of minimum thickness of 100 mm, of grade 15/40 as
indicated in the Drawings. The kerb units are to be laid so that the face and the top lines
conform to the lines and grades indicate in the Drawings. Unless otherwise instructed by the
Engineer the joint spacings between kerb units shall be set approximately to a uniform width
of 12 mm which shall be filled with 1:3 cement mortar, thoroughly rammed and troweled to
a neat finish.
a. Measurement

No Change
b. Payment
Delete Pay Items and substitute the following.


807(1) New Kerbs (precast concrete) Ln. metre
807(2) Reset kerbs (pre‐cast concrete) Ln. metre

808 GUARD RAILS AND WALLS, GUARD STONES, AND GUIDE POSTS
808.1 Description

No Change.
808.2 Materials


(g) Steel railway lines salvaged from railway stores or RDA stores.
a. Guard Rails

Delete paragraph 2 & 3 and substitute the following :‐

Concrete posts shall be of rectangular type with size of 150 x 100 and shape as shown on the
drawing or as directed by the Engineer. Concrete shall be of grade 30 and shall comply with
the specification for structural concrete work. No materials other than the essential
ingredients i.e. cement, aggregates and water, shall ordinarily be used in the manufacture of
concrete. Reinforcement shall be mild steel bars and clean, free from loose rust, loose mill
scale, and foreign coating. Bending of bars shall be done as per drawing and in a manner that
will not injure the material. Shuttering shall be of dressed softwood timber or steel plain
sheets with true surfaces and edges, mortar tight and stoutly braced together. And or Timber
Posts, pre‐treated with creosote or similar protective coating approved by the Engineer, of
size 150 x 100 shall be set vertically in concrete footings of grade 15/40 at intervals of 1.5 m
apart.

Railings made from galvanised steel of thickness not less than 8 gauge, in corrugated shape
corresponding exactly with the dimensions of sections manufactured by ARMCO or similar
proprietary manufacturers, shall be fixed on posts as indicated in Drawings in a manner that
will result in smooth continuous tight rail closely conforming to the line and grade of the
highway or as indicated in the Drawings. Laps in railings shall be parallel to the direction of
flow of traffic. All cut edges shall be shop painted with approved galvanised paint using two
coats.

The holes for the posts shall be or sufficient size to permit proper setting of the posts and to
allow sufficient room for backfilling and tamping.

The holes shall be spaced to suit the standard length of guardrail supplied.

The guardrail complete shall be erected true to line and level and the holes shall be backfilled
with a 12:1 mixture of soil:cement only after the Engineer has signified his approval. When
the backfilling is complete and the bracing removed the posts must be rigid and vertical and
the guardrail true to line and level and firmly fastened to the posts. Excess material shall be
disposed of as instructed by the Engineer.

At locations instructed by the Engineer adjacent to long sheer drops on the outside of bends
the Contractor shall erect steel railway‐line guard rail on posts at the same height and at the
same centres as for galvanised steel guard rail. Posts shall be erected rigidly in concrete.
Steel railway lines shall be bent to the road curvature joined using purpose made plates
solidly bolted.
b. Guard Walls and Guard Stones


Guard walls shall be reinforced concrete precast or cast insitu to dimensions given in
Drawings. Guard stones shall be either reinforced concrete or cast in‐situ concrete or stone
masonry all as shown on the Drawings and/or as ordered by the Engineer. The concrete shall
be class A or B concrete of grade 20/20. Forms used for concreting shall be wood, metal, or
suitable material and shall extend the full depth of the concrete.

Delete paragraph 4 & 5 and substitute the following.

Compaction of the concrete placed in the forms shall be by vibration. Forms shall be left in
place for 24 hours or until the concrete has set sufficiently so that they could be removed
without injury to the concrete placed. The finished concrete shall be kept moist for a
minimum of 7 days. The method of curing shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.

c. Guide Posts


Guard posts shall be of circular type with size and shape as shown on the drawing or as
directed by the Engineer. Concrete shall be of grade 30 and shall comply with the
specification for structural concrete work. No materials other than the essential ingredients
i.e. cement, aggregates and water, shall ordinarily be used in the manufacture of concrete.

Reinforcement shall be mild steel bars and clean, free from loose rust, loose mill scale, and
foreign coating. Bending of bars shall be done as per drawing and in a manner that will not
injure the material.

Shuttering shall be of dressed softwood timber or steel plain sheets with true surfaces and
edges, mortar tight and stoutly braced together.

Concrete shall be thoroughly mixed in proportions as approved by the Engineer, satisfying its
specified grade. Mixing shall be done in a mechanical mixer and be continued till materials
are uniformly distributed and an uniform colour of the entire mass is obtained. If however
hand mixing is permitted by the Engineer, it shall be done on a smooth watertight platform
large enough to allow efficient turning over of the ingredients of concrete before and after
adding water. In such cases of hand mixing the quantity of cement shall be increased by ten
(10) per cent above the amount required for specified grade. The inside faces of formwork
shall be soaped or oiled to prevent adhesion of concrete, but such soap or oil shall be such as
not to stain the concrete. Reinforcements contained in the guard post shall be placed and
firmly held in correct position with specified clear cover as shown on the drawing or as
directed by the Engineer. The method of transporting and placing the concrete shall be
approved by the Engineer. Concrete shall be kept in the forms for at least seven (7) days
during which time it shall be kept moist and sheltered from the Sun. Posts shall not be
erected until fourteen (14) days after casting and during this period shall not be subjected to
any loading or rough handling. While striking off the formwork care shall be taken to prevent
any damage to the concrete. Any damage caused during concreting, removal of shuttering
and transporting the guard posts to their place of installation shall have to be made good at
the contractor's own expense. While erecting the posts necessary excavation shall be done
and back filled with approved material after proper compaction so that the posts stand truly
vertical, in lines, grades as shown on the drawing at specified locations or as directed by the
Engineer.

a. Measurement

No Change.
b. Payment
Delete Pay Items and substitute the following :‐


808(1) Guard Rails (galvanised steel) Ln. metre
808(2) Guard Rails (Steel Railway Line) Ln. metre
808(3) Guard Stones (concrete) Number
808(4) Guard Stones (masonry) Number
808(5) Guide Posts (100mm Upvc pipe) Number
809 FENCING
No Change.

810 ROAD MARKINGS
810.1 Description


The work shall consist of the applications of road markings including the installation of road
studs on the finished paved areas of road in accordance with the Manual of Traffic Control
Devices of Road Development Authority, Ministry of Transport and Highways and the Motor
Traffic Act.
810.2 Materials

Add at end of sub section :‐

Before delivery of materials to Site the Contractor shall forward certificates of origin
specifying physical and chemical characteristics and the constituents of the paint from the
manufacture. Before delivery or during the work the Engineer may call for any test
considered necessary to the application. All such tests shall be performed at the expense of
the Contractor and shall be considered subsidiary to the work.


e. Equipment

The road marking equipment shall be purpose made of approved type and manufacture and
be capable of painting the markings to a uniform width within the tolerances specified
without the paint running or splashing. The equipment shall be capable of painting lines of
different widths by adjustment of the spray jets on the machine or by means of additional
equipment attached to the machine.

f. Setting Out

The lines, symbols, figures or marks shall be set out by means of paint spots of the same
colour as that of the proposed final lines and marks. Normally spots of approximately 10mm
in diameter spaced at 1.5m intervals shall be sufficient.
After spotting the positions of the proposed road markings are to be indicated on the road.
These premarkings shall be approved by the Engineer prior to the commencement of any
painting operations.

The positions of any road studs shall be marked out on the road and shall be approved by the
Engineer before they are fixed in position.

g. Tolerances

The width of lines and other markings shall not deviate from the specified width by more
than 5%.

The position of lines, letters, figures, arrows, reflective road studs and other markings shall
not deviate from the true position specified by more than 20mm.

The alignment of any edge of a longitudinal line shall not deviate from the true alignment by
more than 10mm in 15m.

The lengths of segments of broken longitudinal lines shall not deviate from the specified
length by more than 150mm.

h. Rectification of Faulty Workmanship

If any material not complying with the requirements is delivered to site or used in the Works,
or if any sub‐standard work is carried out, such material or work shall be removed, replaced
or repaired as required by the Engineer, at the Contractor’s own cost. Rejected traffic
markings and paint that has been splashed or has dripped onto the surfacing, kerbs,
structures or other such surfaces shall be removed by the Contractor at his own cost, in such
a way that the markings or spilt paint will not show up again later.
a. Measurement


Road markings shall be measured by the actual length in linear metres for the specified
widths completed and accepted.

Reflecting road studs shall be measured in number supplied, installed and accepted.
b. Payment

Delete Pay Items and substitute Pay Items below :‐


810(1) Road Markings
Reflectorised thermoplastic paint
100mm wide Ln. metre

810(2) Road Markings
Reflectorised road marking paint

810(3) Rreflecting road studs Number

811 ROAD SIGNS
811.1 Description

This work covers the provision and installation of permanent road signs and post assemblies
as shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer. The signs will be ground mounted
and erected at the side of the road as shown on the drawings or as specified in these
specifications. Prior to manufacture and fabrication of the signs, the Contractor shall submit
to the Engineer for approval (and in conformity with the Motor Traffic Act), detail execution
drawings and the Manual of Traffic Control Devices of the Road Development Authority,
Ministry of Transport and Highways showing letter sizes, symbols and sign layout, sign panel
dimension, post height for sign structures.

811.2 Materials


e. Preservatives, Paints and Finishes


The Retro‐reflective material to be supplied shall be High Intensity Grade sheeting (High
Performance Wide Angle Retro‐reflective Sheeting) and shall be in accordance with ASTM D
4956‐90 “Standard Specification for Retroreflective Sheeting for Traffic Control”.

The material shall be supplied with a pressure‐sensitive or heat applied adhesive backing
protected by a removable liner and shall be of the correct type for the backing surface to
which it is to be applied.
a. Mounting Posts

Delete paragraph 1 and section substitute the following :‐

Posts for mounting standard types of road sign shall be as indicated in the Drawings.
a. Measurement

No change.
b. Payment

Pay Item Pay Unit

811(1) Provide and erect single pole road signs Number
811(2) Provide and erect double pole road signs Number

Add the Following Series :‐
812 BUS BAYS

812.1 Description

This work shall consist of constructing Bus‐bay at locations of bus stoppage as decided by the
Engineer with proper signs in accordance with these specifications and drawings or as
directed by the Engineer. The length of Bus‐bay will depend on storage bay length of number
of buses to be pulled in plus tolerance, which shall be 15 metre minimum for each bus or as
directed by the Engineer.

812.2 Materials

Bus‐bay shall be constructed at specified location by widening the formation level and
pavement along with raised kerbs for separating it from main carriageway with shape and
dimension as shown on the drawing. The materials required for various items of works
involved in constructing the bus‐bay e.g. earthwork, pavement, kerbs etc. shall be in
accordance with the provisions of this specification.


The various item of work involved shall be similar as specified in these specifications under
different clauses for materials, pavement, embankment, kerb(s) for the roadway.


Bus‐bay shall be constructed at locations and accepted as determined from actual counts.
Earthwork, pavement work, shoulders shall be measured separately and will be paid for
along with the respective items of works involved included in the BoQ. Raised kerbs are
required to form a complete bus bay unit. Drainage outlet shall be provided. Payment for
kerbs and Drainage outlets will be made through respective pay items in the BoQ.

813 CONCRETE KERB INLETS
813.1 Description

This work shall consist of the construction of kerb inlets to lines, levels and grades as shown
on the Drawings or as indicated by the Engineer.

The dimension of the inlets shall be as shown on the Drawings or as instructed by the
Engineer.
813.2 Materials

Concrete for precast or cast in place units and concrete for kerbs shall be of Class A or B of
grade 20/20 as per section 1001.

The other material used shall meet the requirements of the following, unless otherwise
specified.

(a) Reinforcement steel to SLS 375 or CS 26
material of 10 mm maximum size
(c) Cement mortar for jointing to sub section 1703.2

The Construction requirements shall be the same as subsection 807.3 (a) & (b) for
installation of kerbs.
a. Measurement

Kerb inlet furnished accepted and placed shall be measured by the number.
b. Payment

The payment will be based on the contract unit rate for the item which shall include full
compensation for supplying and installing the kerb inlet. The rate shall also include the cost
of all materials, labour, equipment tools and other incidentals necessary to complete the
works to these specifications.


813(1) Kerb Inlets Number

814 HNADRAILS, UPRIGHTS AND END PILASTERS
814.1 Description

This work shall consist of the construction of handrails, uprights and pilasters at the locations
and to the dimensions, lines and levels shown on the drawings or as instructed by the
Engineer.

Handrails and uprights, which are meant essentially to protect vehicles and pedestrians from
falling off the edge of bridge decks, shall be positioned away from the carriageway edge so as
not to interfere with the normal movements of traffic.

End pilasters shall be positioned at the ends of the handrails behind the movement joints, in
each corner of the bridge decks.
814.2 Materials

Concrete used for the casting of handrails, uprights and end pilasters shall be of Grade A or B
as given in Section 1001 and as specified.

The other materials used shall meet the requirements of the following unless otherwise
specified :‐

a) Reinforcing steel to SLS 375, CS 26 or BS 4449
b) Cement mortar for jointing to sub‐section 1703.2
c) Bitumen joint fillers shall be of the approved varieties.


a) Handrails and Uprights

Handrails and uprights shall consist of precast concrete post and rail jointed with in‐situ
concrete and mortar joints. Their assembly and erection shall be as shown in the Drawings
or as instructed by the Engineer. Concreting of posts and rails shall be in accordance with
Section 1001 and reinforcement in accordance with Section 1002

Posts shall be set vertical in pockets filled with concrete as shown on the Drawings or as

Rails shall be set parallel to the bridge deck or as instructed by the Engineer. Jointing
between rails and between posts and railing shall only be carried out after the posts have
set. Joint mortar and in‐situ concrete shall be trowelled to a neat finish.

No Site drilling or cutting of pre‐cast posts and rails shall be permitted without the prior
approval of the Engineer.

b) End Pilasters

End pilasters shall be precast or cast in‐situ using concrete of the specified grade. Their
assembly and erection shall be as shown on the Drawings of as instructed by the Engineer.
Forms for the concrete shall be wood, metal or suitable material and shall extend to the full
depth of the concrete.
All forms shall be free from warp and of sufficient strength to resist the pressure of the
concrete without displacement. All forms shall be clean and coated with an approved oil
before concrete is placed and compacted. Reinforcement shall be maintained in its correct
position during concreting.

Concrete shall be proportioned, mixed and placed in accordance with the grade of concrete
specified. Compaction of the concrete placed in the forms shall be by vibration or other
acceptable methods. Forms shall be left in place for 24 hours or until the concrete has set
sufficiently so that they can be removed without deformation to the concrete placed. The
finished concrete shall be kept moist for a minimum of 7 days. The method of curing shall be
subject to the approval of the Engineer.
a. Measurement

Unless otherwise specified, handrails and uprights shall be measured by the length in metres
of the handrails and end pilasters by the number of each.
b. Payment
The unit rate of each item of work shall be for full compensation for all labour, equipment,
tools, materials and incidentals necessary to complete the work as specified.

The pay Items and Pay Units will be as follows :‐

Pay Item Pay Unit

814(1) Handrails and Uprights Ln. metre
814(2) End Pilasters Number

815 BRIDGE LIGHTING

815.1 GENERAL

Scope of Work

The work consists of supply, delivery to site installation and putting into commission after
requisite tests for the Bridge street lighting services and associated system:

The services comprises

Bridge lighting
Approach lighting
Power connection from existing Ceylon Electricity Board system
L.T. distribution system for bridge/Approach lighting.

Regulations and Standard

The electrical installation shall comply with this specifications with all relevant British
Standard and Code of Practice and with the Electricity Rules of the Government of Sri Lanka
and in particular with the followings :‐

Ceylon Electricity Board Authority requirement
Local fire prevention Authority requirement
British code of practice ‐ current at the time of installation
All local authorities statutory by law of regulation.
Any special requirement of Chief Electrical Inspector, Government of Sri Lanka

Environment

All equipment and material supplied shall be suitable for continuous operation and storage
at
Temperature 5°C to 40°C
Relative Humidity ‐ up to 98%
Attitude : Sea level
Air pollution ‐ Industrial (assumed)
The equipment and materials shall be suitable for outdoor use.

Programme

The Contractor shall provide at the tender stage a full detailed bar‐chart of his proposed
programme showing the number of personnel required to complete the various installation
within a given time scale starting and finishing date of each activity including import of
material commissioning as well as testing to suit the Authority requirement and up to date
modify or redraft the programme as necessary.

The programme shall comply with the overall completion dates.

Materials and Workmanship

All materials and the constructional plant shall supply by the contractor. All the material shall
be of highest quality and the suitable for its intended use and shall comply with relevant
British Standard or other international standard by and be installed in accordance with codes
of practice and manufacture’s recommendation and the specification.

All operatives shall be suitably qualified and experienced for the work they are carrying out.
All workmanship shall be of highest standard and shall be upto the satisfaction of the
supervising officer. The contractor shall set up his own quality control procedure to ensure
that materials received on site are of the correct quality and are installed in the best
workmanship like manner.

Poor materials and workmanship or any material workmanship found not satisfactory by the
Engineer‐in‐charge shall be removed and replaced at once by the contractors at his own
expenses and no extension of time will be granted as result of any delay incurred. The
contractor shall implement and maintain a quality system conforming to the requirement of
BS 5750 or equivalent standard approved by the purchaser, to enable full compliance with
the requirement of the specification.

Name Manufactures/Suppliers

Not with standing that suppliers may have been named or approved by the Engineer‐in‐
charge, it shall be the contractor's responsibility to ensure that all materials and components
are upto specification in respect of manufacturer, finish and performance.

The contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that such materials are available to suit the
construction programme and for ensuring that materials etc. are ordered in time to
accommodate delivery to suit that requirement.

Samples

The engineer‐in‐charge reserves the right to call for samples of some or all materials and
products to be used.

The contractor shall obtain such samples as required and submit them to the Engineer‐in‐
charge within 14 (fourteen) days of a request to do so.

The contractor shall allow in his tender for obtaining such samples as required.

Material to be new and unused

All the materials to be supplied by the contractor under the terms of the contract shall be
new. Any used or worn material shall not be used in the works. Though they may satisfy the
specifications.

Supervision

The contractor shall employ a competent, qualified site engineer who shall be in charge of
the work during all working hours and shall be the dully accredited representative of the
contractor empowered to take instructions from the Engineer‐in‐charge and to execute same
and who must be in attendance at the premises until the whole of the works have been
completed and accepted on behalf of the Client by the Engineer‐in‐charge. The construction
site shall be the normal place of work for the contractor's site Engineer and during his
periods of absence from site, a deputy shall be nominated and approved by the Engineer‐in‐
charge. The contractor’s representatives shall attend meetings at site or at the offices of the
professional team when called upon so to do.

Operating Conditions and Guarantee

The contractor works shall be of such construction, manufacture and finish as to render
them suitable for operating throughout their expected life and to maintain design conditions.

Working Drawing

The contractor shall be responsible for providing fully dimensioned installation working
drawings for all and very pert of the works. The working drawings shall be submitted to the
Engineer‐in‐charge for approval in good time to meet an agreed programme for the works.

The drawings shall include the following:

a) Detailed conduit, cables route and connection, design for street lighting poles,
distribution boxes etc.

b) fully detailed co‐ordinated drawings indicating all plant, equipment, cable routes,
electrical conduits pipe work that is to be installed, giving lines, levels and positions
of equipment.

c) Drawings of manufactured and fabricated items and equipment.

d) Wiring diagrams showing external wiring between manufacturers equipment and
controls, instruments and instrument panels switchgear.

Information Required With The Tender

a) The tender shall submit with tender the description of all materials and equipment
that he proposes to use along with their technical literature. BSS references,
performance figures, wiring diagram and dimension of the equipment.

b) Name of manufacturers of the major items being offered.

c) A statement of compliance as the specification.

d) Confirmation that the proposed layout is satisfactory.

As Fitted Record Drawings

The contractor shall supply to the Engineer‐in‐charge as a pre‐requisite to practical
completion of the works, comprehensive as fitted record drawings finalized in detail and
approved by Engineer‐in‐charge. The contractor shall demonstrate from time to time as
required by the Engineer‐in‐charge throughout the execution of the works, that adequate
and accurate records are being kept such as well ensure the ultimate completeness and
accuracy of as fitted record drawing and that the record drawings themselves are being
progressively compiled as the work on site proceeds.

The contractor shall submit one copy of the as fitted drawings for the Engineer‐in‐charge
approval prior to supply of final negatives.

Operating and Maintenance Instruction

At the time of practical completion of the contract the contractor shall provide complete set
at operating and maintenance instruction manuals in approved good quality ring binders
with printed covers. The type, size, appearances and cover printing of the manuals shall be
agreed with the Engineer‐in‐charge and samples shall be submitted for final approval before
supplying the required number of manuals.

The operating and maintenance manuals shall contain:

a) A complete description of each mechanical and electrical system including control
systems, giving its function or purpose, duties, method of operation, balancing or
adjusting, related to the appropriate ''As fitted" drawings and cross‐referenced as
necessary.

b) Instruction for any precautionary measure from time to time necessary (e.g.
corrosion etc.).

c) A complete set of test certificates as appropriate to the various electrical system
and equipment.

Testing and Commissioning:

General

The procedure for commissioning and testing shall be agreed with the Engineer‐in‐charge.

The contractor shall then conduct the tests and provide all facilities for the Architect to
witness and inspect all their results, instruments and labour for those tests shall be provided
by the contractor and records shall be made by the contractor of all tests and the results
submitted to the Engineer‐in‐charge on approved test certificates and test result sheets.

Facilities shall be made available for representative of the Engineer Ceylon Electricity Board
and Chief Electrical Inspector. Government of Sri Lanka to witness tests as required. A
suitable qualified representative of the contractor shall be available for all tests.

Where tests show that the plant and equipment do not function in a manner satisfactory to
the Engineer‐in‐charge meeting the design parameters laid down by the Engineer‐in‐charge
then the contractor shall carry out at their own expense such remedial works as may be
required.

Electrical Work Test and Inspection

Testing of equipment at the manufacturers works prior to dispatch shall be carried out in
accordance with the relevant B.S. Specifically or Code of practice and manufacturers
recommendations and the contractor shall submit copies of the manufacturers test
certificates to the Engineer for approval.

Electrical Site Test

The contractor shall carry out site tests on completed installations in accordance with the
current edition of the IEE Regulations, the appropriate B.S. Specification/Code of practice,
and equipment manufacturers recommendations. The tests shall include, but not be limited
to the following :

LV Cables

Upon completion of a cable end or straight through joint and before connection to any
equipment, an installation resistance test shall be carried out and an infinity reasing obtained
with a 2000 Volt Meter. A similar test shall be carried out after the expiration of an agreed
period and should lower values of insulation resistance be obtained, the faulty seals shall be
re‐made at the contractor's expense and to the satisfaction of the engineer‐in‐charge.

The continuity of each cable sheath shall be tested between the point at which the earthing
connection is may to the switchboard and the most distant point of the run.

Earthing

The resistance of all earth electrodes, shall be measured as laid down in BS CP 1013 (1965)
and the current edition of the IEE Regulation of earth electrode networks for power earthing
shall not exceed 2 Ohms. Continuity tests using a "Ductor Ohmeter" type low voltage heavy
current instrument shell also be carried out.

Visual Inspection

i) A visual inspection shall be made to verify that the power installation equipment is:
In compliance with the Standards quoted in this specification, Correctly selected
and erected. Not visibly damaged.

ii) The visual inspection shall include, as relevant

Connection of conductors,
identification of conductors
selection of conductors for current carrying capacity and voltage drop.
connection of single pole devices for protection or switching in phase conductors
only ton distribution circuits only)
presence of fire barrirs and protection against thermal effects,
methods of protection against direct contract (including measurement of distance
where appropriate) i.e.

815.2 CONSTRUCTIONAL REQUIREMENT

Light Fixture

The light fittings shall comply with the relevant requirement of applicable BS including BS
4533. The light feature shall be 90W low pressure sodium lamp (SOX‐90W) complete with
starting gears, holder, light weight glass fiber reinforced polyester housing, clear
methacrylate bowl, high purity anodized aluminum reflectors. All exposed metal parts of
stainless steel, suitable for side entry on mast, Neoprene ring in spigot‐entry to prevent
ingress of water and insects etc.

Appropriate samples of light fixture shall be submitted prior to installation. The street light
fixture shall be installed in accordance with applicable fitting layout drawing. Each fitting
shall be complete with all accessories and consumable shall be considered as one unit.

Street Light Post

Steel galvanized pole as specified in the drawings shall be fabricated and installed as per
relevant code and standards and Ceylon Electricity Board standard. A junction box complete
with accessories and opening lid just above the base plate of pole shall be provided.

The pole shall have galvanized steel base plate of 12mmthick of size 200mmx200mm with a
hole of 37mm die at the center and four hole of size 20mm at the corners of the plate. The
distance between the poles shall be as specified in the layout drawing.

Arrangement shall be provided for termination of cables at each pole complete with
connectors fuse, earthling block, sealing arrangement at the entrance of the cable to avoid
ingress of water and vermin. The sealing of the cable at pole shall be water light.

PVC Insulated Cable

The cables shall be armoured/ non‐armoured as specified on the drawings/schedule, shall
have 600/1090 volt grade PVC insulation and shall comply with B.S. 6004 conductors shall be
plain annealed copper to B.S. 6360.

The following colours shall identify the core of multicore PVC insulated armoured/
unarmoured cable.

AC Three phase : phase: Red‐Yellow, Blue
(3/4 cores) : Neutral: Black
single phase : phase‐Red
(2 core) : neutral‐Black

The conductor shall be insulated with type 5 PVC complying with B.S. 6746. The cable shall
be filled internally and sheathed with PVC to B.S. 6746 type 1 and where used underground
or external or specified shall be single wire armoured and PVC sheathed overall. Contractor
shall be responsible to ensure that cable sizes and lengths are correct and comply with the
relevant standard.

Jointing and Terminating

a) The outer sheath or armour of all cables shall be securely retained by the use of the
correct type and size of brass cable gland. Such cable glands shall securely retain the
outer sheath or armour without damaging it.

b) Where cable glands are used for terminating cables within non‐metallic boxes, the
earth continuity shall be maintained by a bonding strap having a resistance not
higher than an equivalent length of cable sheath or armour.

c) Every cable core termination shall be of the sealed or compression socket type,
unless the cable i. terminated in an approved connector.

d) Cable core terminations shall securely contain and anchor all the wires of the
conductor, and shall not impose any appreciable mechanical strain on the terminal
socket, or connector.

e) Soldering fluxes, which remain acidic or corrosive after soldering is completed shall
not be used.

f) The cable glands shall be secured by brass lock washers and fitted with the correct
shrouds.

g) All cable joints, termination and seals shall be made only by an experienced jointer
and shall be acceptable to the Engineer‐in‐charge.

h) Termination, joints and seals shall be made in full accordance with the current IEE
Regulations.

i) Joints shall be enclosed in purpose made cast iron box filled with compound and
fitted with armours clamps and an electrical continuity copper strip bonded to the
armouring on either side of the box.

j) Where the cable is cut during the course of installation the open ends shall be
sealed immediately by means of sell adhesive non‐hydroscopic tape or a wax water‐
tight seal to make an air and water‐tight‐joint.

k) Approved tests shall be carried out on all cables and materials before jointing.

Minimum Internal Radu of Bends

This shall be in accordance with the cable manufactures recommendation. For PVC insulated
cables the minimum bending radu shall not be less than 8 times the cable diameter.

Cross Site Installation of Cable

a) Cable shall be laid or installed in one length from terminal point to terminal point.
No through joints will be permitted, unless authorized in writing by the Engineer‐in‐
charge and then only if the need arises due to an alternation in route length
necessitated by circumstances which the contractor could riot reasonably have
foreseen. If any such through joint is authorized for a cable laid underground, the
position shall be identified precisely over the joint, at ground level, by means of a
suitable inscribed concrete cable marker. Any such joint authorized for a cable
installed above ground shall be located in such a position as to be readily accessible
at all times. All through joints shall be core to core (phase to phase).

b) Cables shall be delivered to and handled around the site on cable drums. During
installation cables shall be played out from the top of the drum, guided by
supporting runners where necessary and the drum braked to avoid over‐run, Cables
shall not be handled, run off drums or installed when the ambient temperature is at
or below 0°C.

c) The cable trenches shall be excavated by the contractor to ensure that the cable are
laid at least at a depth of 500mm below the ground surface upon a bed of sand
150mm deep. The depth of trench shall be as directed by the Engineer‐in‐charge.

d) Cable ducts shall be provided under roads and other paved area.

e) After approval of the lay the trench shall be back‐filled by material, which has
passed through a 12mm riddle.

f) Power cables shall be laid with a slight snake formation to ensure there is minimum
strain during expansion and contraction due to temperature variations.

g) Where a number of cables (including signal cables) are laid in a common trench:

i) The cables shall be laid in accordance with the appropriate drawing.
ii) The cables need not all be laid at 500mm below ground level (due to trench width
restriction).
iii) Cables carrying power shall be a minimum of 300mm from signal and
telecommunications cables.
iv) The cable formation shall minimize crossings (to points where cables divert to
locations).

h) Cable tray shall be used while running cable under the bridge.

Street Light Distribution Board

The distribution board shall be made of 18 SWG M.S. sheet and should be of suitable
dimension so as to accommodate the circuit breakers, cotactor, relay, energy meter, photo
cell and bus‐bars with sufficient spacing and be spray painted with gray/white enamel paint,
shall have hinged type door with best quality door handle, door locks and door latches. The
distribution board shall be of double door type i.e. one cover door inside through which only
the knobs of MCB/MCCB, manual/auto switches etc, are accessible. The distribution board
shall be suitable for outdoor mounting, dust and rain proof and shall have knockouts for
conduit entry and exist at the bottom. The DB shall be installed at a height of 820mm feet
above the ground with the help of MS angle embedded in the ground with CC work. A
copper plate‐earthing block must be provided inside the board. The circuit breakers and
contactor shall be AEG, SIEMENS, MITSUBISHI or of approved brand. The work shall be
complete in all respect including all necessary arrangements as per drawing circuit
breakers/isolators, of DB shall be designed for operation on a 240/400V, 50Hz, 3 phase, 4
wire system, Breakers shall have inverse time tripping with thermal and magnetic trip
element. All circuit breaker shall be trip free and shall be of the indicating type. The panels
shall have the phase clearly marked and where required, must have solid neutral buses. The
panels shall be constructed as per schedule, and shall comply with relevant requirements of
applicable BS including BS 4649, where applicable, and would be painted with two (2) coats
of gray Duco to BS 38 IC shade, with standard concentric knockouts of required sizes all
around. The panels shall have directory frames and printed directory on/in side of door. The
door is to be provided with flush lock handle. AH doors are to be keyed alike, all hinges shall
be concealed.

The MCB/MCCBs shall be quick‐make, quick‐break type, and shall have inverse‐time limit
characteristics will instantaneous magnetic trip elements functioning on overloads above the
normal operating range. All circuit breakers shell is trip‐free. Ratings and frame sizes of
breakers shall be in accordance with schedule. All lugs must be of the shoulder less
mechanical type. The MCB must comply with BS 3871: part 1 (1965) category M4 (5A‐60A).
Rated voltage 240/400V, A.C. 50Hz, interrupting capacity 4000 amp capable of providing
overload and short circuit protection, through thermal and magnetic trip actions
respectively, temperature rating, 400C preferably trivialized (moisture fungus corrosion
treated), terminal capability upto 35mm² wire. The MCCB's shall have the following
symmetrical interrupting capacity at 480V A.C. if not indicated otherwise:

Upto 10A : 4 KA
10A to 60A : 14 KA

70A to 200A : 22 KA
200A to 500A : 30 KA

The continuous current ratings of individual MCBFICCB's may he varied within + 15X at the
time of installation without any cost implication.

Earthing

Materials

Earth Electrode

i) Pipe Electrode (where applicable)

This would be 38mm die G.I, pipe with two 3mm die holes across the diameter at
every 1200mm at the pipe.

ii) Plate Electrode (where applicable)

This earth electrode shall be cold roiled double copper plate 600mmx600mmx3mm
having provision for connecting the earth lead.

Earthling Lead

Earthling lead shall consist of copper conductor of 100% conductivity at 20°C (68DF),
Annsealed copper stranded with weight resistively of 0.15328 Ohm‐gram/m² at 20°C (68°F)
and density of 0.32117 lb/in³, for meeting the requirement of BS 6360:1969 or its metric
adoption. All terminal lugs shall be of copper and nut bolts of brass.

Earthling Block

The earthling block shall be of solid electrolytic copper cost and machine of size and have at
least 103mm dia/drilled holes for accommodating the terminal of the earth continuity
conductor. Requisite number of brass nuts and bolts shall also be provided.

Earth Inspection Pit

Bricks used shall be 1st class on stone chips. Only approved quality cement shall be used.
Stone chip for 75mm RCC cover shall be 25mm down graded with 10mm die M.S. hook (of
50mm dia) shall be provided in the cover slab.

Installation

Pipe Electrode

The pipe earth electrode shall be buried below ground level at 12 meter by tube‐well sinking
method. The earth lead from the DB to the main earth electrode shall be installed in G.I. pipe
of specified diameter. The terminal connected to the earth electrode shall use a brass clamp.
After making the connection. The clamp shall be covered with bitumen poured hot, and
covered with jute cloth. The length of pipe electrode may vary to give the maximum earth
resistance of 1 Ohm in the driest season.

Plate Electrode

The plate earth electrode (if applicable) shall be buried below ground level as per schedule
and installed in an upright position if completely surrounded by a bed or at least 300mm of
charcoal fixed with line and packed hard. Distance between any two‐earth electrodes shall
be at least 8 meters.

Earthling Leads

The earthling leads from the earth electrode shall be connected to the earthling block near
DB. A double run of specified copper conductor (preferably tinned) shall be brought out of
specified lead for the earth electrode through G.I. pipe from the electrode and connected to
the earth block. There shall be no joint in the copper earth lead. All earthing lead shall follow
the shortest and most direct route to earth electrode and sharp bends and joints shall be
avoided. The earthling leads shall be made mechanically strong and electrically continuous
with minimum of resistance.

Earth Inspection Pit

The earth inspection pit shall be (450mmx450x450mm inside dimension) 1st class brick with
finished plaster surface including the RCC pit cover (100mm thickness 1:2:40 ratio). The slab
shall have level surface and the pit shall have well formed regular sides. Water curing for the
slab and the pit shall be done for a minimum of 6 days.
a. Measurement

Unless otherwise specified, Light Fixture shall be measured by the number of lighting point
each.
b. Payment

The unit rate of this item of work shall be for full compensation for all labour, equipment,
tools, materials and incidentals necessary to complete the work as specified.

The pay Items and Pay Units will be as follows :‐

Pay Item Pay Unit

815(1) Lighting Point Number

816. RELOCATION OF PUBLIC UTILITIES

816.1 Description

This work covers all the requirements for the relocation of public utilities. The Contractors
attention is brought to the requirements of the relocation of all existing utilities and services.
The Contractor shall carefully liase with all the concerned authorities for the remova1 of
exiting services, all necessary temporary arrangements and final relocation and installation
of the utilities.

816.2 Materials

The material used in both temporary and permanent works associated with the relocation of
utilities shall meet the requirements of the respective authorities. The Engineer will liase
with the Authorities on all matters relating to necessary diversion and relocation works, but
the Contractor shall retain full responsibility for coordinating the implementation of all
relocation work which shall be an integral component of the Works.

816.3 Construction Requirement

The Contractor should note that all utility companies have been notified of the scope of the
Works and the necessity for the removal and relocation of power lines, cables as well as
water and gas mains. The concerned authorities will undertake Works for the relocation of
existing utilities during the Works programme but the Contractor may also be required to
undertake works in operations involving the relocation of existing utilities. The precise details
of individual requirements will be agreed upon between the interested parties after the
award of Contract and such details shall be reflected in the programme to be submitted. The
Contractors attention is brought to the need to cooperation with concerned Utility
authorities. In particular, the Contractor shall prepare in his working schedule a realistic
programme allowing reasonable times for the removal and relocation of utility lines, for both
commencement and completion times, which shall be based on advance negotiations and
agreements with the respective authorities allowing reasonable time in all cases for the
carrying out of this work. The programme to be furnished for the whole the works and shall
take account all negotiations and agreements on all such matters.

The Contractor shall adopt construction methods that will make allowance for the removal
and relocation of existing utilities in accordance with the specifications of the respective
authorities as well as the instruction of the Engineer. The Contractor shall propose full details
for the works that are affected by the removal and relocation of all utilities. Such proposals
shall take into account the Contractors full obligations for the Works as well as the minimal
disruption to utility services.


Measurement and payment for the removal and relocation of some existing utility services
may be made on the basis of Prime Cost (P.C.) item allowed for all such works. Such
payments will cover for possible payments to be made by the Contractor to the concerned
authorities for work operations undertaken by the authorities in connection with the works
for relocation of existing utilities. The Contractor shall indicate in the Tender the percentage
adjustment required for the use of the P.C. item which shall cover all the Contractors
obligations for implementing this work item. Where appropriate, the Engineer may also
order work for the removal and relocation of utilities services on a Force Account Basis. Such
payments shall be full compensation for complying with this section of the Specification,
Conditions of Contract for the whole of the Works.

Pay items Pay Unit
816(1) Relocation of Public Utilities Provisional Sum

plus % Allowance for Overheads, etc. on the Provisional Sum to be inserted by the Contractor
Prime Cost


SERIES 900 – RIGID PAVEMENTS

CONTENTS

900 RIGID PAVEMENTS ..............................................................................................................2
901 Cement Concrete Pavement............................................................................................2
901.1 Description .................................................................................................................2
901.2 Materials, mix requirements and testing for quality ....................................................2
901.3 Construction Requirements ........................................................................................5
901.4 Measurement and Payment...................................................................................... 11

Series 900 –Rigid Pavements Page no: 1 of 12
SERIES 900 – RIGID PAVEMENTS

900 RIGID PAVEMENTS
901 Cement Concrete Pavement
901.1 Description
This section covers the specification of materials for, and the construction of, un‐reinforced
and reinforced concrete pavement slabs. The concrete pavement shall be constructed to the
dimensions and cross sectional profiles shown in the contract drawings.

901.2 Materials, mix requirements and testing for quality
The contractor shall submit the details and material sources of all the materials to the
Engineer for the approval. Samples shall be submitted to the Engineer, and when approved
by him all materials used in the work shall all respects be equal thereto. If alternative
materials are proposed, 28 days notification is required for the approval.
All concrete for use in pavements shall comply with BS 5328, except where otherwise
specified in this clause.
a. Cement
The cement shall be Ordinary Portland Cement complying with the requirements of BS 12 or

AASHTO M‐85 or SLS 107.
b. Aggregates
Coarse & fine aggregates shall comply with the requirements in sub section 1701.2
c. Water
Water for mixing and curing shall comply with SLS 522.
d. Reinforcement
Steel reinforcement shall comply with any of the following standards and be in prefabricated
sheets or bars assembled on site and be free from oil, dirt, loose rust or scale.

Steel fabric in flat sheets BS 4483
Hot rolled steel bars Grade 250 BS 4449
Hot rolled steel bars Grade 460 BS 4449
Cold worked steel bars BS 4461
When deformed bars are used they shall confirm to type 2 bond classification of BS 4449 &
BS 4461.
e. Dowel Bars
Dowel bars shall be Grade 250 steel complying with BS 4449 and shall be free from oil, dirt,
loose rust or scale. They shall be straight, free of burrs or other irregularities and the sliding
ends sawn or, if approved by the Engineer, cropped cleanly with no protrusions outside the
normal diameter of the bar.
f. Tie Bars
Unless otherwise stated in the Contract, tie bars in transverse or longitudinal joints shall be
Grade 250 steel or Grade 460 deformed steel bars complying with BS 4449 or BS 4461. Tie
bars shall be free from oil, dirt, loose rust and scale. Tie bars which are to be cranked and
later straightened shall be of mild steel.
g. Admixtures
An air‐entraining admixture complying with the requirements of BS 5075 Part 2 shall be used
in the concrete. In addition, water reducing retarding admixtures complying with BS 5075
Part 1 may also be used with the approval of the Engineer. Admixtures containing Calcium
Chloride shall not be used.
h. Expansion Joint Filler Board
The expansion joint filler board shall be of either cork or fibrous compressible material
complying with either AASHTO M‐153 or AASHTO M213. Alternatively a bonded combination
of rigid and compressible material approved by the Engineer, shall be used.
i. Joint Sealants
Joint seals shall consist of hot or cold applied elastomeric type sealant or preformed
compression sealant. Hot applied sealant shall comply with the requirements of AASHTO M‐
282 or ASTM D3406 or D3569. Cold applied elastomeric type sealant shall comply with
AASHTO M‐282 or BS 5212 Preformed compression seals shall be made of polychloroprene
elastomers complying with BS 2752 and ASTM D2628.
j. Class & Strength of Concrete
Concrete shall be of class A confirming to sub sections of this series and shall be designed to
have a minimum compressive strength of 25 N/Sqm at 28 days. The water content shall be
the minimum required to provide the agreed workability for full compaction of the concrete
to the required density, as determined by trial mixes or other means approved by the
Engineer, and maximum free water – cement ratio shall be 0.5.
k. Maximum size and grading of aggregate
The nominal size of coarse aggregate shall not exceed 40mm. When the spacing between
longitudinal reinforcement is less than 90mm, the nominal size of coarse aggregate shall not
exceed 20mm.
l. Compliance Testing
Concrete Strength
Sampling and testing and compliance for the specified characteristic strength of the
designed mixes shall be in accordance with BS 5328, except that it shall be at the following
rate of sampling and testing and with the following requirements.
150 mm concrete cubes shall be made and cured in pairs and tested in accordance with BS
1881 from concrete delivered to the paving plant, each pair being from different delivery of
concrete. At least one pair of cubes shall be made for each 600 Sqm of concrete slab and not
less than 6 pairs shall be made each day for each type of mix. For areas less than 600 Sqm, at
least 4 cubes shall be made for each 100 Sqm or less. This rate of sampling and testing may
be reduced at the Engineer’s discretion.
For areas of 600 Sqm or more, one cube of each pair shall be tested in compression at 7 days
and the other at 28 days after mixing. Groups of four consecutive results from single cubes
tested at 28 days shall be used for assessing the strength for compliance with BS 5328. For
areas less than 600 Sqm, two cubes shall be tested at 7 days and two tested at 28 days and
assessed as in BS 5328.
The ratio R between 7 and 28 day strengths shall be established for the mix to be used in the
slab by testing pairs of cubes at each age on at least 6 batches of the trial mix. The average
strength of the 7 day pair of cubes shall be divided by the average strength of the 28 day pair
of cubes for each batch and the ratio R shall be the average of these six values. The ratio R
shall be expressed to three decimal places.
If during the construction of the trial length or during normal working the average value of
any 4 consecutive 7 day test results falls below the strengths given in Table “7 Day Cube
Strengths” then the cement content of the concrete shall without extra payment, be
increased by 5% by mass or by an amount agreed by the Engineer. The increased cement
content shall be maintained at least until the four corresponding 28 days have been
assessed. If the cement content is increased, the concrete mix shall be adjusted to maintain
the required workability.

TABLE : 7 Day Cube Strengths
Grade of Concrete OPC Mixes R available N/Sq OPC Mixes R not
mm available N/Sq mm
40 43 R 31
30 33 R 24
25 27.5 R 19
20 22 R 15
15 17 R 12
10 10 R 7.5

Workability
The workability of the concrete at the point of placing shall enable the concrete to be fully
compacted and finished without undue flow. The optimum workability for the mix to suit the
paving plant being used shall be determined by the Contractor and approved by the
Engineer.
The workability shall be determined by the Compacting Factor Test, or the VeBe test or
alternatively by the Slump test, all in accordance with BS 1881, at the minimum rate of one
determination per 300 Sqm of slab laid or 6 times per day. For areas less than 300 Sqm the
rate shall be at least one determination to each 20 m length of slab or at least 3 times per
day. Tests for workability shall be carried out at the point of placing, in conjunction with tests
for strength and any tests for air content. The workability shall be maintained at the
optimum within the following tolerances.
Compaction Factor (CF) ± 0.03
Slump ± 20mm
VeBe ± 3Secs or as agreed by the Engi neer as a result
of trial mixes
Any alteration to the optimum workability necessitated by a change in conditions shall be
agreed beforehand by the Engineer.
If any determination of workability gives a result outside the tolerance a further test shall be
made immediately on the next available load of concrete.The average of the two consecutive
results and the difference between them shall be calculated. If the average is not within the
0.03(CF) or 10mm (slump) or ±3 Secs (VeBe) of the optimum value or the difference is
greater than 0.06 for CF or 20mm for slump or 6 Secs fo VeBe or other value agreed with the
Engineer, subsequent samples shall be taken from the next loads, which shall not be allowed
to discharge into the Works until compliance with the specification has been established.
Trial Mixes
The Contractor shall carryout laboratory trials of designed mixes with the materials from all
sources to be used in the contract. Trial mixes shall be made in the presence of the Engineer
or his representative and shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. They shall be
repeated if necessary until the proportions that will produce a concrete which complies in all
respects with this specification have been determined.
The proportions determined as a result of the laboratory trial mixes may be adjusted if
necessary during the construction of the trial length. Thereafter neither the materials nor the
mix proportions shall be varied in any way except the written approval of the Engineer.
Any changes in sources of materials or mix proportions that are proposed by the Contractor
during the course of the Works shall be assessed by making laboratory trial mixes and the
construction of a further trial length, unless approval is given by the Engineer for minor
adjustments.
Subgrade requirements

The concrete pavement shall be placed on an approved subbase of approved type and
thickness. The subbase may be of natural soil confirming to section 401 or of stabilised soils
confirming to section 402. The subbase may also be of graded granular material to that of
graded aggregate base to section 405.

Separation Membrane

A separation membrane shall be used between jointed reinforced concrete surface slabs or
unreinforced concrete surface slabs and the subbase. Separation membranes shall be
impermeable plastic sheeting 125 µm thick laid flat without creases. Where an overlap of
plastic sheets is necessary this shall be at least 300mm. There shall be no standing water on
or under the membrane when the concrete is placed upon it.

Steel Reinforcement

Laps in longitudinal bars shall be not less than 35 times bar diameter or 450 mm whichever is
greater. Laps in any transverse reinforcement shall be a minimum of 300mm.

The reinforcement shall be fixed on approved metal supports and retained in position at the
required depth below the finished surface and distance from the edge of the slab so as to
ensure that the required cover is achieved. Reinforcement assembled on site shall be tied, or
firmly fixed, by a procedure agreed with the Engineer, at sufficient intersections to provide
the above rigidity.

Unless otherwise described in contract, any transverse bars shall be at right angles to the
longitudinal axis of the carriageway.The transverse reinforcement in the centre of each slab
width shall be a minimum of 12 mm diameter bars at 600 mm centres in reinforced concrete
slabs. This reinforcement shall be at least 600 mm longer than one third of the width of the
slab and be lapped to other transverse reinforcement bars, or be continuous across the
whole width of the slab. Transverse reinforcement shall terminate at 125± 25 mm from the
edges of the slab and longitudinal joint. The longitudinal reinforcement shall terminate 300 ±
50 mm from any transverse joint.

Transverse Joints

Transverse joints shall be contraction, expansion or warping joints constructed at the spacing
described in the contract. Joins in the surface slab, road base and subbase shall be staggered
so that they are not coincident vertically and at least 1m apart.

Transverse joints shall be straight within the following tolerances along the intended line of
the joint, which is the straight line transverse to the longitudinal axis of the carriageway at
the position agreed by the Engineer, or as described in the contract.
(i) Deviation of the filler board or bottom crack inducer from the intended line
of the joint shall be not greater than ± 10mm.
(ii) The best fit straight line through the joint groove as constructed shall not
be more than 25 mm from the intended line of the joint.
(iii) Deviations of the joint groove from the best fit straight line of the joint
shall be not greater than 10 mm.
(iv) When top groove formers and bottom crack inducers are used, the joint
groove as constructed shall be located vertically above the bottom crack
inducer within a horizontal tolerance of ± 25mm
Transverse joints on each side of a longitudinal joint shall be in line with each other of the
same type and width.

Contraction Joints

Contraction joint shall consist of a sawn joint groove or a wet formed joint groove, dowel
bars and a sealing groove.

Expansion Joint

Expansion joint shall consist of a joint filler board, dowel bars and a sealing groove.
The filler board shall be positioned vertically within the pre‐fabricated joint assemblies along
the line of the joint. The joint filler board together with the sealing groove shall provide a
complete separation of adjacent slabs and any spaces around dowel bars and between the
sub‐base and the filler board shall be packed with a suitable compressible material after
fixing the joint assembly.

Warping Joints

Warping joint shall consist of a sawn joint groove or a wet formed joint groove, dowel bars
and a sealing groove.

Construction Joints

Construction joints made at the end of a working day in unreinforced concrete slabs and
jointed reinforced concrete slabs shall be expansion joints or contraction joints. In the event
of mechanical break down in concreting machinery, or at the onset of adverse weather,
emergency joints may be formed at not less than 2.5 m from preceding or succeeding joint
position. Emergency joints in unreinforced concrete slabs shall be either expansion or
contraction joint. Emergency joints in reinforced concrete slabs shall be made by positioning
a stop end formwork sufficiently rigid to ensure that dowel bars, tie bars or reinforcement
will be held in position in compliance with the specification, and placed in such a position
that it permits the longitudinal reinforcement to project through the joint for a distance of at
least 750mm.

Construction joints in continuously reinforced concrete slabs at the end of the day or in an
emergency shall not be constructed within 1.5 m of any lap in the longitudinal reinforcement
without the approval of the Engineer. The stop end formwork shall be sufficiently rigid to
ensure that the longitudinal reinforcement and the tie bars which project through the joint
are held in the correct position.

Longitudinal Joints

Longitudinal joints shall be wet formed or constructed in surface slabs between or at the
centre of traffic lanes within the allowable position in the contract. Joints in the surface slab,
road base or subbase shall be staggered so that they are not coincident vertically and are at
least 300 mm apart. The positions of all longitudinal joints in any slab shall be agreed by the
Engineer prior to construction of the slab. Longitudinal joints shall be constructed in the
positions agreed by the Engineer within the following tolerances.

(i) Deviations of the bottom crack inducer from the intended line of the joint,
parallel to the axis of the road shall be not greater than ± 13mm.
(ii) The joint groove shall be located vertically above the bottom crack
inducers within a horizontal tolerance of ± 25mm.
(iii) The best fit line along the constructed joint groove, shall be not more than
25 mm from the intended line of the joint.
(iv) Deviations of the joint groove from the best fit line of the joint shall be not
greater than 10mm.

Tie bars may be replaced by continuous transverse reinforcement across the joints in
continuously reinforced concrete slabs which are constructed in more than one lane width in
operation, provided that the transverse reinforcement is a minimum of 12 mm dia. bars at
600mm centres.

Longitudinal Construction Joints

Longitudinal construction joints between separate slabs shall have tie bars with a joint
groove. Alternatively, if split forms are used, the transverse reinforcement, if 12 mm
diameter or more, may be continued across the joint for a minimum of 500 mm or 30 times
the diameter of the transverse reinforcement bars, whichever is the greater. A joint groove is
not required in construction joints in continuously reinforced concrete road bases. Where
the edge of the concrete slab is damaged it shall be made good to the satisfaction of the
Engineer before the adjacent slab is constructed.

Dowel Bars

Dowel bars shall be supported on cradles in fabricated joint assemblies positioned prior to
construction of the slab. Cradles supporting the dowel bars shall not extend across the line of
the joint. For contraction joints in slabs constructed in two layers, as an alternative to
prefabricated assemblies, dowel bars may be mechanically inserted with vibration into the
bottom layer of the plastic concrete by a method which ensures full recompaction of the
concrete around the dowel bars.

Dowel bars shall be positioned at the mid – depth from the surface level of the slab, ± 20mm.
They shall be aligned parallel to the finished surface of the slab.

Dowel bars shall be covered by a thin plastic sheath for at least two thirds of the length from
one end for dowel bars in contraction joints or half the length plus 50mm for expansion
joints. The sheath shall be tough, durable and of an average thickness not greater than 1.25
mm.

For expansion joints, a closely fitting cap 100 mm long consisting water proofed card board
or an approved synthetic material shall be placed over sheathed end of each dowel bar. An
expansion space equal in length to the thickness of the joint filler board shall b formed
between the end of the cap and the end of the dowel bar.

Tie Bars

Tie bars and reinforcement projecting across a longitudinal joint shall be protected from
corrosion for 75 mm each side of the joint by a suitable protective coating. In the case where
the bars are cranked for construction joints and later straightened any damage to the
protection shall be made good before adjacent concrete is laid.

Joint Grooves

Joint grooves shall be formed or sawn in the surface slabs to promote cracks at the required
positions. Transverse joint grooves shall either be sawn in the hardened concrete or wet
formed in plastic concrete. Longitudinal joint grooves shall be wet – formed in plastic
concrete.

Sawn Transverse Joint Grooves – Sawing shall be undertaken as soon as possible after the
concrete has hardened sufficiently to enable a sharp edged groove to be produced without
disrupting the concrete and before random cracks develop in the slab. The groves shall be
between ¼ and 1/3 of the specified width not less than 3mm.

Wet‐formed Transverse Joint Groves ‐ Grooves shall be formed in the plastic concrete, prior
to the final regulation and finishing of the surface, either by vibrating a metal blade into the
concrete to the required depth and inserting a groove former into the groove, or the groove
former may be vibrated vertically into the plastic concrete. The disturbed concrete shall be
fully recompacted around the former on each side and the surface regulated. However if the
groove is wider than 15 mm, surface regularity shall be achieved by removing disturbed
concrete. The groove former shall then remain in the correct position, alignment and depth
below the surface, until temporary or permanent sealing is carried out. The groove former
shall be made of an approved rigid material of a width not greater than the required width of
the sealing groove. It shall be smooth sided with rounded protrusions no greater than 3mm.
Any removable part of the groove former may be tapered with a maximum difference in
width of 2mm in 20 mm depth.

Wet‐formed Longitudinal Joint Groves ‐ Groove forming sealing strips for longitudinal joints
shall be of firm compressible strips of ethylene vinyl acetate foam of minimum density of 90
kg/m3, or synthetic rubber, or similar material and shall be approved by the Engineer. They
shall have a minimum thickness of 5 mm and shall be sufficiently rigid to remain vertical and
straight in the concrete without curving or stretching. They shall be inserted or fixed
continuously along the joint. The depth of groove forming sealing strips for construction
joints shall be not less than 25 mm.

Joint Filler Board

Joint filler board for expansion joints and manhole and gully slab joints shall be of thickness
25 mm or the thickness described in the contract, within a tolerance of ± 1.5 mm, of a firm
compressible material or a bonded combination of compressible and rigid materials of
sufficient rigidity to resist deformation during the passage of the concrete paving plant. The
depth of the joint filler board for manhole and gully slabs shall be the full depth of the sealing
groove. The depth of the filler board for expansion joint shall be as described in the contract.
Holes for dowel bars shall be accurately bored or punched out to form a sliding fit for the
sheathed dowel bar.

Preparation and Sealing of Joint Grooves

Joints shall not be sealed within 14 days after construction.
The part of the grove former used to form the sealing groove or any temporary seal shall be
removed cleanly without damaging the joint arises to a minimum depth of 25 mm, where
compression seals are used or otherwise to the depth shown in contract for applied sealants.
The sealing grooves shall be cleaned out immediately after sawing. The sides of the joint
sealing groove shall be scoured by dry abrasive blasting. Alternatively, when compression
seals are used, the sides of the groove may be ground or wire brushed. For hot and cold
applied sealants, compressible caulking material, debonding strip or tape or cord compatible
with the sealant, of suitable size to fill the width of the sealing groove, shall be firmly packed
or stuck in the bottom of the sealing groove. All grooves shall be cleaned of any dirt or loose
material by air blasting with filtered, oil – free filtered air. The groove shall be clean and dry
at the time of priming and sealing.

When hot or cold applied sealants are used, an appropriate primer shall be used and it shall
be applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. The sealant shall be
applied within the minimum and maximum drying times of the primer recommended by the
manufacturer.

Hot applied sealants shall be heated in and applied from thermostatically controlled,
indirectly heated dispenser with a recirculating pump. The sealant shall not be heated to a
temperature higher than the safe heating temperature nor for a period longer than safe
heating period, as specified by the manufacturer. The dispenser shall be cleaned out at the
end of the each day and reheated materials shall not be used.

The components of cold applied sealants shall be thoroughly mixed in the correct
proportions in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions using an automatic metering
and mixing dispenser approved by the Engineer or, for hand application, using a power
operated paddle mixer for sufficient time to produce a homogeneous mix without entrapped
air. As soon as possible after mixing and within the work life of the sealant, the material shall
be dispensed in to the joint or applied using a caulking gun, to the correct level below the
concrete surface. The tack‐free time shall be achieved within 3 hours for machine dispensed
material, or within 12 hours for hand applied sealants.

When performed compression seals are used, the width of the seal shall be selected in
relation to the width of the sealing groove, the bay lengths and manufacturer’s
recommendations so that the estimated maximum width of the joint opening shall be not
more than 70% of the original width of the seal. Compression seals shall be inserted into the
grooves without prior extension or rotation and where recommended by the manufacturer,
with a lubricant adhesive which is compatible with the seal and the concrete. The adhesive
shall be applied to both sides of the sealing groove or the seal or to both. The seal shall be
positioned with its axis perpendicular to the concrete surface. Excess adhesive on the top of
the seal shall be removed.

Delivery, Storage and Batching of Concreting Materials
Cement shall be kept dry and used in the order in which it is delivered to the site. Bulk
cement shall be stored in purpose made silos. Bagged cement shall be stored under dry
weather proof covers on raised floors. Each consignment shall be kept separate and distinct
and used in the order in which it is delivered to the Site. No cement shall be stored on Site
for longer than 3 months.

Aggregate shall be delivered to and stored on the site in separate nominal single sizes of
coarse aggregate and fine aggregate. . Fine aggregate shall have been deposited at the site
of mixing for at least 8 hours before use. If the contractor proposes to blend aggregate from
two separate sources, he shall obtain the Engineer’s prior approval for the blending process
and for the arrangements for inspection during the course of the work. The bases of
stockpiles shall be suitably surfaced to prevent contamination of the aggregate. Aggregates
brought to the site shall be kept free from contact with deleterious matter. Aggregates shall
be measured by mass and provision shall be made for batching each nominal size or blend of
aggregate separately, to the tolerances specified in BS 5328.

Proportioning the Mix
The constituents of the mix shall be batched by weight to the accuracy required in BS 5328.
Allowance for any variation shall be made so that the specified maximum water – cement
ratio is not exceeded nor the cement content reduced below the minimum specified.

Calibration of Measuring Equipment

A Certificate of Calibration verifying the accuracy of the equipment used for measuring the
quantities of the constituents of the concrete mix shall be provided by the Contractor when
required by the Engineer and each time the batching and mixing plant is commissioned for
use.

Mixing concrete

Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, concrete shall be mixed on Site in a stationary
batch type mixer in compliance with BS 5328. The drums or blades of mixer shall be operated
at the speed used for testing, in accordance with BS 3963 for mix proportions required,
within a tolerance of ± 1 revolution per minute. and the blades shall be replaced when it is
no longer possible to maintain the tolerances by adjustment The rated output of the
batching and mixing plant shall exceed by at least a third the amount of concrete that is
required at a constant rate to achieve planned rate of progress. All mixing drums or pans,
which have been out of use for more than 30 minutes, shall be thoroughly cleaned before
any fresh concrete is mixed in them.

The air‐entraining agent shall be added at the mixer, by an apparatus capable of dispensing
the correct dose within the limits given in BS 5328, into the mixing water, so as to ensure
uniform distribution of the agent throughout the batch during mixing.

Following the addition of water, the concrete shall be mixed for at least the minimum time
recommended by the manufacturer of the mixing plant prior to discharge from the mixer.

Transporting Concrete

The freshly mixed concrete shall be covered during transit and while awaiting discharge to
prevent wetting by rain or evaporation of moisture. It shall be transported and delivered so
that segregation or loss of the constituent materials is reduced to the minimum.

Concrete spreading & compaction

The concrete shall be spread uniformly without segregation or varying degree of pre‐
compaction, by conveyor, chute or by other means approved by the Engineer. The concrete
shall be struck off by a screed so that the average and differential surcharge is sufficient to
ensure that after compaction the surface is to be the required levels.

The concrete shall be compacted by vibrating finishing beams. In addition, internal porker
vibration shall be used for slabs thicker than 200mm and may be used for lesser thicknesses.
When used, the porkers shall be at points not more than 500mm apart over the whole area
of the slab, and adjacent to the side forms or the edge of the previously constructed slab.

After the final regulation of the surface of the slab and before application of the curing
membrane the surface of the concrete slabs to be used as running surfaces shall be brush‐
textured in a direction at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the carriageway. The brushed
surface texture shall be applied evenly across the slab in one direction by the use of
approved wire brush not less than 450mm wide.

Curing
Immediately after the application of the surface texture described the surface and sides of
the slab shall be cured by the application of an approved curing compound. Alternatively,
small areas may be cured by the use of polythene sheeting in accordance with the
instructions of the Engineer. Curing shall be carried out for a minimum period of 7 days
Trial Length
At least 14 days prior to the construction of the trial length of concrete pavement the
Contractor shall submit for the Engineer’s approval a detailed description of the proposed
materials, plant, equipment & construction methods. No trials of new materials, plant,
equipment or construction methods; nor any development of them shall be permitted
either during the construction of the trial length or in any subsequent paving work, unless
they form part of further approved trials. The Contractor shall demonstrate the materials,
plant, equipment and methods of construction that are proposed for concrete paving, by
first constructing 100m long for mechanised construction and at least 20m for hand guided
methods. At least two transverse joints inclusive of an expansion joint and one longitudinal
joint shall be constructed and assessed in the trial length. The trial length shall comply with
the specification in all respects.
Construction by Machine
The concrete pavement shall be constructed by either fixed form or by slip form paving
plant, in a continuous process. The slab may be constructed in either one or two layers. In
two layer construction the thickness of the top layer shall not be less than 50mm or twice
the maximum size of the coarse aggregate, which ever is the greater, and shall be at least
15mm thicker than the depth of the groove former, if used.
Measurement
Concrete pavements shall be measured as finished work in position in square metres of
surface area. There shall not be separate measurement for the reinforcement nor formwork
and deemed to be included in the rate for the concrete. Joints shall be measured separately
in linear metres as specified.
Payment
Payment shall be based on the contract unit rate for each item of completed and accepted
work, which shall include full compensation for materials inclusive of reinforcement &
formwork, labour, equipment, transport, hire charges and incidentals necessary to complete
the work.

The Pay items and Pay Units shall be:‐

Pay Item Pay Unit

901 (1) Concrete Pavement Sqm

901 (2) Expansion joint as detailed in drawings m

901 (3) Contraction joint as detailed in drawings m

UNOPS LKOC
New Thondamannaru Bridge Construction Programme Amendments to Standard Specification
Series 1000 - Bridge Designs
SERIES 1000 - BRIDGES AND OTHER STRUCTURES
CONTENTS
1001. CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES....................................................................... 1002

1001.1. Description ................................................................................................ 1002
1001.2. Materials.................................................................................................... 1002
1001.3. Classification & uses of concrete .............................................................. 1002
1001.4. Proportioning of Materials ......................................................................... 1002
1001.5. Grade of Concrete..................................................................................... 1004
1001.6. Workability of Concrete ............................................................................. 1005
1001.7. Testing of Concrete for Acceptance.......................................................... 1006
1001.8. Mixing of Concrete .................................................................................... 1009
1001.9. Placing and Compaction of Concrete........................................................ 1011
1001.10. Underwater Concreting ............................................................................. 1016
1001.11. Curing of Concreting ................................................................................. 1016
1001.13 Measurement and payment ...................................................................... 1017
1002. STEEL REINFORCEMENT FOR CONCRETE STRUCTURES .......................... 1018
1002.1. Description ................................................................................................ 1018
1002.2. Materials.................................................................................................... 1018
1002.3. Construction Requirements....................................................................... 1019
1002.4. Measurement & Payment.......................................................................... 1020
1003. PRESTRESSING FOR STRUCTURES............................................................... 1021
1003.1. DESCRIPTION.......................................................................................... 1021
1003.2. MATERIALS.............................................................................................. 1022
1003.3. WORKMANSHIP....................................................................................... 1028
1003.4. TENSIONING............................................................................................ 1030
1003.5. JOINTS IN CONSTRUCTION WITH PRE-CAST UNITS.......................... 1032
1003.6. GROUTING............................................................................................... 1032
1003.7. TRANSPORTATION, STORAGE AND ERECTION OF UNITS:............... 1034
1003.8. QUALITY CONTROL ................................................................................ 1034
1003.9. SAFETY IN CONSTRUCTION:................................................................. 1037
1003.10. MEASUREMENT: ..................................................................................... 1037
1003.11. PAYMENT:................................................................................................ 1037
1004 PILE FOUNDATIONS FOR STRUCTURES........................................................ 1038
1004.1 a) Description ............................................................................................ 1038
1004.1 .1 Coffer Dam/ Artificial Island.................................................................. 1038
1004.2 Materials.................................................................................................... 1042
1004.3 Manufacturing and protective requirements for piles ................................ 1044
1004.4 Construction requirements of driven piles................................................. 1044
1004.5 Construction requirements of cast insitu piles (bored piles)...................... 1044
1005 WELL FOUNDATIONS FOR STRUCTURES ..................................................... 1071
1005.1 Description ............................................................................................... 1071
1006. RANDOM RUBBLE MASONRY.......................................................................... 1071
1007. BRICK WORK AND BLOCK WORK FOR STRUCTURES ................................ 1071
1008. FORMWORK FOR STRUCTURES ..................................................................... 1071
Page 1000
UNOPS LKOC
1009. BRIDGE EXPANSION JOINTS ........................................................................... 1071
1010 BRIDGE BEARINGS .......................................................................................... 1073
1011 WEARING COURSE ........................................................................................... 1077
Page 1001
UNOPS LKOC
SERIES 1000 - BRIDGES AND OTHER STRUCTURES
1001. CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES
1001.1.Description
No change.
1001.2.Materials
Add to the end of the paragraph the following:-
Supply of materials:
• UNOPS shall supply of basic construction materials such as Cement, and
necessary formwork materials except propping/supporting materials binding wires,
nails to the contractor at site. All necessary formwork materials shall be black
laminated plywood.
• Contractor shall transport the all materials from the stock yard to the batching
plant yard (for production of concrete by their own batching plant,) and finally
pouring site to pour concrete including all other necessary local transports. Supply
of all other materials related to the mixing of concrete such as Metal, Sand,
Admixture/Reterders, fresh water, ice if required to control the concrete
temperature and required tools and equipments shall be provided by the
Contractor.
• Contractor shall be responsible for preparing, fitting, fixing and installation of the
formworks. Contractor shall supply the all necessary tools, equipments and
materials for the fitting/fixing of the form works/ scaffoldings.
The contractor shall be responsible to transport the concrete from the batching plant to
the casting location by their own transit mixer/truck. The pouring of concrete shall be
commenced by Contractor including all necessary labours and equipments, tools etc,
complete. Before start to produce concrete, contractor must be ensuring that all the
equipments are in working condition e.g. transit mixer/ pump car etc, & all other
necessary equipments. An official material requisition form shall be designed and singed
& submit to the project office approval stated that all the equipments are working
condition.
Contractor shall be responsible for the payment of concrete volume If any wastage of
concrete due to breakage of the necessary equipments/ plants and any negligence of the
contractor during pouring of concrete. A stand by equipments must be available/ arranged
at site during concrete to avoid this payment.
1001.3.Classification & uses of concrete
Add to the end of the paragraph the following:-
Unless otherwise described in the Contract, concrete shall be a Class A designed mix.
1001.4.Proportioning of Materials
Delete subsections (d), and substitute with the following:-
a) When designing the concrete mix, the Contractor shall consider the following
conditions:
Page 1002
UNOPS LKOC
1) Strength
The class of the concrete is to be as shown on the Drawings. The class is the specified
characteristic cylinder strength at 28 days. Concrete mixes shall be designed to comply
with Specifications Sub Section 1001.7.
2) Water/Cement Ratio
The ratio of free water to cement shall be as indicated for the respective class in Table
1001-5-A. More over for concrete in barriers, edge beams and bridge decks directly
exposed to traffic or concrete in pile caps or abutments in contact with the ground, the
water cement ratio shall not exceed 0.45, unless approved by the Engineer.
3) Cement Content
The minimum cement content shall be as indicated for the respective class in Table
1001-5-A. The maximum cement content shall not exceed 500 kg/m3 unless otherwise
agreed by the Engineer.
4) Minimum Filler Content

Filler content (fine aggregate less than 0.25 mm and cement) shall not be less than as
follows (except for mass concrete).
Maximum coarse 20 40
aggregate size (mm)
Minimum filler 435 350
content (kg/m3 of
concrete)
5) Coarse Aggregate
The maximum size of coarse aggregate will generally be stated on the Drawings; either
40 mm or 20 mm, in accordance with Sub Section 1701.2 of ”ICTAD, Standard
Specifications for construction and maintenance of Roads and Bridges”. Grading and
quality is to comply with the requirements of Table 1701-1 of Sub Section 1701.2 of
”ICTAD Standard Specifications for construction and maintenance of Roads and Bridges”.
6) Fine Aggregate
The grading and quality is to comply with the requirements of Sub Section 1701.2 of
”ICTAD Standard Specifications for construction and maintenance of Roads and Bridges”.
7) Workability
The concrete shall be of suitable workability to comply with Specifications Sub Section
1001.6.
b) Trial Mixes
After the Contractor has received approval for the cement and aggregate to be used, he
shall prepare trial mixes with concrete of designed proportions to prove and establish
workability, strength, water cement/ratio, surface criteria etc. Methods of transporting
fresh concrete and the compaction equipment shall be considered. The trial mixes shall
be made and compacted in the presence of the Engineer, using the same type of plant
and equipment as will be used for the Works.
Page 1003
UNOPS LKOC
From each trial mix, cylinders or cubes shall be made and tested in accordance with
Specifications Sub Section 1001.7.
From the same mix as that from which the test specimens are made, the workability of the
concrete shall be determined by the slump test in accordance with Specifications Sub
Section 1001.6. The remainder of the mix shall be cast in a wooden mould and
compacted. After 24 hours the sides of the mould shall be struck and the surface
examined in order to satisfy the Engineer that an acceptable surface can be obtained with
the mix.
The trial mix proportions should be approved if the required strength is obtained from
tests carried out in accordance with Specifications Sub Section 1001.7., and the
consistency and surface is to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
When a mix has been approved, no variations shall be made in the mix proportions, or in
the type, size, grading zone or source, of any of the constituents without the consent of
the Engineer, who may require further trial mixes to be made before any such variations
are approved.
Until the results of trial mixes for a particular class have been approved by the Engineer,
no concrete of the relevant class shall be placed in the Works. When the Contractor
intends to purchase factory-made precast concrete units, trial mixes may be dispensed
with provided that evidence is given to satisfy the Engineer that the factory regularly
produces concrete which complies with the Specifications. The evidence shall include
details of mix proportions, water/cement ratios, slump tests and strengths obtained at 28
days.
The contractor shall submit for the Engineer’s approval, prior to the supply of any
designed mix, the following information:-
(a) Appropriate existing data as evidence of satisfactory previous performance for target
mean strength, current margin, and workability and water/cement ratio or full details of
tests on trial mixes.
(b) Quantities of each material per cubic metre, of fully compacted concrete.
The current margin for a concrete mix shall be 1.64 times the standard deviation of cube
tests on at least 40 separate batches of concrete of similar proportions and produced over
a period not exceeding 6 months, by the same plant under similar supervision, but not
less than one third of the characteristic strength up to Grade 15 or 7.5 N/Sqm for concrete
of grade 20 or above.
1001.5.Grade of Concrete
Add the following:-
Concrete for use in the various elements of structures shall be as shown in Table 1001-5-
A and as specified on the Drawings.
TABLE 1001-5-A
The compressive strength of concrete (Cylinder Strength) have been assumed as follows:
Page 1004
UNOPS LKOC
Pre-stressed concrete: fc’ = 50 N/mm² (Grade 60, Cube Strength)

Curb, Deck slab, RCC Girder fc’ = 30 N/mm² (Grade 37, Cube Strength)
Parapets footpath slab, Approach slab fc’ = 25 N/mm² (Grade 31, Cube Strength)
Concrete for Bored cast insitu pile fc’ = 30 N/mm² (Grade 37, Cube Strength)
Pile Cap: fc’ = 30 N/mm² (Grade 37, Cube Strength)
Concrete for piers, abutments and foundation: fc’ = 30 N/mm² (Grade 37, Cube Strength)
Cement Concrete Block: fc’ = 20 N/mm2 (Grade 25, Cube Strength)
Mass Cement Concrete: fc’ = 15 N/mm2 (Grade 19, Cube Strength)
Concrete Concrete Characteristic Maximum Maximum Size Minimum

Class Strength (N/mm2 @ 28 free of Coarse Cement Content
days) water/cemen Aggregate (Kg/m3)
Cylinder Cube (150 mm) t ratio (mm)
(150 x 300 mm)
40 210
10 10 13 0.60
20 240
40 250
15 15 19 0.55
20 275
40 300
20 20 25 0.50
20 325
40 325
25 25 31 0.50
20 350
40 350
30 30 37 0.45
20 375
40 375
35 35 44 0.45
20 400
40 400
40 40 50 0.42
20 425
40 425
45 45 56 0.42
20 450
40 450
50 50 60 0.42
20 475
Where, fc’ is the compressive strength at 28 days.
Note: Concrete strength quoted in Table 1001-5-A is the 28 days compressive cylinder
strength as well as cube strength.
1001.6.Workability of Concrete
Delete subsection, substitute with the following :-
The workability of the fresh concrete shall be such that the concrete is suitable for the
conditions of handling and placing so that after compaction it surrounds all reinforcement,
tendons and ducts and completely fills the formwork. Workability shall be measured for
each batch or at such times as directed by the Engineer using one of the following tests in
accordance with BS 1881 and shall be within the following limits of required values.
Slump ± 25 mm or ± one third of the required value, which ever is

the greater.
Compacting factor ± 0.03 where the required value is 0.90 or more.
± 0.04 where the required value is between 0.80 and 0.90
± 0.05 where the required value 0.80 or less.
Vebe ± 3 seconds or ± one fifth of the required value, which ever
is the greater.
Typical values of workability are tabulated below.
Page 1005
UNOPS LKOC
Description of Compacting Factor Slump

workability
Very low 0.78 0 - 25
Low 0.85 25 - 50
Medium 0.92 50 - 100
High 0.95 100 - 175
Unless otherwise specified in the contract, very low workability shall be confined to high
strength vibrated concrete, carried out under controlled conditions and for RCC slabs and
beams, foundations, columns, etc. low workability shall be used.
1001.7.Testing of Concrete for Acceptance
Delete subsection, substitute with the following:-
i) General
The Contractor shall assume the full responsibility for the quality of the concrete
conforming to these Specifications and this responsibility shall not be relieved by the
testing carried out and approved by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall thus at his own discretion establish additional testing procedures as
necessary.
ii) Control of Concrete Production
1) Materials
Materials used shall be tested in accordance with Sub Section 1001.2.
2) Plant and Equipment
Batching plants will be tested by the Contractor in a manor approved by the Engineer
before any major concrete casting and at any other time if requested by the Engineer.
3) Fresh Concrete
The frequency of slump tests shall be as directed by the Engineer, with at least one test
per 25 m³ of concrete.
iii) Control of Strength
1) Sampling and Testing
Cube tests may be substituted for cylinder tests if acceptable to both the Engineer and
the Contractor. If cube tests are adopted, the concrete characteristic strengths shall be as
shown in Table 1001-5-A. All other requirements of the Specifications shall equally apply
to cubes or cylinders.
The Contractor shall take samples of the concrete for testing. The number, frequency and
location shall be decided by the Engineer. A minimum of 3 concrete cubes/cylinders
should be taken for each day’s casting, or for every 15 m³ of concrete cast in large pours.
The slump of concrete samples shall be measured in accordance with Specifications Sub
Section 1001.6.
Page 1006
UNOPS LKOC
2) Strength Requirement
The results of the testing shall conform to the strength requirements according to British
standard BS-5400: Part 7, as given below, or to any mathematically correct statistical test
for each casting section.
iv) Characteristic strength
The characteristic strength of concrete is the 28 days strength below which not more than
5% of the test results may be expected to fall.
v) Target Mean Strength
The concrete mix shall be designed to have a mean strength greater than the required
characteristic strength by at least the current margin.
The current margin for each particular type of concrete mix shall be determined; it may be
taken as having the smaller of the values given by (1) or (2) below.
1) 1.64 times the standard deviation of tests on at least 100 separate batches of
concrete of nominally similar proportions of similar materials and produced over a
period not exceeding 12 months by the same plant under similar supervision, but
not less than 2.5 N/mm2 for concrete of grade 10 or 3.75 N/mm2 for concrete of
grade 15 or above.
2) 1.64 times the standard deviation of tests on at least 40 separate batches of

concrete of nominally similar proportions of similar materials and produced over a
period exceeding 5 days but not exceeding 6 months by the same plant under
similar supervision, but not less than 5 N/mm2 for concrete of grade 10 or 7.5
N/mm2 for concrete of grade 15 or above.
Where there are no or insufficient data to satisfy (1) or (2) above, the current margin for
the initial mix design should be taken as shown in table 1001-7-A for corresponding
strength classes. This margin should be used as the current margin only until sufficient
data are available to satisfy (1) or (2) above. However, when the required characteristic
strength approaches the maximum permissible strength of concrete made with a
particular aggregate. A smaller margin may be permitted by the Engineer for initial mix
design.
Table 1001-7-a
Specified characteristic Target Mean Current

Strength, MPa Strength, MPa Margin, MPa
35 50 15
Page 1007
UNOPS LKOC
30 45 15
25 40 15
20 30 10
15 25 10
10 20 10
vi) Testing Plan

Each cube shall be made from a single sample taken from randomly selected batches of
concrete. The samples shall be taken at the point of discharge from the mixer or, in the
case of ready-mixed concrete, at the point of discharge from the delivery vehicle.
Compliance with the specified characteristic strength may be assumed if:
1) The average strength determined from any group of three consecutive test cubes
exceeds the specified characteristic strength by not less than 0.5 times the current
margin, and
2) Each individual test result is greater than 85% of the specified characteristic strength.
If only one cube result fails to meet the second requirement (2) then that result may be
considered to represent only the particular batch of concrete from which that cube was
taken provided the average strength of the group satisfies the first requirement.
If more than one cube in a group fails to meet the second requirement or if the average
strength of any group of three consecutive test cubes fails to meet the first requirement
then all the concrete in all the batches represented by all such cubes shall be deemed not
to comply with the strength requirements. For the purposes of this sub-section, the
batches of concrete represented by a group of three consecutive test cubes shall include
the batches from which samples were taken to make the first and the last cubes in the
group of three, together with all the intervening batches.
vii) Action to be taken in the event of Non-Compliance with the Testing Plan.
When the average strength of three consecutive test cubes fails to meet the first
requirement in (vi), above, the mix proportions of subsequent batches of concrete should
be modified to increase the strength.
The action to be taken in respect of the concrete which is represented by the test-cubes
which fail to meet either of the requirements shall be determined by the Engineer. This
may range from qualified acceptance in less severe cases, to rejection and removal in the
most severe cases.
The Engineer may also require the Contractor at his own expenses to prove statistically
the strength, by boring out cores and testing them according to a programme approved by
the Engineer. The age of the concrete and degree of hardening at the time of the new
testing shall be considered. The equivalent cylinder/cube strength shall comply the
minimum characteristic strength or as decided by the Engineer.
viii) Control of Hardening
If the Contractor wants to remove forms and scaffolding earlier than specified herein,
extra test specimens shall be cast by the Contractor in accordance with the instruction of
Page 1008
UNOPS LKOC
the Engineer. These specimens shall be tested the day before removal of the form. On
the basis of the test results the Engineer shall take the final decision on the time for the
removal of forms.
For prestressed concrete, extra test specimens shall be cast by the Contractor in
accordance with the instructions of the Engineer, to determine the time for tensioning the
tendons. On the basis of the test results, the Engineer shall decide upon the time for
prestressing the concrete.
1001.8.Mixing of Concrete
Delete subsections (d) and substitute with the following :-
d) Central Plant Mixers
These mixers shall be of approved drum type capable of combining the aggregate,
cement and water into a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass within the specified mixing
period and of discharging the mixture without segregation. Central plant mixers shall be
equipped with an acceptable timing device that will not permit the batch to be discharged
until the specified mixing time has elapsed. The water system for a central mixer shall be
either a calibrated measuring tank or a meter and shall not necessarily be an integral part
of the mixer.
The mixers shall be cleaned at suitable intervals. They shall be examined daily for
changes in interior condition. The pick up and throw-over blades in the drum shall be
replaced when they have lost 10% of their depth.
In addition to the requirements for mixers at local sites detailed above, central plant
mixers which have a capacity of between 2 and 5 cubic metres, or greater than 5 cubic
metres, should have a minimum mixing time of 90 and 120 seconds respectively,
provided tests indicate that the concrete produced is equivalent in strength and uniformity
to that attained as stated in the preceding paragraphs.
Mixed concrete shall be transported from the central mixing plant to the site of work in
agitator trucks or, upon written permission of the Engineer, in non-agitator trucks.
Delivery of concrete shall be so regulated that placing is at a continuous rate unless
delayed by the placing operations. The intervals between delivery of batches shall not be
so great as to allow the concrete in place to harden partially, and in no case shall such an
interval exceed 30 minutes.
Add additional section as follows:
f) Agitator Trucks
Unless otherwise permitted in writing by the Engineer, agitator trucks shall have
watertight revolving drums suitably mounted and shall be capable of transporting and
discharging the concrete without segregation. The agitating speed of the drum shall not
be less than two or more than six revolutions per minute. The volume of mixed concrete
permitted in the drum shall not exceed the manufacturer’s rating nor exceed 80% the
gross volume of the drum.
Upon approval by the Engineer, open-top, revolving-blade truck mixers may be used in
lieu of agitating trucks for transportation of central plant mixed concrete.
Page 1009
UNOPS LKOC
Gross volume of agitator bodies expressed in cubic feet or cubic metres shall be supplied
by the mixer manufacturer. The interval between introduction of water into the mixer drum
and final discharge of the concrete from the agitator shall not exceed 45 minutes. During
this interval the mix shall be agitated continuously.
g) Non-Agitator Trucks
Bodies of non-agitating equipment shall be smooth, water-tight metal containers equipped

with gates that will permit control of the discharge of the concrete. Covers shall be
provided when needed for protection against the weather. The non-agitating equipment
shall permit delivery of the concrete to the site of the work in a thoroughly mixed and
uniform mass with a satisfactory degree of discharge. Uniformity shall be satisfactory if
samples from the one-quarter and three quarter points of the load do not differ by more
than 30 mm in slump. Discharge of concrete shall be completed within 30 minutes after
the introduction of the mixing water to the cement and aggregate.
h) Truck or Transit Mixers

These shall be equipped with electrically actuated counters by which the number of
revolutions of the drum or blades may readily be verified and the counters shall be
actuated at the commencement of mixing operations at designated mixing speeds. The
mixer when loaded shall not be filled to more than 60% of the drum gross volume. The
mixer shall be capable of combining the ingredients of the concrete into a thoroughly
mixed and uniform mass and of discharging the concrete with a satisfactory degree of
uniformity. Except when intended for use exclusively as agitators, truck mixers shall be
provided with a water measuring device to measure accurately the quantity of water for
each batch. The delivered amount of water shall be within plus or minus 1% of the
indicated amount.
Truck mixers may be used for complete mixing at the batch plant and as truck agitators
for delivery of concrete to job sites, or they may be used for complete mixing of the
concrete at the job site. They shall either be a closed watertight revolving drum or an
open top revolving blade or paddle type.
The amount of mixing shall be designated in number of revolutions of the mixer drum.
When a truck mixer is used for complete mixing, each batch of concrete shall be mixed
for between 70 and 100 revolutions of the drum or blades at the rate of rotation
designated by the manufacturer of the equipment as the “mixing speed”. Such
designation shall appear on a metal plate attached to the mixer. If the batch is at least 0.5
cubic metres less than guaranteed capacity, the number of revolutions at mixing speed
may be reduced to not less than 50. Mixing in excess of 100 revolutions shall be at the
agitating speed. All materials, including the mixing water, shall be in the mixer drum
before actuating the revolution counter which will indicate the number of revolutions of the
drum or blades.
When wash water (flush water) is used as a portion of the mixing water for the
succeeding batch, it shall be accurately measured and taken into account in determining
the amount of additional mixing water required. When wash water is carried on the truck
mixer, it shall be carried in a compartment separate from the one used for carrying or
measuring the mixing water. The Engineer will specify the amount of wash or flush water,
when permitted any may specify a “dry” drum if wash water is used without measurement
or without supervision.
When a truck is used for complete mixing at the batch plant, mixing operations shall begin
within 30 minutes after the cement has been added to the aggregate. After mixing, the
Page 1010
UNOPS LKOC
truck mixer shall be used as an agitator, when transporting concrete, at the speed
designated by the manufacturer of the equipment as agitating speed. Concrete discharge
shall be completed within 45 minutes after the addition of the cement to the aggregates.
Each batch of concrete delivered at the job site shall be accompanied by a time slip
issued at the batching plant, bearing the time of departure there from. When the truck
mixer is used for the complete mixing of the concrete at the job site, the mixing operation
shall begin within 30 minutes after the cement has been added to the aggregates.
The rate of discharge of the plastic concrete from the mixer drum shall be controlled by
the speed of rotation of the drum in the discharge direction with the discharge gate fully
open.
1001.9. Placing and Compaction of Concrete
The temperature of concrete at the time of placing shall not exceed 35oC. In preparation
for the placing of concrete all sawdust, chips and other construction debris and
extraneous matter shall be removed from the interior of forms. Struts, stays and braces,
serving temporarily to hold the forms in correct shape and alignment, pending the placing
of concrete at their locations, shall be removed when the concrete placing has reached an
elevation rendering their service unnecessary. These temporary members shall be
entirely removed from the forms and not buried in the concrete.
Concrete must reach its final position in the forms within 20 minutes of the completion of
mixing, or as directed by the Engineer.
Concrete shall be placed so as to avoid segregation (from lower gradient to upper

gradient) of the materials and the displacement of the reinforcement. The use of long
troughs, chutes and pipes for conveying concrete from the mixer to the forms shall be
permitted only on written authorisation of the Engineer. In case an inferior quality of
concrete is produced by the use of such conveyors, the Engineer may order
discontinuance of their use and the institution of a satisfactory method of placing.
Open troughs and chutes shall be of metal or metal lined. Where long steep slopes are
required, the chutes shall be equipped with baffles or be in short lengths that reverse the
direction of movement.
All chutes, troughs and pipes shall be kept clean and free from coatings of hardened
concrete by thoroughly flushing with water after each run. Water used for flushing shall be
discharged clear of the structure.
When placing operations would involve dropping the concrete more than 1.5 m, it shall be
deposited through sheet metal or other approved pipes. As far as practicable, the pipes
shall be kept full of concrete during placing and their lower ends shall be kept buried in
the newly placed concrete. After initial set of the concrete, the forms shall not be jarred
and no strain shall be placed on the ends of reinforcement bars which project.
Concrete, during and immediately after depositing, shall be thoroughly compacted. The
compaction shall be done by mechanical vibration subject of the following provisions:
1) The vibration shall be internal unless special authorisation of other methods is given by
the Engineer or as provided herein.
Page 1011
UNOPS LKOC
2) Vibrators shall be of a type and design approved by the Engineer. They shall be
capable of transmitting vibration to the concrete at frequencies of not less than 4,500
impulses per minute.
3) The intensity of vibration shall be such as to visibly affect a mass of concrete of 20 mm

slump over a radius of at least 450 mm.
4) The Contractor shall provide a sufficient number of vibrators to properly compact each
batch immediately after it is placed in the forms.
5) Vibrators shall be manipulated to thoroughly work the concrete around the

reinforcement and embedded fixtures, and into the corners and angles of the forms.
Vibration shall be applied at the point of deposit and in the area of freshly deposited
concrete. The vibrators shall be inserted and withdrawn from the concrete slowly. The
vibration shall be of sufficient duration and intensity to thoroughly compact the concrete,
but shall not be continued so as to cause segregation. Vibration shall not be continued at
any one point to the extent that localised areas of grout are formed.
Application of vibrators shall be at points uniformly spaced and not further apart than
twice the radius over which the vibration is visibly effective.
6) Vibration shall not be applied directly or through the reinforcement to sections or layers
of concrete which have hardened to the degree that the concrete ceases to be plastic
under vibration. It shall not be used to make concrete flow in the forms over distances so
great as to cause segregation, and vibrators shall not be used to transport concrete in the
forms.
7) Vibration shall be supplemented by such spading as is necessary to ensure smooth

surfaces and dense concrete along form surfaces and in corners and locations impossible
to reach with the vibrators.
8) The provisions of this Section shall also apply to precast piling, concrete cribbing and
other precast members except that, if approved by the Engineer, the manufacturer’s
methods of vibration may be used.
Concrete shall be placed in horizontal layers not more than 600 mm thick except as
hereinafter provided. When less than a complete layer is placed in one operation, it shall
be terminated in a vertical bulkhead. Each layer shall be placed and compacted before
the preceding batch has taken initial set to prevent injury to the green concrete and avoid
surfaces of separation between the batches. Each layer shall be compacted so as to
avoid the formation of a construction joint with a preceding layer which has not taken
initial set.
When the placing of concrete is temporarily discontinued, the concrete, after becoming
firm enough to retain its form, shall be cleaned of laitance and other objectionable
material to a sufficient depth to expose sound concrete. To avoid visible joints as far as
possible upon exposed faces, the top surface of the concrete adjacent to the forms shall
be smoothed with a trowel. Where a “feather edge” might be produced at a construction
joint, as in the sloped top surface of a wing wall, an inset form shall be used to produce a
blocked out portion in the preceding layer which shall produce an edge thickness of not
less than 150 mm in the succeeding layer. Work shall not be discontinued within 450 mm
of the top of any face, unless provision has been made for a coping less then 450 mm
thick, in which case, if permitted by the Engineer, a construction joint may be made at the
under side of the coping.
Page 1012
UNOPS LKOC
Immediately following the discontinuance of placing concrete all accumulations of mortar

splashed upon the reinforcement steel and the surfaces of forms shall be removed. Dried
mortar chips and dust shall not be puddled into the unset concrete. If the accumulations
are not removed prior to the concrete becoming set, care shall be exercised not to injure
or break the concrete-steel bond at and near the surface of the concrete, while cleaning
the reinforcement steel.
For simple spans, concrete shall preferably be deposited by beginning at the centre of the
span and working from the centre toward the ends. Concrete in girders shall be deposited
uniformly for the full length of the girder and brought up evenly in horizontal layers. For
continuous spans, the concrete placing sequence shall be as shown on the plans or
agreed on by the Engineer.
Concrete in slab and girder haunches less than 1.0 metre in height shall be placed at the
same time as that in the girder stem.
Concrete in slab spans shall be placed in one continuous operation for each span unless
otherwise provided.
Concrete in T-beam or deck girder spans may be placed in one continuous operation if
permitted by the Engineer.
Concrete in columns and pier shafts shall be placed in one continuous operation, unless
otherwise directed.
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, no concrete shall be placed in the

superstructure until the column forms have been stripped sufficiently to determine the
character of the concrete in the columns. The load of the superstructure shall not be
applied to the supporting structures until they have been in place at least 14 days, unless
otherwise permitted by the Engineer.
Pneumatic placing of concrete shall be permitted only if authorised by the Engineer. The
equipment shall be so arranged that vibration does not damage freshly placed concrete.
Where concrete is conveyed and placed by pneumatic means the equipment shall be
suitable in kind and adequate in capacity for the work. The machine shall be located as
close as practicable to the place of deposit. The position of the discharge end of the line
shall not be more than 3 metres from the point of deposit. The discharge lines shall be
horizontal or inclined upwards from the machine. At the conclusion of placement the
entire equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned.
Placement of concrete by pumping shall be permitted only if authorised by the Engineer.

The equipment shall be so arranged that vibrations do not damage freshly placed
concrete. Where concrete is conveyed and placed by mechanically applied pressure, the
equipment shall be suitable in kind and adequate in capacity for the work. The operation
of the pump shall be such that a continuous stream of concrete without air pockets is
produced. When pumping is completed, the concrete remaining in the pipeline, if it is to
be used, shall be ejected in such a manner that there is not contamination of the concrete
or separation of the ingredients. After this operation, the entire equipment shall be
thoroughly cleaned.
Add additional Paragraph as follows:
Perforations and Embedment of Special Devices
Page 1013
UNOPS LKOC
The Contractor is responsible for determining in advance of making any concrete pours,
all requirements for perforation of concrete sections or embedment therein of special
devices of other trades, such as conduits, pipes, weep holes, drainage pipes, fastenings,
etc. Any concrete poured without prior provision having been made, shall be subject to
correction at the Contractor’s expense.
Special devices to be embedded:
• Expansion joints
• Drain outlets including fixing bolts for down pipes
• Bolts and inserts for sign posts
• Bolts and inserts for various purposes regarding inspection and maintenance as
directed by the Engineer
Other devices not mentioned above shall be shown on the Drawings, or directed by the
Engineer. The inserts and fittings should conform to Sections 5.9 and 5.10 of this
Specification.
Finishing Concrete Surfaces
One of the following types of finishing shall be applied to concrete surfaces:
Type A – Concrete Deck
Immediately after placing concrete, concrete decks shall be struck off using templates to
provide proper crowns and shall be finished smooth to the correct levels. Finish shall be
slightly but uniformly roughened by brushing. The finished surface shall not vary more
then 10 mm from a 3 metre straight edge placed in any direction on the roadway.
Deviation from the grade line shall not be more than + 30 mm in any 20 metre length.
Type B - Kerb and Sidewalk Surface
Exposed faces of kerbs and sidewalks shall be finished to true lines and grades. The kerb
surface shall be wood floated to a smooth but not slippery finish. Sidewalk surfaces shall
be slightly but uniformly roughened by brushing.
Type C - Ordinary Finish
An ordinary finish is defined as the finish left on a surface after the removal of the forms
when all holes left by form ties have been filled, and any minor surface defects have been
repaired. The surface shall be true and even, free from depressions or projections.
The concrete in bridge seats, caps, and tops of walls shall be struck off with a straight
edge and floated to true grade. Under no circumstances shall the use of mortar topping
for concrete surfaces be permitted.
Type D - Rubbed Finish
After the removal of forms the rubbing of concrete shall be started as soon as its condition
permits. Immediately before starting this work the concrete shall be kept thoroughly
saturated with water for a minimum period of three hours. Sufficient time shall have
elapsed before the wetting down to allow the mortar used in patching to have thoroughly
set. A medium coarse carborundum stone shall be used for rubbing a small amount of
mortar on the face. The mortar used shall be composed of cement and fine aggregate
Page 1014
UNOPS LKOC
mixed in the same proportions as that used in the concrete being finished. Rubbing shall
be continued until all form marks, projections, and irregularities have been removed, all
voids filled, and a uniform surface has been obtained. The paste produced by this rubbing
shall be left in place at this time. The final finish shall be obtained by rubbing with a fine
carborundum stone and water until the entire surface is of a smooth texture and uniform
colour.
After the final rubbing has been completed and the surface has dried, burlap shall be
used to remove loose powder. The final surface shall be free from unsound patches,
paste, powder and objectionable marks.
Type E - Bush hammer Finish
Bush hammering shall be carried out by treating the surface with an approved heavy duty
power hammer fitted with a multi-point tool which shall be operated over the surface to
remove 5 to 6 mm of concrete paste and expose maximum areas of coarse aggregate.
Aggregate left embedded shall not be fractured or loose. 25 mm wide bands at all corners
and arises shall be left as cast. The finish surface shall be even and of uniform
appearance and shall be washed with water upon completion.
Type F - Ribbed Finish
Ribs shall be vertical and to the dimensions shown on the Drawings. The direction of the
grain of the timber forming the ribs shall be vertical.
Type G – Prestressed Concrete Girder Surface
Exposed faces of Prestressed Girder (i.e. Bottom and side surface) shall be finished to
true lines and grades. The Prestressed Girder surface (i.e. Bottom and side surface) shall
be wood floated to a smooth and slippery finish. Top surfaces shall be slightly but
uniformly roughened by brushing.
Construction Joints
A) General
Construction joints shall be made only where located on the plans or shown in the pouring
schedule, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. If not detailed on the plans, or in
the case of emergency, construction joints shall be placed as directed by the Engineer.
Shear keys or inclined reinforcement shall be used where necessary to transmit shear or
bond the two sections together.
B) Bonding
Before depositing new concrete on or against concrete which has hardened, the forms
shall be re tightened. The surface of the hardened concrete shall be roughened as
required by the Engineer, in a manner that does not leave loosened particles of aggregate
or damaged concrete at the surface. It shall be thoroughly cleaned of foreign matter and
laitance, and saturated with water. To ensure an excess of mortar at the juncture of the
hardened and the newly deposited concrete, the cleaned and saturated surfaces,
including vertical and inclined surfaces, no grout shall be used at the interface of new and
old concrete. The Placing of concrete shall be carried continuously from joint to joint. The
Page 1015
UNOPS LKOC
face edges of all joints which are exposed to view shall be carefully finished true to line
and elevation.
1001.10. Underwater Concreting
Concrete shall not be deposited in water except with the approval of the Engineer and
under his immediate supervision; and in this case the method of placing shall be as
defined in this Section.
Concrete placed under water shall be carefully placed in a compact mass, in its final
position, by means of a tremie tube and shall not be disturbed after being deposited.
Special care must be exercised to maintain still water at the point of deposit. Concrete
shall not be placed in running water. The method of depositing concrete shall be so
regulated as to produce approximately horizontal surfaces.
Concrete seals shall be placed in one continuous operation. When a tremie tube or pipe
is used, it shall consist of a tube or pipe not less than 150 mm in diameter. All joints in the
tube shall be watertight. The means of supporting the tremie tube shall be such as to
permit free movement of the discharge end over the entire top of the concrete and to
permit its being lowered rapidly when necessary to choke off or retard the flow. The
tremie tube shall be filled by a method that prevents washing of the concrete. The
discharge end shall be completely submerged in concrete at all times and the tremie tube
shall be kept full. Concrete slump shall not be less than 200 mm. Dewatering shall
proceed only when the concrete seal is considered strong enough to withstand any
pressure to be exerted upon it. This time shall be decided by the Engineer.
All laitance or other unsatisfactory material shall be removed from the exposed surface by
scraping, jetting, chipping or other means, which do not injure the seal unduly.
1001.11. Curing of Concreting
Removal of Scaffolding and Formwork
Forms and scaffolding shall not be removed without the approval of the Engineer. The
Engineer’s approval shall not relieve the Contractor of his Contract responsibilities. Any
kentledge blocks and bracing shall be removed at the same time as the forms and in no
case shall any portion of the wood forms be left in the concrete.
Forms used on exposed vertical faces shall remain in place for periods which shall be
determined by the Engineer and normally not less than 3 days. Supporting scaffolding
and forms under slabs, beams and girders shall normally remain in place until the full
required strength of the concrete has been obtained. If a shorter period is requested, this
may be permitted by the Engineer. In such case, special test specimens (see Section
1001.7) shall be cast to monitor the hardening. All structures shall be fully stripped before
adjacent structures are cast.
Repair of Concrete
As soon as the form has been stripped, the Contractor shall advise the Engineer who
shall inspect the concrete before any improvement of the surface takes place. All wire or
metal devices used for securing the formwork which project from or appear on the surface
Page 1016
UNOPS LKOC
of the finished concrete shall be removed or cut back to at least a depth equal to the
required reinforcement cover. All holes and pockets so formed shall be painted with an
epoxy bonding agent and prior to filing with cement mortar mixed in the same proportions
as the fine aggregate to cement of the concrete mix used for that particular section of the
structure. Excessive honeycombing shall be sufficient to cause rejection of portions of the
structure containing this honeycombing. The Contractor, on receipt of written orders from
the Engineer, shall remove and rebuild such portions of the structure at his own expense.
Smaller honeycombing and other defects can be repaired using epoxy grout if permitted
by the Engineer. Structural, maintenance and aesthetical points of view shall be taken
into consideration before such approval, if any, may be given. The method of repair shall
be approved by the Engineer and an extension of period for a certain part of the
performance bond may be required.
1001.13 Measurement and payment
a. Measurement
This work shall be measured as the volume in cubic metres of concrete of the specified
strength placed and finished complete and accepted. Volumes shall be computed from
the dimensions shown on the Drawings or as ordered by the Engineer. No deductions
shall be made from the measured quantities for drainage, openings or pipes less than
300mm in diameter, conduits, chamfers, reinforcing bars, expansion/Construction joints
or pile heads embedded in the concrete. No measurements shall be considered for
transportation from batching plant to casting location or preparing, fitting, fixing of
formworks/ scaffolding deemed to be inclusive to the unit rate.
b. Payment
Payment will be at the contract unit rate for each class of concrete and shall be full
compensation of labour, formwork preparation, fittings/fixing, tools, plants and other,
curing etc complete and incidental required to complete the work except the cement
and formwork plywood materials. Contractor shall supply necessary coarse aggregate
(Metal), sand, water, ice where necessary, retarder, temporary supports/ propping etc
complete. All basic construction materials such as Cement, and form works shall be
supplied by UNOPS from stock yard and contractor shall be responsible for local
carriage from stock yard to the mixing plant and pouring i/c labour to the structural
member to complete the job.
Pay Items shall be:
Pay item Description Pay unit

1001 (1) Pouring of concrete at Pile, Pile/Pier Cap including Cubic metre
the labour and necessary equipments, plants/
materials. Except supply of Cement and form works
plywood materials. The unit rate is inclusive of the
labour & necessary equipments for fitting/fixing of
scaffolding and formworks preparing, fittings/fixing
Page 1017
UNOPS LKOC
with appropriate supply of scaffolding/ propping and

water leakage arrangements etc complete
1001 (2) Pouring of concrete at Abutment, wing wall, back Cubic metre
wall, approach slab, deck slab, curbs/utility ducts,
rails and rail posts, Prestressed Girder etc. including
the labour and necessary equipments, plants/
materials Except supply of Cement, and form work
plywoord materials. The unit rate is inclusive of the
labour & necessary equipments for fitting/fixing of
scaffolding and formworks preparing, fittings/fixing
with appropriate supply of scaffolding/ propping and
water leakage arrangements etc complete
1001 (3) Pouring of concrete for ancillary works (Drains, Cubic metre
drain cover slab, footpath cover slab, guard post,
etc. including the labour and necessary equipments,
plants/ materials Except supply of Cement, and form
works plywood materials. The unit rate is inclusive
of the labour & necessary equipments for
fitting/fixing of scaffolding and formworks preparing,
fittings/fixing with appropriate supply of scaffolding/
propping and water leakage arrangements etc
complete
1002. STEEL REINFORCEMENT FOR CONCRETE STRUCTURES
1002.1.Description
No change.
1002.2.Materials
Supply of materials:
• UNOPS shall supply of reinforcement steel bars to the contractor at site
• Contractor shall transport the materials from reinforcement stock yard to
fabrication location and all other necessary local transports, supply all materials
related to the fabrications including binding wires of the reinforcing bars, required
nails, tools and equipments.
Delete subsections (d) and (e), and substitute with the following :-
(d) Hot rolled and cold worked steel bars shall comply with BS 4449 except that no
bar shall contain a flash weld.
(e) Hard drawn mild steel wire shall comply with BS 4482.
(f) Steel fabric reinforcement shall comply with BS 4483 and shall be delivered to site
in flat mats or pre-bent.
Page 1018
UNOPS LKOC
(g) Ordering Material
The name of the proposed supplier (or suppliers) of the reinforcement shall be submitted
as soon as possible to the Engineer for his approval. The Contractor shall also submit all
relevant data on the steel required by the Engineer, such as breaking strength, yield
strength, characteristics on elongation, chemical composition etc.
Copies of orders placed shall be submitted to the Engineer.
Bar reinforcement shall be transported in standard bundles, tagged and marked in

accordance with the Code of Standard Practice of the Concrete Reinforcing Steel
Institute.
No steel shall be delivered without a manufacturer’s certificate guaranteeing the yield

stress, which shall be submitted to the Engineer.
The steel shall be stored on Site and marked in a way that later enables identification of
the steel corresponding to each certificate.
(h) Tests
In addition to those data on steel to be submitted by the Contractor, specified test results
for rebar brought on site shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
The Contractor shall cut out steel samples as directed by the Engineer and these
samples shall be tested according to the Engineer’s instructions by an approved Testing
Institution. Expenses incurred in connection with cutting out, transporting and testing of
the samples shall be paid for by the Contractor. In general, two samples shall be tested
from each 50 tons of a particular size of reinforcement delivered to the site.
1002.3.Construction Requirements
a. Protection & Storage

No change.
b. Cutting & Bending

Add to end of paragraph the following :-
No Secondary straitening and bending of HTS bars will be allowed. Stirrups and tie bars
shall be bent around a pin having a diameter not less than four times the minimum
thickness of the bar. Bends for other bars, where full tension in the bar may occur, shall
be made around a pin having a diameter not less than twenty times the bar diameter. The
bars shall be cut and bent within the tolerances given in BS 4466. The Contractor shall
be responsible for the correct fit of the bars and the achievement of the required cover as
given on the Drawings or established by the Engineer.
c. Placing & fixing of reinforcement

Delete the sentence of the first paragraph: ‘As far as possible,
bar…………maximum tensile stress’ and substitute the following :-
Page 1019
UNOPS LKOC
Reinforcement shall be furnished in the lengths indicated on the Drawings. When the
Contractor wishes to use more splices than are indicated and/or necessary, the
Contractor shall furnish Working Drawings to the Engineer for approval in accordance
with the guidelines provided on the Contract Drawings. If such additional splices are
approved, the extra weight occasioned by such splices shall not be included in the
measurement of reinforcement for payment.
All splices for high yield deformed steel bars and mild steel plain steel bars shall have lap
lengths as shown on the Drawings. Lap splices shall generally be located at points of
minimum tension in bars. Except where otherwise shown on the Drawings lap splices
shall be made with the bars placed in contact and securely wired together.
Delete the 3rd paragraph and substitute the following :-
Substitutions of bars shall be permitted only with specific authorisation by the Engineer
and at the expense of the Contractor. If bars are substituted they shall have a cross
sectional area equivalent to the design area, or larger. If substitutions of bars are
permitted, the Contractor shall produce working drawings and reinforcing detailing at his
own expense and to the approval of the Engineer.
d) Binding Wire: Reinforcement binding wire shall be 24 BWG galvanized iron wire.
1002.4.Measurement & Payment
a. Measurement
Delete the sentence of the paragraph: ‘Wastage over laps,………rate for
reinforcement’ and substitute the following :-
In computing the weight to be measured, the theoretical weights of bars of the cross
section shown on the Drawings or authorized shall be used. The weight shall be
calculated based on a constant mass of 0.00785 kg/mm² per metre run.
The computed weight shall not include the extra material incurred when bars larger than
those specified are used, or the extra material necessary for splices when bars shorter
than those specified are used with the permission of the Engineer, or the weight of any
devices used to support or fasten the reinforcement in the correct position including any
necessary chairs.
b. Payment
Payment shall be allowed for lap splices not shown when the bars are longer than 12
metres. Only one lap splice per every started 12 metres will be paid for.
The payment shall be full compensation for the fabrication, placing of the reinforcement
excluding the supply of Reinforcing bars but including all binding materials, spacer bars,
Support (Be-bar chair), cutting, and bending, labour, and equipment, tools, cleaning of the
re-bars / foreign materials and incidentals necessary to complete the work.

1002 (1) Transport the materials from reinforcement stock yard to Tonnes
fabrication location, Cutting, bending, fabrication, placing/
installation the reinforcing steel bars in position for Pile works
Page 1020
UNOPS LKOC
by using of necessary equipments , excluding supply of

reinforcing steel bars as drawing for all diameter
fabrication location, Cutting, bending, fabrication, placing the
reinforcing steel bars in position for Pile cap by using of
necessary equipments works excluding supply of reinforcing
steel bars as drawing for all diameter
fabrication location, Cutting, bending, fabrication placing the
reinforcing steel bars in position for Abutment, wing wall,
back walls or any vertical walls by using of necessary
equipments, excluding supply of reinforcing steel bars as
drawing for all diameter
installation the reinforcing steel bars in position for Deck,
approach slab, curbs, rail post/rail bar and any horizontal
members by using of necessary equipments, excluding
supply of reinforcing steel bars as drawing for all diameter
installation the reinforcing steel bars in position for Ancillary
works (Drain, all covers), guard, Pile works by using of
necessary equipments, excluding supply of reinforcing steel
bars as drawing for all diameter
1003. PRESTRESSING FOR STRUCTURES

Delete all sections and add these following sections:
1003.1. DESCRIPTION
This work shall consist of prestressing precast or cast-on-place concrete by furnishing,

placing and tensioning of prestressing steel in accordance with details shown on the
drawing and as specified in these specifications and the special provisions. It includes
prestressing by post-tensioning methods.
This work shall include the furnishing and installation of any appurtenant items necessary
for the particular prestressing system to be used, including but not limited to ducts,
anchorage assemblies and grout used for pressure grouting ducts.
For cast-in-place prestressed concrete, the term "member" as used in this Section shall
be considered to mean the concrete that is to be prestressed.
When members are to be constructed with part of the reinforcement pretensioned and
part post-tensioned, the applicable requirement of this specification shall apply to each
method.
Page 1021
UNOPS LKOC
Construction of prestressed concrete members of highway bridges requires extensive and

thorough knowledge of the science and technique involved and shall be entrusted only to
qualified engineers with adequate practical experience in this field of bridge engineering
and who are capable of ensuring proper execution of work. It shall be ensured that such
an engineer is always present during the prestressing operation of the structural
members.
Concreting for the construction of prestressed concrete members of highway bridges shall
conform to the requirements of Clause 1001 "Concrete Works" and Clause 1002 "Steel
Reinforcement for Structures" in so far as the requirements of these Clauses apply and
are not specifically modified by requirements set forth herein.
1003.2. MATERIALS
1003.2.1 Supply of Materials
Material to be supplied by the Employer (UNOPS) at site specified in the Special

Provisions:
• Elastomeric bearings and its accessories

• High strength strand for Prestressing Tendons.
• Ducts, support accessories, couplers, air vents for Pre-stressing
• Anchorages
• Form works and props (Full set of scaffoldings)
Contractor shall be responsible for local transportation from the stock yard to working
place for the issued materials by the Employer and Material to be supplied by the
Contractor are:
• High early strength cement and admixtures for grout

• Grout fittings
• Other incidental materials as required by the plans or specifications.
1003.2.2 Handling and Storage of Materials
Elastomeric Bearings
The elastomeric bearings and their metal components shall be stored clear of the ground
in a storage shed until required for installation. Particular care shall be taken to prevent
damage to the stainless steel surfaces of the bearings and the teflon coated bearing
pads. The protective wrapping around the stainless steel surfaces and teflon coated
bearing pads shall not be removed until immediately prior to the installation of the
bearings or shall not be removed at all if so directed by the Engineer in the field.
Anchorages
The anchorages shall be stored clear of the ground in an storage shed until the
anchorages or their components are required for installation. Care shall be taken to
prevent damage to the high tensile steel anchorages and in particular the formation of
nicks, bruises or other surface damage.
High Strength Strand
High strength strand shall be stored clear of the ground in a storage shed. The protective
packing around the reless packs shall not be removed until the strand is required for the
Page 1022
UNOPS LKOC
fabrication of the cables. The high strength strand shall at all times be protected from
corrosion and contamination by oil, dirt or other materials which may adversely affect the
performance of the cables.
Ducts
Ducts, couplers and air vents shall be stored clear of the ground in a storage shed until
required for installation. Care shall be taken to prevent damage to the ducts or their
components, making sure that no change occurs in the cross-sectioned shape of the
ducts and duct components.
Void Forms
Void forms shall be stored clear of the ground in a storage shed until the forms are
required for installation. The void forms shall be handled with care in order to prevent
weakening of the forms by physical damage.
Replacement of Damaged Materials
Material supplied by UNOPS to the Contractor, which in the opinion of the Engineer has
been damaged or otherwise rendered unusable by improper storage or handling by the
Contractor, shall be replaced by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense.
Falsework
Notwithstanding the reference to the falsework having to be supported on piling as per

Section Falsework of the "Specifications for Reinforced Concrete", the use of steel
scaffolding on mud sills will be permitted.
In the event that the Contractor elects to use steel scaffolding on mud sills, the Engineer
will require that selected parts of the falsework be tested to the estimated dead load plus
construction load in order to establish anticipated settlement. The Contractor shall provide
the Engineer with all pertinent data required for the determination of the construction
loads.
Unless there is a marked difference in the ground conditions under the structure, one test
load will be required only for falsework supported on natural ground and one test load for
falsework supported on fill.
The test loads shall not be carried out too far in advance of the concrete placing
operations to preclude the possibility of a change in the state of the natural ground and fill
from that at the time of the tests. In the event that a change in the state of the natural
ground or fill does take place between the time of the test and concrete placing
operations, the Engineer may require that the load test be repeated. The falsework shall
be arranged to provide uniform bearing pressure from the mud sills to the supporting
ground or fill to preclude the possibility of differential settlement of the falsework.
The field test loading of steel scaffolding on mud sills to establish anticipated settlement
shall in no way relieve the Contractor of the requirement to have the falsework designed
by a Registered Professional Engineer. The cutting or stepping of the bridge slopes to
facilitate the placing of mud sills shall be kept to a minimum, and the level surface
required for placing the steel scaffolding shall be obtained by means of timber cribs. All
cuts or steps in the slopes which may be permitted by the Engineer to facilitate the
erection of falsework shall be backfilled to the original cross-section and compaction by
the Contractor at his own expense after the removal of the falsework.
Page 1023
UNOPS LKOC
Where required by plans or Special Provisions, the Contractor shall provide openings in
the falsework for highway or railway traffic to clearances as shown on the plans. The
openings in the falsework shall be designed and constructed so that the falsework will be
stable if subjected to impact by vehicles. No vehicles will be allowed through a falsework
unless a properly designed and constructed opening is provided.
In addition to the requirements for falsework removal, falsework shall not be removed until
the Engineer is satisfied that the stressing operations have been satisfactorily carried out.
All damage to the structure resulting from the removal of the falsework shall be repaired
by the Contractor at his own expense to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Formworks
All Form work shall be of waterproof Plywood or steel and shall be built mortar tight and
rigid enough to maintain the concrete in position during placing, compacting, setting and
hardening.
The Form work shall be rigidly constructed, supported on a firm bearing base, and braced
so as to retain its shape and position and shall be set to the specified lines and levels.
The props shall be on firm ground over the compacted Coffer Dam and over the minimum
10mm thick steel plates or timber plank of adequate size to avoid any uneven settlement
during concreting operation. A design of Proping/shuttering materials calculation must be
submitted by the contractor for approval before start the formworks.
Metal ties or anchorages or P cones within the form shall be constructed to permit their
removal to a depth of 50mm from the face without disturbing the concrete, and shall be of
such design that the size of the cavity left is minimized.
In any case Timber Form works shall NOT be allowed to use.
Steel Form work shall be rigid with no surface blemish that will impair the quality of finish
of the concrete surface.
Forms shall be sufficiently tight to prevent loss of mortar from concrete.
Molding strips shall be placed in the corners of forms to produce edges on permanently
exposed concrete surfaces as shown on the drawings.
Except where otherwise directed, all forms shall be coated with oil on the concrete face
side. The oil used must be non-staining and have no adverse effect on paint or any other
finish.
All Form work shall be approved by the Engineer before placing of concrete commences.
1003.2.1 Prestressing Tendons
Prestressing tendons shall be high tensile seven-wire strand shall conform to the
requirements of the following specifications.
Strand
Uncoated seven-wire strand shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M203 (ASTM
A416 – 85 Low-Relaxation) shall apply when specified.
Page 1024
UNOPS LKOC
All prestressing steel shall be protected against physical damage and rust or other results
of corrosion at all times from manufacture to grouting. Prestressing steel shall also be
free of deleterious material such as grease, oil, wax or paint. Prestressing steel that has
sustained physical damage at any time shall be rejected. The development of pitting or
other results of corrosion, other than rust stain, shall be cause for rejection.
Prestressing steel shall be packaged in containers or shipping forms for the protection of
the strand against physical damage and corrosion during shipping and storage. A
corrosion inhibitor which prevents rust or other results of corrosion shall be placed in the
package or form, or shall be incorporated in a corrosion inhibitor carrier type packaging
material, or when permitted by the Engineer, may be applied directly to the steel. The
corrosion inhibitor shall have no deleterious effect on the steel or concrete or bond
strength of steel to concrete or grout. Packaging or forms damaged from any cause shall
be immediately replaced or restored to original condition.
The shipping package or form shall be clearly marked with a statement that the package
contains high-tensile prestressing steel and the type or corrosion inhibitor used, including
the date packaged.
Special care will be taken by the Contractor to store the H. T. steel wires under suitable
shed as approved by the Engineer. He or his authorised representative shall always have
an easy access to the store yard for inspecting the H.T. wire/strands and satisfying
themselves regarding the condition thereof. The Contractor shall scrupulously follow any
modifications suggested by them.
All high tensile steel for prestressing work shall be stored about 30 cm clear of he ground
and protected from the weather, from splashes of any other liquid. It shall also be
invariably wrapped in gunny cloth, tarpaper or any other suitable wrapping material that
are chemically neutral. If it is required to be stored at site it shall be suitably covered.
Suitable and effective protection of the prestressing steel against corrosion and any other
mechanical damage shall be ensured. The prestressing steel shall be protected from the
splashes of the cutting operation of any oxy-acetylene torch or arc welding processes in
the vicinity. In no circumstances any prestressing tendons after manufacture be subjected
to any welding operation or on site heat treatment or metallic coating such as galvanizing.
As and when required by the Engineer, the contractor shall arrange to get the necessary
tests carried out at no extra cost to the Department to ensure that the physical
characteristics have not been impaired in any way.
Stock piling of H.T. steel in the open at the work site will not be allowed under any
circumstances.
1003.2.2 Post - Tensioning Anchorages and Couplers
All anchorage and couplers shall develop at least 95 percent of the minimum specified
ultimate strength of the prestressing steel, when tested in an unbonded state, without
exceeding anticipated set. The coupling of tendons shall not reduce the elongation at
rupture below the requirements of the tendon itself. Couplers and/or coupler components
shall be enclosed in housings long enough to permit the necessary movements. Couplers
for tendons shall be used only at locations specifically indicated and/or approved by the
Engineer. Couplers shall not be used at points of sharp tendon curvature.
Bonded Systems
Bond transfer lengths between anchorage and the zone where full prestressing force is
required under service and ultimate loads shall normally be sufficient to develop the
Page 1025
UNOPS LKOC
minimum specified ultimate strength of the prestressing steel. When anchorages or

couplers are located at critical sections under ultimate load, the ultimate strength require
of the bonded tendons shall not exceed the ultimate capacity of the tendon assembly,
including the anchorage or coupler, tested in an unbonded state.
Housings shall be designed so that complete grouting of all of the coupler components
will be accomplished during grouting of tendons.
Any anchorage devices with or without distribution plates required, as defined in the
AASHTO standard specifications for Highway Bridges and any supplementary
reinforcement required in the local zone of the anchorage, as defined in the AASHTO
"Guide specifications for design and construction of segmental concrete bridges".
1003.2.3 Identification and Testing
All strands to be shipped to the site shall be assigned a lot number and tagged for
identification purposes. Anchorage assemblies to be shipped shall be likewise identified.
Each reel of strand reinforcement shall be accompanied by a manufacturer's certificate of

compliance, a mill certificate, and a test report. The mill certificate and test report, cross-
sectional area, yield and ultimate strengths, elongation at rupture, modulus of elasticity,
and the stress strain curve for the actual prestressing steel intended for use. All values
certified shall be based on test values and nominal sectional areas of the material being
certified.
The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer for verification testing the samples described
in the following sub-articles selected from each lot. If ordered by the Engineer, the
Inspector shall make the selection of samples at the manufacturer’s plant.
All samples submitted shall be representative of the lot to be furnished and in the case of
strand, shall be taken from the same master roll.
The actual strength of the prestressing steel shall not be less than specified by the
applicable ASTM Standard, and shall be determined by tests of representative samples of
the tendon material in conformance with ASTM Standards.
All of the materials specified for testing shall be supplied free of cost and shall be
delivered in time for tests to be made well in advance of anticipated time of use.
Post-tensioning Method Tendons:
The following lengths shall be furnished for each 20 ton, or portion thereof, lot of material
used in the work. For strand to be furnished with fittings - 150 cm between near ends of
fittings.
All anchorages, end fittings, couplers and exposed tendons, which will not be encased in
concrete or grout in the completed work, shall be permanently protected against
corrosion.
Except for anchorage devices without distribution plates which are tested in accordance
with the AASHTO standard specifications for Highway Bridges, the Contractor shall
furnish for testing, one specimen of each size of prestressing tendon, including couplings,
of the selected type, with end fittings and anchorage assembly attached, for strength tests
only. These specimens shall be 1.5 metre in clear length, measured between ends of
Page 1026
UNOPS LKOC
fittings. If the results of the test indicate the necessity of check tests, additional
specimens shall be furnished without cost.
When dynamic testing is required, the Contractor shall perform the testing and shall
furnish certified copies of test results that indicate conformance with the specified
requirements prior to installation of anchorages couplers.
For prestressing systems previously tested and approved on projects having the same
tendon configuration, the Engineer may not require complete tendon samples provided
there is no change in the material, design, or details previously approved. Shop drawings
or prestressing details shall identify the project on which approval was obtained,
otherwise testing shall be conducted.
1003.2.4 Corrosion Inhibitor:
Corrosion inhibitor shall consist of a vapor phase inhibitor (VPI) powder conforming to the
provisions of Federal Specification MIL-P-3420 or as otherwise approved by the Engineer.
When approved, water-soluble oil may be used on tendons as a corrosion inhibitor.
1003.2.5 Ducts:
Ducts used to provide holes or voids in the concrete for the placement of post-tensioned
bonded tendons may be either formed with removable cores or may consist of rigid or
semi-rigid ducts that are cast in to the concrete.
Ducts formed with removable cores shall be formed with no constrictions which would
tend to block the passage of grout. All coring materials shall be removed.
Ducts formed by sheath left in place shall be a type that will not permit the intrusion of
cement paste. They shall transfer bond stresses as required and shall retain shape under
the weight of the concrete and shall have sufficient strength to maintain their correct
alignment without visible wobble during placement of concrete.
Metal Ducts:
Sheathing for ducts shall be metal, except as provided herein. Such ducts shall be
galvanized ferrous metal and shall be fabricated with either welded or interlocked seams.
Galvanizing of welded seams will not be required. Rigid ducts shall have smooth inner
walls and shall be capable of being curved to the proper configuration without crimping or
flattening. Semi-rigid ducts shall be corrugated and when tendons are to be inserted after
the concrete has been placed their minimum wall thickness shall be as follows: 26 gauge
for ducts less than or equal to 2 - 16 mm diameter, 24 gauge for ducts greater than 2 - 16
mm diameter. When bar tendons are preassembled with such ducts, the duct thickness
shall not be less than 31 gauge.
Duct Area:
The inside diameter of ducts shall be at least 6 mm larger than the nominal diameter of
single strand tendons, or in the case of multiple strand tendons, the inside cross-sectional
area of the sheathing shall be at least two times the net area of the prestressing steel.
When tendons are to be placed by the pull through method, the duct area shall be at least
2-1/2 times the net are of the prestressing steel.
Duct Fittings:
Page 1027
UNOPS LKOC
Coupling and transition fittings for ducts formed by sheathing shall be of ferrous metal and
shall be cement paste intrusion proof and of sufficient strength to prevent distortion or
displacement of the ducts during concrete placement.
All ducts or anchorage assemblies shall be provided with pipes or other suitable
connections at each end of the duct for the injection of grout after prestressing. As
specified in "Vents and Drains", duct shall also be provided with ports for venting or
grouting at high points and for draining at intermediate low points.
Vent and drain pipe shall be 12 mm minimum diameter standard pipe or suitable plastic
pipe. Connection to ducts shall be made with metallic or plastic structural fasteners. The
vents and drains shall be morter tight, taped as necessary, and shall provide means for
injection of grout through the vents and for sealing to prevent leakage of grout.
1003.2.6 Grout
Material for use in making grout that is to be placed in the ducts after tendons are post-
tensioned shall conform to the following:
(1) Portland Cement

Portland cement shall conform to one of the following: Specifications for Portland
Cement - AASHTO M 85, Types 1, 2 or 3.
Cement used for grouting shall be fresh and shall not contain any lumps or other
indication or hydration or "pack set".
(2) Water
The water used in the grout shall be potable, clean and free of injurious quantities of
substances known to be harmful to Portland cement, or prestressing steel.
(3) Admixtures
Admixtures, if used, shall impart the properties of low water content, good
flowability, minimum bleed and moderate expansion. They shall contain no
chemicals in quantities that may have harmful effect on the prestressing steel or
cement. Admixtures which, at the dosage used, contain chlorides in excess of
0.005 percent of weight of the cement used or contain any fluorides, sulphites, and
nitrates shall not be used.
When a grout-expanding admixture is required, or is used at the Contractor's option,
it shall be well dispersed through the other admixtures and shall produce a 2 to 6
percent unrestrained expansion the grout.
mount of admixture to obtain desired amount of expansion shall be determined by
tests. If the source of manufacture or brand of either admixture of cement changes
after testing, new test shall be conducted to determine proper proportions.
All admixtures shall be used in accordance with the instructions of the manufacturer.
Prestressing steel bars, may be obtained from the manufacturers in straight
condition. Any small adjustments necessary because of site conditions shall be
made by bending in a normal type bar bender. Bars shall not be bent when their
temperature is less than 10oC.
1003.3. WORKMANSHIP
1003.3.1 Cleaning:
All prestressing steel shall be free from loose mild scale, rust, oil, grease or any other
harmful matter at the time of its placing in the member. A slight film of rust is not
necessarily harmful and may improve bond.
Page 1028
UNOPS LKOC
Cleaning of the steel may be carried out by immersion in suitable solvent solutions, wire
brushing, or passing through a pressure box containing carborundum power.
1003.3.2 Straightening:
As far as possible prestressing wire shall be obtained form the manufacturers in coils
having diameter of not less than 350 times the diameter of the wire itself, so that the wire
springs back straight on being uncoiled. If due to smaller diameter of the coil or any other
reason it does not happen the wire shall be straightened before use.
1003.3.3 Placement:
1003.3.3.1 Ducts
Ducts shall be rigidly supported at the proper locations in the forms by ties to reinforcing
steel which are adequate to prevent displacement during concrete placement.
Supplementary support bars shall be used where needed to maintain proper alignment of
the duct. Hold-down ties to the forms shall be used when the buoyancy of the ducts in the
fluid concrete would lift the reinforcing steel.
Joints between sections of duct shall be coupled with positive connections which do not
result in angle changes at the joints and will prevent the intrusion of cement paste.
After placing of ducts, reinforcement and forming is complete, an inspection shall be

made to locate possible duct damage.
All unintentional holes or openings in the duct must be repaired prior to concrete placing.
Grout openings and vents must be securely anchored to the duct and to either the forms
or to reinforcing steel to prevent displacement during concrete placing operations.
After installation in the forms, the ends of ducts shall at all times be covered as necessary
to prevent the entry of water or debris.
Vents and Drains
All ducts for continuous structures shall be vented at the high points of the duct profile,
except where the curvature is small, as in continuous slabs, and at additional locations as
shown on the drawings. Where freezing conditions can be anticipated prior to grouting,
drains shall be installed at low point in ducts where needed to prevent the accumulation of
water. Low-point drains shall remain open until grouting is started.
The ends of vents and drains shall be removed one inch below the surface of the
concrete after grouting has been completed and the void filled with mortar.
1003.3.3.2 Prestressing Steel
For Post-Tensioning:
All prestressing steel preassembled in ducts and installed prior to the placement of
concrete shall be accurately placed and held in position during concrete placement.
When the prestressing steel is installed after the concrete has been placed, the
Contractor shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Engineer that the ducts are free of
water and debris immediately prior to installation of the steel. The total number of strands
in an individual tendon may be pulled into the duct as a unit, or the individual strand may
be pulled or pushed through the duct.
Anchorage devices or block-out templates for anchorages shall be set and held so that
their axis coincides with the axis of the tendon and anchor plates are normal in all
Page 1029
UNOPS LKOC
directions to the tendon.

The prestressing steel shall be distributed so that the force in each girder steam is equal
or as required by the drawings, except as provided herein. For box girders with more
than two girder stems, at the Contractor's option, the prestressing force may vary up to 5
percent from the theoretical required force per girder stem provided the required total
force in the superstructure is obtained and the force is distributed symmetrically about the
centerline of the typical section.
1003.3.4 Cutting
Suitable mechanical or flame cutters shall do all cutting to length and trimming of ends.
When a flame cutter is used, care shall be taken to ensure that the flame does not come
in contact with other stressed steel.
In post-tensioning, ends of prestressing steel projecting beyond the anchorages shall be
cut after the grout has set.
1003.3.5 Welding
Welding of prestressing steel shall not be permitted.
1003.3.6 Protection on Work
Prestressing steel installed in members prior to placing and curing of the concrete, or
installed in the duct but not grouted within the time limit specified below, shall be
continuously protected against rust or other corrosion by means of a corrosion inhibitor
placed in the ducts or directly applied to the steel. The prestressing steel shall be so
protected until grouted or encased in concrete. Prestressing steel installed and tensioned
in members after placing and curing of the concrete and grouted within the time limit
specified below will not require the use of a corrosion inhibitor described herein and rust
which may form during the interval between tendon installation and grouting will not be
cause for rejection of the steel.
The permissible interval between tendon installation and grouting without use of a
corrosion inhibitor for various exposure conditions shall be as follows:
Very Damp Atmosphere or over saltwater (Humidity > 70%) 7 days
Moderate Atmosphere (Humidity from 40% to 70%) 15 days
Very Dry Atmosphere (Humidity < 40%) 20 days
After tendons are placed in ducts, the opening at the ends of the ducts shall be sealed to
prevent entry of moisture.
When steam curing is used, steel for post-tensioning shall not be installed until the steam
curing is completed.
Whenever electric welding is performed on or near members containing prestressing
steel, the welding ground shall be attached directly to the steel being welded. All
prestressing steel and hardware shall be protected from weld spatter or other damage.
1003.3.7 Anchorages
Anchor cones, blocks and plates shall be positioned and maintained during concreting so
that the centre line of the duct passes axially through the anchorage assembly.
All bearing surfaces of the anchorages shall be clean prior to concreting and tensioning.
Adequate provision shall be made for protection of the anchorage against corrosion.
1003.4. TENSIONING
1003.4.1 General Tensioning Requirements
Page 1030
UNOPS LKOC
Prestressing steel shall be tensioned by hydraulic jacks so as to produce the forces

shown on the drawings or on the approved working drawing with appropriate allowances
for all losses. Losses to be provided for shall be as specified in Division I, AASHTO
standard specifications for Highway Bridge. For post-tensioned work the losses shall also
include the anchor set loss appropriate for the anchorage system employed.
The maximum temporary stress (jacking stress) and the stress in the steel before loss
due to creep and shrinkage shall not exceed the values allowed in Division I, AASTO
standard specification for Highway Bridge.
The method of tensioning employed shall be following as specified or approved:
Post-tensioning in which the reinforcing tendons are installed in voids or ducts within the
concrete and are stressed and anchored against the concrete after the development of
the required concrete strength. As a final operation under this method, the voids or ducts
are pressure-grouted.
During stressing of strand, individual wire failures may be accepted by the Engineer,
provided not more than one wire in any strand is broken and the area of broken wires
does not exceed 2 percent of the total area of the prestressing steel in the member.
Concrete Strength:
Prestressing forces shall not be applied or transferred to the concrete until the concrete
has attained the strength specified for initial stressing. In addition, cast-in-place concrete
for other than segmentally constructed bridges shall not be post-tensioned until at least
10 days after the last concrete has been placed in the member to be post-tensioned.
Prestressing Equipment:
Hydraulic jacks used to stress tendons shall be capable of providing and sustaining the
necessary forces and shall be equipped with either a pressure gauge or a load cell for
determining the jacking stress. The jacking system shall provide an independent means
by which the tendon elongation can be measured. The pressure gauge shall have an
accurately reading dial at least 150 mm in diameter or a digital display and each jack and
its gauge shall be calibrated as a unit with the cylinder extension in the approximate
position that it will be at final jacking force and shall be accompanied by a certified
calibration chart or curve. The load cell shall be calibrated and shall be provided with an
indicator by means of which the prestressing force in the tendon may be determined. The
range of the load cell shall be such that the lower 10 percent of the manufacturer's rated
capacity will not be used in determining the jacking stress. When approved by the
Engineer, calibrated proving rings may be used in lieu of load cells.
Recalibration of gauges shall be repeated at least annually and whenever gauge
pressures and elongation indicate materially different stresses.
Only oxygen flame or mechanical cutting devices shall be used to cut strand after
installation in the member or after stressing. Electric arc welders shall not be used.
Sequence of Stressing:
When the sequence of stressing individual tendons is not otherwise specified, the
stressing of post-tensioning tendons and the release of pretensioned tendons shall be
done in a sequence that produces a minimum of eccentric force in the member.
Measurement of Stress:
The Contractor shall provide a record of gauge pressures and tendon elongations for
each tendon for review and approval by the Engineer. Elongations shall be measured to
an accuracy of 1.6 mm. Stressing tails of post-tensioned tendons shall not be cut off until
Page 1031
UNOPS LKOC
the stressing records have been approved.

The stress in tendons during tensioning shall be determined by the gauge or load cell
readings and shall be verified with the measured elongations. Calculations of anticipated
elongations shall utilize the modulus of elasticity, based on nominal area, as furnished by
the manufacturer for the lot of steel being tensioned, or as determined by a bench test of
strand use in the work.
All tendons shall be tensioned to a preliminary force as necessary to eliminate any take-
up in the tensioning system before elongation readings are started. This preliminary force
shall be between 5 and 25 percent of the final jacking force. The initial force shall be
measured by a dynamometer by the approved method, so that its amount can be used as
a check against elongation as computed and as measured. Each strand shall be marked
prior to final stressing to permit measurement of elongation and to insure that all anchor
wedges set properly.
It is anticipated that there may be discrepancy in indicated stress between jack gauge
pressure and elongation. In such event, the loads used, as indicated by the gauge
pressure, shall produce a slight over-stress rather that under-stress. When a discrepancy
between gauge pressure and elongation of more than 5 percent in tendons over 15 metre
long or 7 percent in tendons of 15 metre or less in length occurs, the entire operation
shall be carefully checked and the source of error determined and corrected before
proceeding further.
1003.4.2 Post-Tensioning Method Requirements
Prior to post-tensioning any member, the Contractor shall demonstrate to the satisfaction
of the Engineer that the prestressing steel is free and unbounded in the duct.
All strands in each tendon, except for those in ducts with not more than four strands, shall
be stressed simultaneously with a multi-strand jack.
Tensioning shall be accomplished so as to provide the forces and elongations specified in
above.
Except as provided herein or when shown on the drawings or on the approved working
drawings, tendons in continuous post-tensioned members shall be tensioned by jacking at
each end of the tendon. For straight tendons and when one end stressing is shown on
the drawings, tensioning may be performed by jacking from one end or both ends of the
tendon at the option of the Contractor.
1003.5. JOINTS IN CONSTRUCTION WITH PRE-CAST UNITS

Joints between a series of precast concrete units which are to be prestressed together by
post-tensioning shall be such as to ensure even transfer of compression from one unit to
another.
Whatever be the method of jointing, the holes of the prestressing steel shall be accurately
made and shall meet one another in true alignment at ends. Jigs shall always be used.
Care shall be taken to ensure that the jointing material does not enter the duct or presses
the sheath against the prestressing steel.
The contractor shall submit the construction procedure as per specification and approved
by the Engineer.
Jointing by application of mortar on the face of a unit and then placing another unit
against it shall not be permitted.
1003.6. GROUTING
1003.6.1 General
When the post-tensioning method is used, the prestressing steel shall be provided with
permanent protection and shall be bonded to the concrete by completely filling the void
Page 1032
UNOPS LKOC
space between the duct and the tendon with grout.
1003.6.2 Preparation of Ducts
All ducts shall be clean and free of deleterious materials that would impair bonding or
interfere with grouting procedures.
Ducts with concrete wall (cored ducts) shall be flush to ensure that the concrete is
thoroughly wetted. Metal ducts shall be flushed if necessary to remove deleterious
material.
Water used for flushing ducts may contain slaked lime (calcium hydroxide) or quicklime
(calcium oxide) in the amount of 10 gm per litre.
After flushing, all water shall be blown out of the duct with oil-free compressed air.
1003.6.3 Equipment
The grouting equipment shall include a mixer capable of continuous mechanical mixing
which will produce a grout free of lumps and undispersed cement, a grout pump and
stand-by flushing equipment with water supply. The equipment shall be able to pump the
mixed grout in a manner that will comply with all requirements.
Accessory equipment that will provide for accurate solid and liquid measures shall be
provided to batch all materials.
The pump shall be a positive displacement type and be able to produce an outlet
pressure of at least 1.0 N/mm2. The pump should have seals adequate to prevent
introduction of oil, air or other foreign substance into the grout and to prevent loss of grout
or water.
A pressure gauge having a full-scale reading of no greater than 2.0 N/mm2 shall be
placed at some point in the grout line between the pump outlet and the duct inlet.
The grouting equipment shall contain a screen having clear openings of 3.0 mm
maximum size to screen the grout prior to its introduction into the grout pump. If a grout
with a thixotropic additive is used, a screen opening of 5.0 mm is satisfactory. This
screen shall be easily accessible for inspection and cleaning.
The grouting equipment shall utilize gravity feed to the pump inlet from a hopper attached
to and directly over it. The hopper must be kept at least partially full of grout at all times
during the pumping operation to prevent air from being drawn into the post-tensioning
duct.
Under normal conditions, the grouting equipment shall be capable of continuously
grouting the largest tendon on the project in no more than 20 minutes.
1003.6.4 Mixing of Grout:
Water shall be added to the mixer first, followed by Portland cement and admixture or a
required by the admixture manufacturer.
Mixing shall be of such duration as to obtain a uniform, thoroughly blended grout, without
excessive temperature increase or loss of expansive properties of the admixture. The
grout shall be continuously agitated until it is pumped.
Water shall not be added to increase grout flowability that has been decreased by
delayed use of the grout.
Proportions of materials shall be based on tests made on the grout before grouting is
begun, or may be selected based on prior documented experience with similar materials
and equipment and under comparable field conditions (weather, temperature etc.). The
water content shall be the minimum necessary for proper placement and when Type I or II
cement is used shall not exceed a water-cement ration of 0.45.
The water content required for Type III cement shall be established for a particular brand
based on tests.
Page 1033
UNOPS LKOC
The Engineer in accordance with the U.S. Crops of Engineers Method CRD-C79 may
determine the pumpability of the grout. When this method is used, the efflux time of the
grout sample immediately after mixing shall not be less than 11 seconds. The flow cone
test does not apply to grout which incorporates a thixotropic additive.
1003.6.5 Injection of Grout:
All grout and high-point vent openings shall be open when grouting starts. Grout shall be
allowed to flow from the first vent after the inlet pipe until any residual flushing water or
entrapped air has been removed, at which time the vent should be capped or otherwise
closed. Remaining vents shall be closed in sequence in the same manner.
The pumping pressure at the tendon inlet shall not exceed 1.7 N/mm2 (250 psi).
If the actual grouting pressure exceeds the maximum recommended pumping pressure,
grout may be injected at any vent that has been, or is ready to be capped as long as a
one-way flow of grout is maintained. If this procedure is used, the vent which is to be
used for injection shall be fitted with a positive shutoff.
When one-way flow of grout cannot be maintained, the grout shall be immediately flushed
out of the duct with water.
Grout shall be pumped through the duct and continuously wasted at the outlet pipe until
no visible slugs of water or air are ejected and the efflux time of the ejected grout, as
measured by a flow cone test, if used, is not less than that of the injected grout. To
ensure that the tendon remains filled with grout, the outlet shall then be closed and the
pumping pressure allowed to build to a minimum of 0.5 N/mm2 (75 psi) before the inlet
vent is closed. Plugs, caps or valves thus required shall not be removed or opened until
the grout has set.
1003.6.6 Temperature Considerations:
When temperatures are below 0oC, duct shall be kept free of water to avoid damage due
to freezing.
The temperature of the concrete shall be 1.7oC or higher from the time of grouting until
job cured 50 mm cubes of grout reach a minimum compressive strength of 5.5 N/mm2
(800 Psi)
Grout shall not be above 32oC during mixing or pumping. If necessary, the mixing water
shall be cooled.
1003.7. TRANSPORTATION, STORAGE AND ERECTION OF UNITS:
Precast concrete I girders shall be constructed as Cast in situ over the Coffer Dam
supported on the Pier Caps. Hence, any transportation, storage and erection shall not be
required. The bottom shuttering shall not allowed to open until gain the strength to sustain
the dead load and an approval shall be required from Engineer for such operation.
1003.8.QUALITY CONTROL
The specifications given hereunder shall be strictly followed for quality assurance of
prestress concrete works.
1003.8.1 Prestressing:
a) In all methods of tensioning, the stress induced in the tendons shall be determined
by measurement of elongation and also independently by direct measurement of
force using a pressure gauge or other means. The two determinations shall check
Page 1034
UNOPS LKOC
each other and the theoretical values within a tolerance of 3%.

b) Calculations for elongations and gauge readings must include appropriate
allowances for frictions, strand wire slippage and other factors as applicable.
c) Wire failure in tendons: Failure of wires in a post tensioning tendon is acceptable
provided the total area of wire failure is not more than 2 percent of the total area of
tendon in any member and also provided the Engineer is satisfied that the failure is
not symptomatic of more extensive distress condition.
If the total area failure exceeds 2%, representative samples from the whole batch
shall be got tested again. The high tensile steel shall be used further, only if the test
results are found satisfactory.
d) Prior to stringing of strands, bottom forms shall be inspected for cleanliness and
accuracy of alignment. Form surfaces to be in contact with concrete must be
treated with an effective release agent. Special care must be exercised to prevent
contamination of strands from release agents grease or other coatings.
e) The alignment and position of ducts within the member is critical. Short kinks and
wobbles shall be avoided. The trajectory of ducts shall not depart from the curve or
straight lines shown in the approved drawing by more than 1 in 240. The cable
position shall not deviate by more than 5mm from the designed trajectory vertically.
The area and alignment of ducts shall be such that tendons are free to move within
them and there shall be sufficient area left out to permit free passage of grout. The
inside cross sectional area of the duct shall be at least twice the net area of the
prestressing steel.
f) Schedule and sequence of tensioning tendons shall be as shown in the drawings.
g) The rate of applications of load shall be in accordance with manufacturer's
recommended procedure for post tensioning.
Slip must be measured at each end and the extension for the total length.
h) Anchorage: Anchorage devices for all posts tensioning systems must be aligned
with the direction of the axes of the tendons at the point attachment. Concrete
surfaces, against which the anchorage devices bear, must be normal to this line of
direction. Accurate measurement of anchorage losses due to slippage or other
causes shall be made and compared with the assumed losses shown in the post
tensioning schedule and when necessary, adjustments or corrections shall be made
in the operation.
1003.8.2 Cracking:
The principal objective of prestressing is the application of sufficient forces to concrete so

that members can be cast and placed in service without cracks. Some hair line cracks
which may form during casting or curing, if superficial, have no detrimental effect, on the
structural capacity of member. However to prevent any possible corrosion through hair
cracks deterioration of concrete suitable surface treatment approved by the Engineer
shall be given to the exposed surface.
The following precautions shall be taken by contractor to avoid cracking.
i) Ensure proper curing
ii) Release side forms as soon as practicable
iii) Use hoop steel around tendons near ends of beams
iv) Handle only from designated pick up points
v) Take adequate care during storage, transportation and reaction.
1003.8.3 Inspection and Records:
In general, the scope of inspections to be performed in prestressing work shall include the
following:
i) Identification examination acceptance and laboratory testing of materials.
ii) Inspection and recording of tensioning.
Page 1035
UNOPS LKOC
iii) Inspecting of beds and forms prior to concreting

iv) Checking of dimensions of members, position of tendons, reinforcing steel, other
incorporated material, opening, blackout, etc.
v) Continual inspection of batching, mixing, converting, placing, compacting, finishing
and curing of concrete.
vi) Preparation of concrete specimens for tests and performing of tests for slump, air
content, cube strength etc.
vii) General observations of casting site, equipment, working conditions, weather and
other items affecting product.
viii) final inspection of finished member.
1003.8.4 Record Keeping:
In order to establish evidence of proper manufacture and quality of prestressed concrete

members, a system of records as mentioned below shall be maintained by the contractor.
Two copies of the records shall be made and one copy duly signed by the contractor shall
be handed over to the Engineer.
i) Each prestressed concrete member shall be identified by bed and date cast and an
identification number which should be referenced to tensioning records, concreting
records, cube strength records, keeping these records shall be the responsibility of
the contractor.
ii) Submission of certified test reports for materials such as high tensile steel brought
by the contractor is the responsibility of the contractor. These reports shall show
that the materials comply with the applicable specifications.
iii) An accurate record of tensioning operation shall be kept. This record shall include,
but not be limited to the following:
a) Date of tensioning.
b) Casting identification.
c) Description, identification and number of members.
d) Manufacturer, size and class of tendon.
e) Identification of jacking equipment.
f) The actual net elongation of each tendon with allowance made for elastic
shortening of member.
g) Data on and date of grouting.
h) Any unforeseen problems encountered during tensioning such as wire
breakage, excessive slippage or other factors having an influence on the net
stress.
iv) Records of concrete operation and test shall be kept so that the following data will
be recorded for each member or each group of members cast on one bed.
a) Date, time and duration of casting.
b) Mix proportion.
c) Mixing water corrections.
d) Identification of casting bed and members.
e) Cube identification.
f) Ambient temperature, weather condition and concrete temperature.
g) Slump.
h) Method and duration of steam curing, if proposed.
i) Strength at prestressing.
j) 28 days cube strength.
v) All jacking and load measuring equipment shall be calibrated to the satisfaction of
the Engineer. Calibration data shall shown the following:
a) Date of calibration.
b) Agency or laboratory performing calibration.
c) Method of calibration.
Page 1036
UNOPS LKOC
d) A curve showing the full range of calibration with gauge readings plotted
against actual load.
1003.8.5 Dimensional Tolerance
The permissible dimensional tolerances are as given below:
a) In the length of member + 20 mm; - 20 mm

b) Flange width + 10 mm; - 10 mm
c) Depth + 10 mm
d) Flange thickness + 8 mm; - 4 mm
e) Web thickness + 8 mm
f) Camber deviation from design camber + 20 mm; - 20 mm

g) Position of tendons (in vertical plane) + 5 mm; - 5 mm
h) Bottom width + 10 mm; - 10 mm
i) Bottom thickness + 8 mm; - 4 mm
j) Position of handling devices + 150 mm; - 150 mm
k) Squareness of alignments (vertical + 10 mm
and horizontal alignment) - 10 mm
Tolerances against items (a), (j) and (k) are for 50 m lengths. For other lengths they shall
be proportional.
The contractor shall ensure the dimensions of the member within the above tolerances.
In case of PSC members not complying with the dimensional requirements within the
tolerances, remedial measures as required by the Engineer shall be carried out. If the
measures as required by the Engineer are not achieved the PSC member is liable to be
rejected.
1003.9. SAFETY IN CONSTRUCTION:
Detailed guidelines for safety in construction of prestressed Concrete Bridge Works is

included in section 3.19 of these specifications. The contractor shall strictly follow these
guidelines and as directed by the Engineer without limiting his responsibility against
safety of structures and construction personnel.
1003.10.MEASUREMENT:
High tensile tendons used in prestressed concrete shall be measured as the length of
tendons actually used in finished work. From the length so measured its weight shall be
calculated in tonnes.
Anchorage devices, ducts or metal sheath spacers and grouting shall be deemed to be
included in the item of high tensile steel and shall not be measured separately.
1003.11. PAYMENT:
The unit rate for high tensile steel shall cover the cost of all materials, labour, tools and
plant required for fixing, placing, tensioning, anchoring, and grouting the high tensile steel
in the pre-stressed cement concrete as shown on the drawings and as per clause of
specification. The cost of anchoring devices and ducts or metal sheath and grouting shall
also be included in this rate.
Page 1037
UNOPS LKOC
Pay Item Description Unit of

No. Measurement
1003 Providing and laying H.T. tendons, of required Tonne
diameter in fabricated sheaths including necessary
joineries of approved quality including supplying,
fitting, fixing in position, spacers, anchorage's etc.,
stressing the cables with standard jacks complete
including grouting the duct with cement slurry all
as per drawing and specification and to the
Engineer direction.
1004 PILE FOUNDATIONS FOR STRUCTURES
1004.1 a) Description
Piling shall conform in all respect with the principles contained in BS 8004. Unless
otherwise stated, concrete, reinforcement and formwork shall be in accordance with the
requirements in specifications on the concrete structures. In the event of that the
provisions of other specifications clauses cause ambiguity or conflict with the
requirements of these specifications clauses, the later shall take precedence unless
otherwise approved by the Engineer.
Add to end of this Sub Section the followings :-
Piles through water and soft upper soil layers shall be provided with a permanent steel
casing if shown on the Drawings.
The pile boring shall be carried out using a temporary steel casing bored to the pile toe or
to a level approved by the Engineer if permanent steel casing not specified. The
temporary casing shall be withdrawn. Under certain circumstances the Contractor may be
permitted to bore all or part of the pile without casing under water or use drilling fluid to
stabilise the borehole as referred to in Sub Section 1004.2.
The piles shall be concreted and reinforced to resist pile loads and horizontal forces on
the pile caps according to the Drawings and these Specifications.
1004.1 .1 Coffer Dam/ Artificial Island
DESCRIPTION:
This work shall consist of the construction, material excavation within, dewatering,
maintenance and removal of cofferdams in accordance with the specifications at locations
designated in the Plans or in the Contract.
The work will be classified as follows:
(a) Cofferdam. This item shall consist of providing a method for the purpose of
constructing, in the dry, a specific foundation or other component of a structure in
accordance with Contract requirements. This may involve the design,
construction, maintenance, and removal of a watertight structure or may involve
alternate methods of de-watering and stabilizing the specific site. Construction of
foundation seals per Contract or as required per Contractor plans and schedule of
Page 1038
UNOPS LKOC
operations is also within the scope of work for the Cofferdam item. The Contractor
shall obtain any and all necessary permits or clearances for alternate methods.
A cofferdam may have only two or three sides depending upon the particular
location and the Contractor’s design.
Cofferdam Excavation, Earth. This item shall consist of all material excavated
within the pay limits as set forth in these specifications or indicated on the Plans
except solid rock, mortared stone masonry, concrete, and boulders measuring
0.5cubic meters (yards) or more.
Cofferdam Excavation, Rock. This item shall consist of all solid rock materials
excavated within the pay limits as set forth in these specifications or indicated on
the Plans, including all solid rock, mortared stone masonry, concrete, and
boulders measuring 0.5 cubic meters (yards) or more.
MATERIALS:
Gravel/ soil may be used for the construction of cofferdam as per design and approved by
Engineer.
Concrete used in a cofferdam foundation seal shall have a minimum 28 day compressive
strength of 20 MPa (3000 psi) and shall conform to the requirements of Section 1001.
GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS:
When the cast insitu piles are to be pitched in water, an earthen/sand Coffer dam where
possible shall be constructed raising the site of work, so as to make the construction in
the dry. The area of Cofferdam/island in these cases should be sufficient enough to allow
adequate working space, at least 2 times the outer dimension of the pile cap. The soil
forming the island shall be such as not to impede the sinking of the casing. Cofferdam/
Islands shall be protected against scour and the top level shall be sufficiently above the
anticipated water level during the construction period so that it is safe against wave or
tidal action. The top surface of the island shall be adequately leveled and casing placed.
The Contractor shall construct the diversion channel, if found necessary, from site
conditions. In case of any deep or fast flowing water where an island may not be possible,
the casing may be, floated and lowered in its final position with the help of necessary
equipment.
The locations and elevations for excavation shall be as indicated on the Plans. The
Engineer may order to removal of poor foundation material below the normal designated
elevation and replacement with an approved material.
All suitable excess excavated material shall be used in the formation of embankments as
indicated on the Plans, or as directed by the Engineer. The material shall be hauled and
disposed of with no additional compensation to the Contractor.
PRESERVATION OF CHANNEL:
Unless otherwise indicated on the Plans or ordered by the Engineer, the Contractor, in
performing the excavation, shall confine excavating operations to the site of the proposed
structure and to the limits of the cofferdam. The natural stream bed shall not be disturbed
without permission of the Engineer.
COFFERDAMS:
Page 1039
UNOPS LKOC
The Contractor shall prepare detailed plans and as schedule of operations for each
cofferdam specified in the Contract. Unless otherwise noted in the Contract Documents,
the design and structural details of the cofferdam structure or alternative dewatering and
stabilizing method shall be signed, stamped, and dated by a qualified Professional
Engineer (Structural or Civil) registered in the Institute of Engineers.
The Professional Engineer is responsible for ensuring that the proposed cofferdam meets
the following criteria:
(a) the design is structurally stable for all conditions to been countered
(e.g., soils, water, forces, and loadings);
(b) the design and details conform with the Contract and the applicable AASHTO
requirements in the “Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges”;
(c) the design and details are in conformance with applicable safety codes;
(d) the size and shape are adequate to construct the foundation and structural
components specified;
(e) the cofferdam is adequately watertight for proper performance of the work;
and
(f) any foundation seal is adequate to achieve its design function

(g) Cofferdam edges should be erosion free and adequate protected by Sand
filled gunny sacs
(h) Cofferdam should be constructed as per sequences of the piling construction
activities and guidance by Engineer.
One copy of the plans and schedule of operations shall be submitted to the Project
Manager for UNOPS use.
The submittal shall include plan, elevation and section details indicating the following:
(a) the waterway;
(b) information regarding the cofferdam and any foundation seal indicate if a seal
is required to ensure the structural integrity of the cofferdam during dewatering
and foundation construction and inspection;
(c) substructure location;
(d) dimensions of any temporary restrictions that are to be placed in the

waterway, e.g. barges, lines, earth dams, causeways, temporary diversion
channels and access bridging;
(e) the location, dimensions, clearances, and other relevant information for any
temporary scaffolding or netting;
(f) dewatered heads, taking into consideration fluctuations of water levels;
(g) details for screening, pumping and filtering discharge;
(h) a statement as to whether or not any equipment will be removed at night; and
Page 1040
UNOPS LKOC
(i) a schedule or sequence of operations - include placement of the foundation

seal, time from placement to dewatering, and foundation construction and
inspection.
The Contractor will be responsible for performing the work in accordance with the
submitted details and schedule of operations. All welding shall be performed in
accordance with BS code.
Cofferdam construction shall conform to AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway

and Bridge Construction, Division II, Section 1.4.
Cofferdams shall be constructed so as to protect freshly placed concrete against damage

from sudden rising of the water level and to prevent damage to the foundation or other
structural component by erosion. The cofferdam shall be constructed so that no timber,
bracing, or forms will extend into the foundation or other structural component.
In the event the Contractor elects to place fill material in the stream to facilitate access to,
or be part of, a cofferdam operation, it shall be clean stone fill.
PUMPING:
Pumping from or dewatering of the interior of any cofferdam enclosure shall be performed
so that disturbance of the subsoil or freshly placed concrete will not occur. Dewatering of
a sealed cofferdam will be in conformance with the Contractor’s sequence or schedule of
operations. Pumping during the construction of a foundation or other structural
component shall be from a suitable sump separated from the concrete work.
INSPECTION OF FOUNDATION PIT:
Immediately following the completion of each foundation pit, the Contractor shall notify the
Engineer, who shall approve the depth of the pit and the nature of the foundation before
the placement of the concrete.
MEASUREMENT.
The quantity to be measured for payment will be on a lump sum basis for each cofferdam
segments specified on the Plans, profile or in the Contract.
PAYMENT:
The accepted quantity of Cofferdam will be paid for at the Contract lump sum price, which
price shall be full compensation for the preparation of detailed plans and schedule of
operations, performing the work specified, and the furnishing of all labor, tools,
equipment, materials, and incidentals necessary to complete the work, including the cost
of altering the cofferdam, foundation seals, sheeting, bracing, dewatering, installation and
maintenance of siltation and sedimentation control measures for treating cofferdam
discharge, incidentals necessary for properly constructing the foundation or structural
component, maintaining the cofferdam in a dewatered condition, and removing the
cofferdam when no longer required.
Payment for Cofferdam will be made as follows:
A payment of 75% of the lump sum bid price will be made when excavation within the limits of the
structural unit is completed, and the cofferdam has been successfully dewatered.
Page 1041
UNOPS LKOC
1004.1.1 (1) Lump sum payment for Cofferdam construction for Lump sum-1
Segment-1 including supply of all materials, tools,
equipments, maintain the scour free & dry
conditions during construction period etc. complete
as per the design and drawing and profile and
satisfaction of Engineer. The payments shall be
Segment length x Lump sum of 75%
1004.1.1 (4) The remaining 25% of the lump sum bid price will be Lump sum-4
made when the cofferdam has been completely
removed and excavated to the original position of
the river bed before cofferdam constructed.
However, in the event the Engineer (by written
order) requires a Cofferdam to be left in place, the
Contractor will be paid only for the documented cost
of the cofferdam material left in place excluding any
costs associated with the foundation seal.
1004.2 Materials
Add to additional Section as follows :-
(f) Drilling Fluid
The following sub section shall be complied with if bentonite mud is used to stabilise the
boreholes:
i) Supply
The Contractor shall obtain a certificate from the manufacturer of the bentonite powder,
showing the properties of the consignment delivered to the site. This certificate shall be
made available to the Engineer on request. The properties to be given by the
Page 1042
UNOPS LKOC
manufacturer are the apparent viscosity range (in centipoises) and the gel strength range
for solids in water.
Any other material proposed by the Contractor for the drilling fluid shall be approved by
the Engineer.
ii) Mixing
Bentonite and any other material shall be mixed thoroughly with clean water to make a
suspension which shall maintain the stability of the pile excavation for the period
necessary to place concrete and complete construction.
Where saline or chemically contaminated groundwater occurs, special precautions shall

be taken to modify the bentonite in fresh water so as to render it suitable in all respects
for the construction of piles.
iii) Tests
The frequency of testing drilling fluid and the method and procedure of sampling shall be
proposed by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer prior to the commencement of
the work. The frequency may subsequently be varied as required depending on the
consistency of the results obtained. The control tests shall cover the determination of
density, viscosity, gel strength and pH values.
The Contractor shall supply all equipment and experienced operators required to carry
out tests on the drilling mud. No additional payment shall be made for these tests which
shall be considered as an essential part of the drilling operations.
(g) Steel Casing
This part of the Specifications only deals with the permanent steel casing. For steel
casing used during boring of the pile see Section 1004.5, Construction Methods. When
permanent steel casing is shown on the Drawings, the steel shall conform to the AASHTO
Standard Specification M 183-79 (ASTM A36) or equivalent.
The minimum thickness of the permanent steel casing shall be 10 mm. The minimum
length shall be from 100 mm above the bottom of the pile cap to 5 metre under the
riverbed or into firm strata. If the permanent casing is used in the boring operation or if the
handling and transport require a greater thickness to avoid deformation or buckling, the
increase in thickness shall be provided by the Contractor at his own expense.
The steel casing shall be furnished in appropriate lengths and the joints shall be approved
by the Engineer.
The casing shall be handled and stored in a manner that shall prevent buckling and other
deformation as well as accumulation of dirt, oil and paint. When placed in the work it shall
be free from dirt, oil, grease, paint, mill scale and loose or thick rust. The outside surface
of the permanent casing of piles to river piers, for the depth indicated on the Drawings
from the underside of the pile cap shall receive two coats of anti-corrosion tar type paint.
The paint shall be approved by the Engineer and its application shall follow the
manufacturer's instructions.
(h) Length of Piles
The basic length of pile and its diameter is shown on drawings. The final length shall be
Page 1043
UNOPS LKOC
decided by the Engineer on the basis of study of the results of initial load test on piles and
on the basis of actually boring data observed on site for individual pile. Test piles shall be
installed as directed by the Engineer at selected locations at each bridge site.
1004.3 Manufacturing and protective requirements for piles
No change
1004.4 Construction requirements of driven piles
No change
1004.5 Construction requirements of cast insitu piles (bored piles)
Delete Sub Section and subslitute with the following:-
1004.5.1 CONSTRUCTION METHOD
a) General
The Contractor shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Engineer that his proposed
construction methods for the piles do not result in the pile shafts being weakened by
contamination of the concrete, by sectional reduction, by washing out of cement, by
breaking during pulling of temporary casings or in any other way, including the
construction of neighbouring piles.
i) Assumed Procedure
The following construction procedure has been assumed in the tender design. The final
construction procedure shall be as approved by the Engineer prior to commencing piling
operations.
1. Place permanent steel casing, if required, in position and embed casing toe into
river bed or firm strata. If no permanent steel casing is specified a sufficient length
of temporary steel casing shall be used to stabilise the upper part of the borehole.
2. Bore and excavate inside the steel casing down to casing toe level, or to a level
approved, and continue excavation to final pile tip level using either temporary
casing under water, or using drilling mud. The fluid level inside casings shall at all
times be at least 2 metres higher than outside the casings.
3. Carefully clean up all mud or sedimentation from the bottom of borehole.
4. Place reinforcement cage, inspection pipes etc.
5. Concrete continuously under water, or drilling fluid, by use of the tremie method.
6. Withdraw the temporary boring casing concurrently with concreting to the

instructed level.
7. After hardening, break out the top section of the concrete pile to reach sound
concrete.
ii) Approval of Construction Method
Page 1044
UNOPS LKOC
In the tender, the Contractor shall describe the construction method he proposes,
including name of proposed Sub-contractor (if any), information on boring equipment,
materials, and methods of work and control of quality.
After the Contract has been awarded, the Contractor shall prepare a detailed programme
and establish a procedure for the pile construction. The detailed programme shall contain
all required information on materials, equipment, methods of work etc. and be approved in
writing by the Engineer. Such approval shall not, however, relieve the Contractor of his
responsibilities for pile construction. The import of any boring equipment or materials by
the Contractor, before he has received the Engineer’s approval of proposed construction
methods, shall be at the Contractor’s risk.
b) Setting Out Piles
The contractor shall be required to employ an approved Licensed Surveyor who will set
up the positions of the piles as shown in the pile layout plans of the detail design. The
contractor will be responsible for the accuracy of location and positioning of each pile.
Any errors in setting out and any consequential loss to the Employer will be made good
by the contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The contractor shall preserve the pegs set out by the Surveyor. Should any peg be
displaced or lost it must be replaced by a Licensed Surveyor to the approval of the
Engineer. Upon completion of all piling works, the contractor shall produce as-Built
drawings showing the positions of all piles as installed. The positions of piles shall be
verified by a Licensed Surveyor.
The Contractor shall check the casing position for each pile during and immediately after
placing the casing, and agree it with the Engineer.
c) Diameter of Piles
The diameter of a pile shall be not less than the specified diameter.
d) Tolerances
Position: The pile heads shall be positioned as shown on the Drawings within a maximum
deviation of 75 mm in either direction from its design position.
Verticality: For Bored cast-in-situ the maximum permitted deviation of the finished pile
from the vertical at any level is 1 in 100. The contractor shall demonstrate to the
satisfaction of Engineer the pile verticality in within the allowable tolerance.
Correction: Should piles be installed outside these tolerances affecting the design of the
structures, the contractor shall propose remedial design and carry out immediate remedial
measure to the approval of the Engineer. If any addition fund is required and shall be
borne by Contractor.
The Contractor shall provide suitable equipment, such as an inverted pendulum, to check
the verticality of the boreholes at intervals during drilling and prior to concreting.
e) Person in Charge
The piling work is to be carried out by full time operators and supervisory staff who must
be experienced in the installation of the proposed type of piles.
Page 1045
UNOPS LKOC
The contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval, written evidence to show that the
persons who will be engaged in the works have such experience.
f) Pilling Equipments and Accessories
The equipment and accessories must be capable of safely, speedily and efficiently
installing piles to the design requirements at the project site. Sufficient units of
equipments and accessories must be provided to keep to the agreed construction
schedule.
g) Sequence of Installation of working piles
The Engineer reserves the absolute right and the Contractor shall recognise such right to
direct the installation of working piles in any sequences the Engineer deems necessary
for the satisfactory completion of the works.
h) Forcible correction Not permitted
Where piles have not been positioned within the specified limits no method of forcible
correction will be permitted.
e) Boring
i) Methods
Contractor shall carry out the works in accordance with a method statement which has
been approved the Engineer. This method statement shall include inter dia., length of
temporary casing, details of the constituent materials of any drilling fluid used for
stabilisation, the method of inspection, details of concrete mix, concreting method, the
minimum time between the completion of one pile and commencement of the next and
the pattern of construction.
Unless otherwise described in the specifications, reinforcement and concrete shall comply
with the requirements in specifications on concrete for structures. The contractor shall
ensure that damages dose not occur to completed piles through his method of working.
The contractor shall submit to the Engineer a pile installation programme. The proposed
sequences and timing of the pile installation shall be such that the installation works shall
not cause any damages to adjacent piles. Piling works shall not commence until approval
of the engineer has been obtained.
Method of excavation shall be proposed by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer.
Water or air jetting for boring of the piles shall not be allowed.
ii) Boring Near Recently Cast Piles
Piles shall not be bored so close to other piles which have recently been cast and which
contain workable or unset concrete so that a flow of concrete could be induced from or
damage caused to any of the piles. Boring and excavation for a pile shall not be
commenced until 24 hours after completion of any pile within a radius of 6 metres, centre
to centre.
iii) Stability of bore by Temporary Casing method
Page 1046
UNOPS LKOC
Where the use of a temporary casing is required to maintain the stability of a bore, the
bottom of casing shall be kept a minimum of one (1) meter or more below the unstable
strata to prevent the inflow of soil and formation of cavities in the surrounding ground.
Temporary casing of approved quality or an approved alternative method shall be used to
maintain the stability of pile excavations, which might otherwise collapse. Temporary
casings shall be free from significant distortion. They shall be of uniform cross-section
throughout each continuous length. During concreting they shall be free from internal
projections and encrusted concrete which might prevent the proper formation of piles. If
temporary casings are damaged during installation in a manner which prevents the proper
formation of the pile, such casings shall be with drawn from the bore before concrete
placed, repaired if necessary, or other action taken as may be approved to continue the
construction of the pile.
iv) Stability of Pile Excavation Using Drilling Fluid
It is held that the Contractor has allowed in the unit rate of the pile for the implementation
of all necessary measures, including the provision of all materials, labour and plant, for
maintaining the stability of sides of boreholes during bored pile installation and successful
completion of the piles. The Contractor shall submit his proposed methods for agreement
prior to commencement of boring operations. Irrespective of the presence of ground
water, the sides of all boreholes shall be kept intact and no loose material shall be
permitted to fall into the bottom of the boreholes. The Contractor’s boring equipment shall
be able to sink a steel casing to support the sides of all boring.
If the sides of boreholes are found to be not table, temporary steel casing shall be driven
into stable stratum. The borehole shall be filled with drilling fluid (Bentonite) to a level
sufficiently to stabilise the boreholes.
If ground water is found in any hole in sufficient quantity or gushing out as to affect boring
operations or excavations and removal of soil from the boreholes, or the sides of
boreholes collapse, then a steel casing of appropriate size an length in conjunction with
stabilising fluid or any other alternative of sufficient strength shall be used to support the
sides of the borehole and permit boring operations to proceed smoothly and safely. The
proposed drilling fluid mix must be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
Excavation should not be exposed to the atmosphere longer than is necessary and shall
be covered at all times when work is in progress. Pile excavation shall be cast within 24
hours unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer.
In the event of rapid loss of drilling fluid from the borehole excavation and caused
instability of bore, the excavation shall be backfilled with out delay or other appropriate
and approved remedial measures taken by the Contractor like installing temporary casing
prior to resuming boring at that location.
v) Disposal of Excavated Material
No excavated material shall be dumped into the river or any connecting waterway without
the written approval of the Engineer. Excavated material shall be removed from site and
dumped either beyond areas affected by dredging, or taken to the Contractors approved
dumping areas on land. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for costs involved in
removing the excavated material to spoil. In disposal of unwanted drilling fluid, the
Contractor shall comply with the relevant government regulations and propose a proper
disposal method to be approved by Engineer.
vi) Pumping from Boreholes
Page 1047
UNOPS LKOC
Pumping from a borehole shall not be permitted unless a casing has been placed into a
stable stratum which prevents the flow of water from other strata in significant quantities
into the boring, or unless it can be shown that pumping will not have a detrimental effect
on the surrounding soil or property.
vii) Obstructions
Where boulders or other obstructions render it impossible to bore the pile, excavation
operations inside pile casing as directed by the Engineer shall be carried out to remove
obstructions and the Contractor shall be reimbursed for such operations only when the
largest dimension of the obstruction exceeds 500 mm and the obstruction is found more
than 2 metres below river bed. This reimbursement shall be paid either by day work basis
or actual expenditures depend on possible lower cost. A log sheet for labour and
equipments used must be recorded to claim such reimbursements.
viii) Unexpected Ground Conditions
The Contractor shall report immediately to the Engineer any circumstances which indicate
that in the Contractor's opinion the ground conditions differ from those expected by him
from his interpretation of the site investigation reports.
ix) Boring Records
A record of all piles installed shall be kept by the contractor and signed by the Engineer
representative/Engineer and a copy of the record of the work done each day shall be
given to the Engineer within 24 hours. The form of record shall first be approved by the
Engineer before piling works commence. Any comments by the Engineer shall be
incorporated into the form.
All unexpected boring or installation conditions shall be noted in the records.
Two (2) bound sets of collated and certified (by the contractor’s Project Engineer) piling
records of all piles shall be submitted by the contractor to the Engineer after completion of
the piling works.
During the boring of the pile, the Contractor shall compile a 'boring log' indicating depths
and types of the various soil layers encountered. Disturbed samples shall be submitted to
the Engineer as requested. The Contractor shall allow for carrying out sampling and tests
to check soil strengths as required by the Engineer.
Submission of the pile record shall be as follows:

1. Name of supervisor
2. Pile forming equipment including Rig no.
3. Length, Diameter and reference number of the borehole
4. Existing ground level
5. Cut-off level, rock level (Hard Rock only-RQD 75%), pile toe level
6. Length of pile
7. Log of materials encountered and level of change in strata and where boring stops
8. Speed of boring through soil or Rock shall be recorded for every meter of drilling
9. Depth bored and detail inclination or displacement of the pile during boring and
date of inspection
10. Length of reinforcement casing, reinforcement details
11. Water table below ground level
12. Levels where seepage occurs
Page 1048
UNOPS LKOC
13. Results of tests on soils

14. Results of tests concrete cubes (Slump tests)
15. Length of Temporary casing if used
16. Date and actual volume of concrete placed in piles, time starts and complete
17. Concrete level after each truck of concrete
18. Details of all inspections
19. Details of all obstructions, delays and other interruptions
20. Signature of Resident Engineer or his representative
21. Weather condition
22. Method of casing (Wet/dry tremie)
23. Date and time boring start and complete and speed of drilling
24. Type of stabilising fluid
25. Collapse of bore or loss of drilling fluid
26. Cavities or Slump zone encountered.
x) Final Pile Toe Level
The final pile toe level shall be as indicated on the Drawing or as instructed by the
Engineer after due consideration of the Contractor's proposals, boring logs and test
results. The final toe level of other piles may subsequently be altered according to the
results of the test loadings detailed in Sub Section B (Pile TEST LOADING) of section
1004.5.
xi) Inspection and Cleaning Bottom of Excavation
Where practicable, all pile excavations shall be inspected for their full length before
concreting. The Contractor shall provide all the apparatus necessary for the inspection.
Inspection shall be carried out either from the ground level or below ground level at the
sole discretion of the Engineer prior to concrete being placed in the borehole. For such
inspection to be carried out safely, the Contractor shall provide all facilities and
assistance to enable the said inspection to be done. In the course of inspection any loose
or soft material in the borehole which is likely to affect the performance of the pile shall be
removed to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
In the case of inspection from ground level, the base of the boring shall be inspected by
approved method for wet hole and by means of light for dry hole to ensure that all loose,
disturbed and/or remoulded soil removed and that the sides of the boring will remain
stable during the subsequent concrete operations. The verticality and position of the
boring shall be checked to ensure that they meet the specified tolerances.
Inspection below ground level shall be carried out for the piles with shafts of 760 mm
diameter and above. For this purpose the Contractor shall, apart from providing other
safety measures, also provide the required facilities such as an approved type of a steel
safety case with an air-line, lifting cable and hoists, gas detector, lights etc. to enable
descent into and ascent from the borehole to be carried out safely with out any danger to
life. In this regard the safety precautions described in BS 8008:1996 “Safety precautions
and procedures for the construction and descent of machine-bored shafts for piling and
other purpose” shall generally be followed, unless otherwise directed by Engineer.
The time between final excavation and bottom cleaning and the start of concreting shall
be kept as short as possible and shall not exceed 6 hours. To achieve this, the final 2
metres of excavation shall not start until all preparations for cleaning, reinforcing and
concreting are finished. In case of unexpected delay the Contractor shall dump sand or
gravel in the bore to 2 metres above toe level. On completion of the drilling an interval is
Page 1049
UNOPS LKOC
required, to allow the fine materials to settle (15 minutes unless otherwise approved by
the Engineer). Thereafter the bottom of the excavation shall be carefully cleaned of mud,
sedimentation and other soft material by an approved method.
The Contractor shall show, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, that the bottom of the
excavation is clean. Sedimentation tests shall be carried out by the Contractor in the
presence of the Engineer.
If boring without casing, the diameter of the boring hole for a representative number of
piles shall be measured by calliper prior to the placing of concrete. The verticality of
boreholes will be checked as directed by the Engineer. These measurements shall be
done by the Contractor using approved equipment and no reimbursement shall be made.
xii) Rock Coring/Boring
Rock boring is the part of the contractor activities during piling works. Rock coring shall
means of coring of sound bedrock using a coring bucket or approved method. The used
of Chisel shall not be permitted. Coring of rock other than two items specified below shall
not be considered as coring in rock and only be considered as boring in soil.
• Rock socket length

• Cavity roof (in limestone formation)
Coring of inclined rock surface, limestone pinnacles, cavities and soil below boulder/
floater shall be considered as boring in soil.
Socket length shall be measured from the flattened horizontal bedrock surface. This flat
horizontal surface shall be probe using Kelly bar or steel bar at a minimum of five
positions over the borehole to confirm sound bedrock for socketing. The length of
socketing shall be considered from while Rock Quality Designation (RQD) value is more
than 75% in incremental fashion. Unless otherwise shall be considered boring in soil. The
socekting minimum length shall be 1 (One) times Diameter of Pile. Contractor shall
arrange for testing the RQD value for the confirmation to the design requirement.
While socketing/boring can not accomplish for 1x D ( 1 times diameter of pile) or any
other reason, then contractor required to arrange for Dowelling to fix the pile toe. A
separate unit rate shall be considered.
Engineer may request for rock boring more than 1x D while the pile penetration depth
becomes less than design length or any other reason due to unforeseen soil strata
changes with out change of agreed unit rate.
xiii) Cleaning out
Upon completion of boring the excavation shall be cleaned of all loose, disturbed and or
remoulded soil and sediment soil to expose a firm base of undisturbed material using a
suitable and effective method to be approved by Engineer.
xiv) Continuity of construction
A pile constructed in a stable soil with out the use of temporary casing or other support
shall be bored and concreted with out prolonged delay to ensure that the soil
characteristics are not significantly altered.
xv) Surface water
Page 1050
UNOPS LKOC
All boreholes shall be protected from the possibility of any surface water entering the hole
from time to tiem and until the hole completed and ready for concreting.
Xvi) Drilling fluid and Soil Tests
Minimum frequencies of testing are as follows:
• Fresh drilling fluid

• Drilling fluid taken from the bottom of the pile before concreting
• Recycle drilling fluid taken from desending machine
• Drilling fluid left in the bored hole for more than 12 hours
The frequency of testing drilling fluid and the method and procedure of sampling shall be
proposed by the contractor and agreed by the Engineer before the commencement of the
work. The frequency may subsequently be varies with the approval of the Engineer.
Control tests for density shall be carried out daily on the drilling fluid using suitable
apparatus. The measuring device shall be calibrated to read within 0.01 g/ml. The results
shall be within the ranges as follows:
Tests for Bentonite Drilling Fluids
Propery to be measured Compliance values Test Method/Apparatus

measured at 200C
Density Less than 1.1 g/ml Mud density balance
Fluid loss Less than 40 ml 30 minutes test
Viscosity 30 to 90 seconds or Marsh Cone method
less than 20cP Fann Viscometer
Shear Strength (10 minutes 1.4-10 M/m2 or Shearometer
gel strength 4-40 N/m2 Fann Viscometer
Sand Contents Less than 5% Screen
PH 9.5 to 12 PH indicator paper stips or
electrical PH meter
Note: Where the Fann Viscometer is used, the fluid sample should be screened by 300
µm sieving before testing.
Tests for drilling fluid other than bentonite have to be approved before use.
f) Placing Reinforcement
Reinforcement shall be free from rust and mud and not be placed until inspected and
accepted. Reinforcement cages shall be sufficiently rigid to ensure that they remain at
their correct level during the lifting and placing of the concrete and the extraction of
temporary lining tubes. Reinforcement shall be maintained in its correct position during
concreting of the pile. The minimum cover to all reinforcement shall not be less than 75
mm unless stated otherwise. Concrete spacer shall be provided at every 3 meter interval,
size and minimum yield strength of reinforcement shall be as specified in the drawing.
Details by which the Contractor plans to ensure the correct cover to and position of the
reinforcement shall be approved by Engineer.
The main longitudinal reinforcement bars in piles not exceeding 12 meters in length shall
be in one continuous length unless otherwise specified. In piles longer than 12 meters
and required to be reinforced throughout their full lengths when specified, joints with
Page 1051
UNOPS LKOC
staggered laps of alternate bars will be permitted in main longitudinal bars at 12 metre
nominal intervals unless otherwise specified in the drawings. Joints of reinforcement bars
shall comply with the specific requirements of BS 8110 clause 3.12.8
The contractor shall submit for approval a method statement on the manner by which he
intends to lower reinforcement cages into pile shafts. Where tack welding is carried out on
pile reinforcement of the purpose of hoisting, such welding shall be located witin the top
100 mm of each reinforcement cage.
If required by the Engineer, reinforcement cages shall be flushed with freash water to
remove accumulated salts or other deposits immediately prior to lowering into the pile
shaft.
g) Placing Concrete
i) Approval
No concreting shall take place before the bottom of the excavation has been cleaned, the
borehole inspected and approval obtained in writing from the Engineer.
The method for placing concrete requires to be approved and conform with the following:
• The method of placing and the workability of the concrete shall be such that a
continuous monolithic concrete shaft of the full cross section is formed.
• The concrete shall be placed continuously, and without such interruption as would
allow the previously placed batch to have hardened. In this respect the Contractor
shall submit details of his contingency plans, standby plant etc. to be utilised in the
event of an equipment failure.
• The use of pumped concrete and the methods in its use shall be approved.
• The Contractor shall take all precautions in the design of the mix and placing of
the concrete to avoid arching of the concrete in a casing. No spoil, liquid or other
foreign matter shall be allowed to contaminate the concrete.
ii) Workability of Concrete
Slump measured at the time of discharge into the pile boring shall be in accordance with
the following Table
Slump
Piling Mix
Typical Conditions of Use
Workability
Minimum Range
(mm) (mm)
Placed into water-free unlined or
permanently lined bore of 600 mm
diameter or over, or where casting level
A 75 75 - 150 lies below temporary casing: reinforcement
widely spaced, leaving ample room for free
movement of concrete between bars.
Where reinforcement is not spaced widely;

B 100 100 - 200
where cut-off level of concrete is within
Page 1052
UNOPS LKOC
temporary casing; where pile bore is water-

free and the diameter is less than 600 mm.
150 or
Where concrete is to be placed by tremie
C 150 200
under water or drilling mud or by pumping
iii) Placing Concrete in Wet Hole
Immediately after the boring for the pile has been completed, approval to commence
concreting shall be sought and, when this has been obtained, concreting shall start
forthwith and continue without interruption. All concrete for cast-in-situ piles shall be
compacted to produce a dense homogeneous mass by a method agreed by the Engineer.
Concrete to be placed under water or drilling fluid shall be placed by tremie in accordance
with BS 8004 Clauses 7.4.5.4.2 and 8.2.2.3.4 and shall not be discharged freely into the
water or drilling fluid. Where discrepancies arise, the provisions of this specification shall
precedence.
Alternative methods of placing concrete such as the use of a drop bottom bucket or hose
from a concrete pump will not be accepted by the Engineer. At no stage concrete be
permitted to discharge freely into drilling fluid.
Before placing concrete, the Contractor shall ensure that there is no accumulation of silt,
other material, or heavily contaminated bentonite suspension at the base of the boring,
which could impair the free flow of concrete from the pipe of the tremie. A sample of the
bentonite suspension shall be taken from the base of the boring using an approved
sampling device. If the specific gravity of the suspension exceeds 1.25, the placing of
concrete shall not proceed. In this event the Contractor shall modify or replace the drilling
fluid to meet the requirements of this specification.
The tremie concrete pipe shall consist of a series of metal pipes with internal diameter not
less than 250mm. The receiving hopper shall have a capacity at least equal to that of the
pipe it feeds. At all times, a sufficient quantity of concrete shall be maintained within the
pipe to ensure that the pressure from the concrete exceeds that from the water or drilling
fluid. It shall be so designed that external projections are minimised, allowing the tremie to
pass through reinforcing cages without causing damage. The internal face of the pipe of
the tremie shall be free from projections.
The concrete shall be a rich coherent mix of high workability in accordance with Sub
Section 1004.2 and shall be placed in such a manner that segregation does not occur.
During and after concreting, care shall be taken to avoid damage to the concrete from
pumping and dewatering operations.
The hopper and pipe of the tremie shall be clean and watertight throughout. The pipe
shall extend to the base of the boring and a sliding plug or barrier shall be placed in the
pipe to prevent direct contact between the first charge of concrete in the pipe of the tremie
and the water or drilling fluid. The pipe shall at all times penetrate the concrete, which has
previously been placed and shall not be withdrawn from the concrete until completion of
concreting. The bottom of the tremie pipe shall be kept at least 1.5 metres under the
surface of concrete once that amount of concrete has been placed. At all times a
sufficient quantity of concrete shall be maintained within the pipe to ensure that the
pressure from it exceeds that from the water or drilling fluid. The tremie pipe shall be
withdrawn upward gently behind the concrete level, and shall not be subject to any shock
Page 1053
UNOPS LKOC
ot violent movement either in dislodging the concrete within the pipe or for any other
reason.
Concrete placement shall be halted should a delay or breakdown occur during the
concreting operation which in the opinion of the Engineer, could cause a cold joint,
entrapment of latency in the tremie concrete, or otherwise lead to defective concrete.
Before the remainder of the pile shaft can be concreted, the pile shall be dewatered and
the top surface of the tremie concrete cut back to sound concrete and cleaned of all
laitance and weak concrete. The remainder of the pile shall either be cast by tremie or in
the dry, as directed by Engineer. If this remainder work can not be carried out due to
construction difficulty, the contractor will need to construct a replacement pile. If required
to strengthen the remainder pile by H pile or any other method, the relevant cost shall be
borne by contractor.
The concrete for each pile shall be from same source. The contractor is to ensure that the
supply from whatever source (whether site-mixed or ready mixed) is of sufficient quantity
so that concrete for each pile shall be placed with out such interruption.
All holes bored shall be concreted within same day. In the event of rain, the contractor is
to provide adequate shelter to keep the hole dry and to concrete under cover.
The actual volume of concrete used for each pile must be measured with the calculated
volume required. If the differences between thse two volumes indicates a possible
necking, the Contractor shall propose and carry out appropriate tests an measures to the
approval of the Engineer to ensure the adequacy of the pile.
h) Extraction of Temporary Casing
Temporary casings shall be extracted while the concrete within them remains sufficiently
workable to ensure that the concrete is not lifted and the resultant pile is continuous and
full section. Temporary casings shall be extracted in not more than 2 hours after
concreting has completed.
When casings and lining are withdrawn as concreting proceeds, a sufficient head of
concrete shall be maintained to prevent the entry of ground water which may cause
reduction of cross section of the pile. No concrete shall be placed after bottom of the
casing or lining has been lifted above the concete. Concrete shall be placed continuously
as the casing is extracted until the desire head of concrete is obtained.
Adequate precautions shall be taken in all cases where the withdrawal of casing could
result in excess heads of water or drilling fluid. Excess pressure heads are caused by
displacemjent of water or fluid by concrete as the concrte flows into its final position
against the wall of the shaft. Precautions such as the use of two or more discontinuous
lengths of casing (double casing) shall be deemed an acceptable method of construction
in this case.
i) Workability of Concrete
The method of placing and the workability of concrete shall be such that a continuous
monolithic concrete shaft of the full cross section is formed. The method of placing shall
be approved by Engineer. The contractor shall take all precautions in the design of the
mix an dthe placement of concrete to avoid arching of the concrete in the pile shaft. No
spoil, liquid or other deleterious matter shall be allowed to contaminate the concrete.
ii) Concrete Level
Page 1054
UNOPS LKOC
When the casing is being extracted a sufficient quantity of concrete shall be maintained
within it to ensure that pressure from external water, drilling fluid or soil is exceeded and
that the pile is neither reduced in section nor contaminated. The toe of the temporary
casing shall be kept a minimum of 2 metres under the outlet of the tremie. No concrete
shall be placed in the boring once the bottom of the casing has been lifted above the top
of the concrete; it shall be placed continuously as the casing is extracted until the desired
head of concrete is obtained.
Adequate precautions shall be taken in all cases where excess heads of water or drilling
fluid could be caused as the casing is withdrawn because of the displacement of water or
fluid by the concrete as it flows into its final position against the walls of the shaft.
The top of the pile shall be brought above the required cut-off level by an amount
sufficient to ensure a sound concrete at cut-off level and the surplus removed to ensure
satisfactory bonding of the pile haed to the structure.
The pile top shall after clean cutting be embedded 100 mm in the foundation, unless
otherwise specified in the drawings. On completion of concreting, the remaining empty
bore shall be backfilled with sand or lean concrete unless otherwise agreed by Engineer.
iii) Vibrating Extractors
The use of vibrating casing extractors shall be permitted.
iv) Reinforcement Cage
During concreting and pulling the casing, the reinforcement cage shall be secured against
uplift and the top shall be kept under close inspection.
v) Stripping Pile Head and Bonding
The piles shall be constructed to a sufficient height above the required cut-off levels
(Overcast) to ensure the all concrete at and below is homogeneous and free of laitance
and deleterious matter. The contractor be required to provide adequate reinforcement
with sufficient length to project above cut-off levels so can be that the reinforcement can
be bonded in the capping beams/ Pile cap. After completion of piling, the contractor shall
excavate and cut back the piles as necessary to verify the ct-off levels and to give
accurate details of the pile positions as compared with the positions indicated on the pile
layout plans of the details drawings. Defective concrete in the pile heads shall be cut
away and mede good with new concrete well bonded to the concrete in pile head. If the
pile is under cast, it shall be built-up with new concrete and a permanent casing. The pile
head breaking equipment and method statement shall be approved by Engineer before
commencement.
i) Temporary Support
The Contractor shall ensure that free standing piles are temporarily braced or stayed
immediately after driving to prevent loosening of the piles in the ground and to ensure that
no damage resulting from oscillation, vibration or movement of any free-standing pile
length can occur.
ii) Pile acceptance Criteria
The target termination depth, required socket length, concrete strength and the required
working pile capacities are shown in the Drawings. The actual termination depths and
Page 1055
UNOPS LKOC
socket lengths shall be agreed with the Engineer based on the review of the conditions
encountered during boring and prior to commencement of concreting. Pile shall be meet
tolerance requirements as specified and satisfy the integrity tests as specified.
iii) Measures in Case of Rejected Piles
If any pile is found unsatisfactory by any reason either non-release of chisel or bucket or
in the opinion of the Engineer for utilization in the structure it shall be cut off below the pile
cap if so ordered by the Engineer.
The pile shall be replaced as directed by the Engineer. All extra expenses shall be borne
by the Contractor and payment shall be made on the basis that no replacement pile had
to be provided for the unsatisfactory pile.
When the safe bearing value of any pile is found by test to be less than the design load,
longer piles or additional piles shall be installed as ordered in writing by the Engineer
j) Measurement and Payment
a) Measurement
Boring of piles shall be measured in metre for completed and accepted works. The
boring shall be measured from the Toe of the pile up-to existing/original Bed level
(cofferdam level shall not be considered) of the Rivers as per the approved design and
drawings. In case the boring commenced by using coffer-dam; then the length of boring
from the coffer dam to the existing river bed shall not be considered as pay item.
Concrete in the piles is to be measured by multiplying the cross-sectional areas of the
pile ordered by the length of piles as cast up to cut-off level as shown in the drawing, no
deduction shall be made for volume of steel. No measurement shall be made for
cutting or building up of pile head up to cut-off level. The pile head breaking shall be not
measured separately for payment.
Boring shall be commenced from the Coffer dam constructed by Employer (UNOPS).
The cost of boring shall not inclusive of cofferdam/ artificial island or any barge.
The reinforcement of concrete piles is to be measured in tonnes and shall be paid

separately under clause 1002. Cover blocks, binding wires or other materials required
for binding or supporting of reinforcement shall not to be measured.
Permanent steel casing shall be measured in meter length accepted and approved. The
temporary casing up to 6.0 meter shall not be considered as pay item.
b) Payment
The concrete and reinforcement shall be supplied by the Employer (UNOPS) as per
clause 1001 and 1002 of specifications.
The rates for boring shall include the costs of dressing, levelling and compaction of the
area necessary for movement of pile driving rig and other machinery.
The rates of boring shall cover all the necessary items of work required to complete the
pile foundation work including bringing the necessary plant and piling platform for piles
to the site, necessary setting out works, movement of piling equipment from one pile
location to the other. The rate shall also include for bringing and providing all labour
and material necessary for complete work including fencing and other precautionary
Page 1056
UNOPS LKOC
measures to be taken during construction of pile foundation. The rates shall also
including bottom cleaning as specified. The rates for boring shall include cost of boring
through all sorts of strata including hard rock, lime stones (RQD minimum 75% where
applicable, all jetting, drilling and /or all other works required to obtain specified
penetration pile.
The unit rate for permanent steel casing shall include cost of all materials, fixing in
positions including costs of all necessary labour and incidental as per required diameter
and depth all as specified to complete the work.
The unit rate for temporary steel casing shall be considered if exceed 6.0 meter as per
instruction of Engineer include all cost of providing and fixing in position and extraction
of casing after completion of work including all necessary labour and incidental as per
required diameter all as specified to complete the work.
Pay item Description of Item Pay Unit

1004(1) Boring in all types of soil/Sand/gravel/ lime stone/ Linear Metre
boulder/ Rock including 1XD (Equivalent to pile
diameter) to hard Rock socketing of minimum RQD
75% for cast-in-situ reinforced concrete bored piles in
accordance with Section 1004.5. Cost includes
supply, fixing and removal of 6 m (minimum)
temporary steel casing. The labour and necessary
equipments for Pouring of concrete shall be paid
separately under clause 1001 (1) and fabrication,
installation & fixing of steel re-bar casing shall be paid
separately under clause 1002.
1004(2) Rock boring for doweling works up to 5m depth/or
more to moderately hard rock minimum 75% RQD
and filling by G30 concrete with 02 nos. 25mm rebar
as per instruction of Engineering in charge
a) 125mm~150mm dia on existing ground Linear Metre

b) 125mm~150mm dia in water Linear Metre
1004(3) Rock boring for doweling works up to 5m depth/or
more to moderately hard rock minimum 75% RQD
and filling by G30 concrete with 01 no. 32mm rebar
as per instruction of Engineering in charge
a) 50mm dia on existing ground Linear Metre
Vertical Piles
a) Up to 20 meter length
i) 600mm dia Linear metre
ii) 750mm dia Linear metre
iii) 1000mm dia Linear metre
iv) 1200mm dia Linear metre
b) 20m to 30m length

c) above 30m length
Page 1057
UNOPS LKOC

1004(2) Providing and fixing in position additional

temporary steel casing in Cast-in-situ
piling in Abutment and piers in accordance
with Section 1004.5 and as per direction of
the Engineer. Extra length to 6m allowed
for in item 1004(1) above.

1004(3) Providing and fixing in position of

permanent steel casing with specified
depth in Cast-in-situ piling in Abutment
and piers as per specification section
1004.5 and direction of the Engineer.

B) PILE TEST LOADING (STATIC LOAD TEST)
a) Descriptions
1) General
This Section deals with the testing of a pile by the application of an axial load or force i.e
for Static Load test. It covers vertical piles tested in compression.
2) Definitions
i) Allowable Load
The load which may be safely applied to a pile after taking into account its ultimate
bearing capacity, negative friction, pile spacing, overall bearing capacity of the ground
below and allowable settlement.
ii) Compression Pile
A pile which is designed to resist an axial force such as would cause it to penetrate
further into the ground.
iii) Kentledge
The dead weight used in a loading test.
iv) Maintained Load Test
Page 1058
UNOPS LKOC
A loading test in which each increment of load is held constant either for a defined period
of time or until the rate of movement (settlement or uplift) falls to a specified value.
v) Pilot Pile
A pile installed before the commencement of the main piling works or a specific part of the
works for the purpose of establishing the suitability of the chosen type of pile and for
confirming its design, dimensions and bearing capacity. Pilot piles may be utilized as
working piles, subject to the Engineer’s approval.
vi) Proof Load
A load applied to a selected pile to confirm that it is suitable for the load at the settlement
specified. A proof load should not normally exceed 250% of the working load on a pile
except in circumstances where Special Provisions are provided for the testing of precast
piles driven to a set. In these circumstances, 300% is specified.
vii) Reaction System
The arrangement of kentledge, piles, anchors or rafts that provides a resistance against
which the pile is tested.
viii) Tension Pile
A pile which is designed to resist an axial force such as would cause it to be extracted
from the ground.
ix) Test Pile
Any pile to which a test loading is, or is to be, applied.
x) Ultimate Bearing Capacity
The load at which the resistance of the soil becomes fully mobilised.
xi) Working Load
The load which the pile is designed to carry.
xii) Working Pile
One of the piles forming the foundation of a structure.
b) Supervision
All tests shall be carried out only under the direction of an experienced and competent
supervisor conversant with the test equipment and test procedure. All personnel operating
the test equipment shall have been trained in its use.
c) Safety Precautions
1) General
Page 1059
UNOPS LKOC
When preparing for, conducting and dismantling a pile test the Contractor shall carry out
the requirement of the various regulations and other statutory instruments that are
applicable to the work for the provision and maintenance of safe working conditions, and
shall in addition make such other provision as may be necessary to safeguard against
any hazards that are involved in the testing or preparations for testing.
2) Kentledge
Where kentledge is used the Contractor shall construct the foundations for the kentledge
and any cribwork, beams or other supporting structure in such a manner that there will not
be differential settlement, bending or deflexion of an amount that constitutes a hazard to
safety or impairs the efficiency of the operation. The kentledge shall be adequately
bonded, tied or otherwise held together to prevent it falling apart, or becoming unstable
because of deflection of the supports. The weight of kentledge shall be greater than the
maximum test load and if the weight is estimated from the density and volume of the
constituent materials an adequate factor of safety against error shall be allowed.
3) Tension Piles and Ground Anchors

Where tension piles or ground anchors are used the Contractor shall ensure that the load
is correctly transmitted to all the tie rods or bolts. The extension of rods by welding shall
not be permitted unless it is known that the steel will not be reduced in strength by
welding. The bond stresses of the rods in tension shall not exceed normal permissible
bond stresses for the type of steel and grade of concrete used.
4) Testing Equipment
In all cases the Contractor shall ensure that when the hydraulic jack and load measuring
device are mounted on the pile head the whole system shall be stable up to the maximum
load to be applied. Means shall be provided to enable dial gauges to be read from a
position clear of the kentledge stack or test frame so that failure in any part of the system
due to overloading, buckling, loss of hydraulic pressure will not constitute a hazard to
personnel.
The hydraulic jack, pump, hoses, pipes, couplings and other apparatus to be operated
under hydraulic pressure shall be capable of withstanding a test pressure of 1.5 times the
maximum working pressure without leaking. The maximum test load or test pressure
expressed as a reading on the gauge in use shall be displayed and all operators shall be
made aware of this limit.
d) Construction of a Pilot Pile to be Test Loaded
1) Notice of Construction
The Contractor shall give the Engineer at least 48 hours notice of the commencement of
construction of any pilot pile, which is to be test loaded.
2) Method of Construction
Each pilot test pile shall be constructed in a manner similar to that to be used for the
construction of the working piles, and by the use of similar equipment and materials. Any
variation shall only be permitted with prior approval. Extra reinforcement and concrete of
increased strength shall be permitted in the shafts of pilot piles at the discretion of the
Engineer.
3) Boring or Driving Record
Page 1060
UNOPS LKOC
For each pilot pile which is to be tested a detailed record of the soils encountered during
boring, or of the progress during driving shall be made and submitted to the Engineer
daily not later than noon on the next working day.
4) Cut-Off Level
The pile shaft shall terminate at the normal cut-off level, or at a level required by the
Engineer.
The pile shaft shall be extended where necessary above the cut-off level of working piles
so that gauges and other apparatus to be used in the testing process are not damaged by
water or falling debris.
5) Pile Head for Compression Tests
For a pile that is tested in compression, the pile head or cap shall be formed to give a
plane surface which is normal to the axis of the pile, sufficiently large to accommodate the
loading and settlement-measuring equipment and adequately reinforced or protected to
prevent damage from the concentrated application of load from the loading equipment.
e) Preparation of a Working Pile to be Tested
If a test is required on a working pile the Contractor shall cut down or otherwise prepare
the pile for testing as required by the Engineer in accordance with SL. 4 and 5 of Sub
Sections d of section B.
f) Reaction Systems
1) Compression Tests
Compression tests shall be carried out using kentledge, tension piles or specially
constructed anchorages.
Where kentledge is to be used, it shall be supported on cribwork disposed around the pile
head so that its centre of gravity is on the axis of the pile. The bearing pressure under
supporting cribs shall be such as to ensure stability of the kentledge stack. Kentledge
shall not be carried directly on the pile head, except when directed by the Engineer.
2) Working Piles
Where working piles are used as reaction piles their movement shall be measured to
within an accuracy of 0.5 mm.
3) Spacing
Where kentledge is used for loading vertical piles in compression, the distance from the
edge of the test pile to the nearest part of the crib supporting the kentledge stack in
contact with the ground shall be not less than 1.3 metres. The centre to centre spacing of
vertical reaction piles, including working piles used as reaction piles, from a test pile shall
be not less than three times the diameter of the test pile or the reaction piles or 2 metres,
whichever is the greatest.
4) Adequate Reaction
The size, length and number of the piles or anchors, or the area of the rafts, shall be
adequate to transmit the maximum test load to the ground in a safe manner without
excessive movement or influence on the test pile.
Page 1061
UNOPS LKOC
5) Care of Piles
The method employed in the installation of any reaction piles, anchors or rafts shall be
such as to prevent damage to any test pile or working pile.
6) Loading Arrangement
The loading arrangement used shall be designed to transfer safely to the test pile the
maximum load required in testing. Full details shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to
any work related to the testing process being carried out on the Site.
g) Equipment for Applying Load

The equipment used for applying load shall consist of one or more hydraulic rams or jacks
with the total capacity of the jacks being at least equal to the required maximum load. The
jack or jacks shall be arranged in conjunction with the reaction system to deliver an axial
load to the test pile. The complete system shall be capable of transferring the maximum
load required for the test.
h) Measurement of Load
Suitable approved measuring devices for determining the load on the pile shall be
supplied by the Contractor. Certificates of calibration shall be supplied to the Engineer. In
addition, large diameter (i.e. exceeding 1.2 metre) test piles shall be instrumented at 5
different depths to measure the load distribution along the piles. The instrumentation shall
consist of both a mechanical system and strain gauges for measuring the pile
deformation. The mechanical system shall consist of 6 mm steel rods or high tensile steel
wires gauge No. 23, placed in steel tubes down to the various depths, and connected to
dial gauges at the top. The strain gauges shall be of a stable type, wholly protected by a
steel capsule. They shall be welded to the steel reinforcement, 2 gauges at each depth.
The Engineer shall approve the type of gauges to be used and other details on the
instrumentation.
i) Adjustability of Loading Equipment

The loading equipment shall be capable of adjustment throughout the test to obtain a
smooth increase of load or to maintain each load constant at the required stages of a
maintained loading test.
j) Measuring Movement of Pile Heads

1) General
In a maintained load test movement of the pile head shall be measured by two of the
methods as described below. One method for settlement measurements, the other
method for control.
2) Levelling Method
An optical or any other levelling method by reference to an external datum may be used.
Where a level and staff are used, the level and scale of the staff shall be chosen to
enable readings to be made to within an accuracy of 0.5 mm. A scale attached to the pile
or pile cap may be used instead of a levelling staff. At least two datum points shall be
established on permanent objects or other well-founded structures, or deep datum points
shall be installed. Each datum point shall be situated so that only one setting up of the
level is needed. No datum point shall be affected by the test loading or other operations
Page 1062
UNOPS LKOC
on the site. Where another method of levelling is proposed this shall be approved in
writing.
3) Independent Reference Frame
An independent reference frame may be set up to permit measurement of the movement
of the pile. The supports for the frame shall be founded in such a manner and at such a
distance from the test pile, kentledge support cribs, reaction piles, anchorages and rafts
that movements of the ground in the vicinity of the equipment do not cause movement of
the reference frame during the testing. Check observations of any movements of the
reference frame shall be made and a check shall be made of the movement of the pile
head relative to an external datum during the progress of the test. In no case shall the
supports be less than three test pile diameters or 2 metres, whichever is the greater, from
the centre of the test pile. The measurement of pile movement shall be made by two dial
gauges rigidly mounted on the reference frame that bear on surfaces normal to the pile
axis fixed to the pile cap or head. Alternatively the gauges may be fixed to the pile and
bear on surfaces on the reference frame. The dial gauges shall be placed in diametrically
opposed positions and be equidistant from the pile axis. The dial gauges shall enable
readings to be made to within an accuracy of 0.1 mm. The reference frames shall be
protected from sun and wind.
4) Other Methods
The Contractor may submit for approval any other method for measuring the movement of
pile heads.
k) Protection of Testing Equipment

1) Protection from Weather
Throughout the test period all equipment for measuring load and movement shall be
protected from the weather.
2) Prevention of Disturbance
Construction equipment and persons who are not involved in the testing process shall be
kept at a sufficient distance from the test to avoid disturbance to the measurement
apparatus.
l) Supervision
1) Notice of Test
The Contractor shall give the Engineer at least 24 hours notice of the commencement of
the test.
2) Records
During the progress of a test, the testing equipment and all records of the test as required
in Sub Section n (Presentation of Results, Schedule of Recorded Data) of Section 1004.5
shall be available for inspection by the Engineer.
m) Test Procedure
1) Proof Test by Maintained Load Test
The maximum load, which shall be applied in a proof test, is shown on the Drawings. The
loading and unloading shall be carried out in stages as shown in Table 1004-5-A or as
required by the Engineer. Following each application of an increment of load the load
Page 1063
UNOPS LKOC
shall be held for not less than the period shown in Table 1004-5-A or until the rate of
settlement is less than 0.25 mm/hour and is slowing down. The rate of settlement shall be
calculated from the slope of the curve obtained by plotting values of settlement versus
time and drawing a smooth curve through the points.
Each stage of unloading shall proceed after the expiry of the period shown in Table 1004-
5-A. For any period when the load is constant, time and settlement shall be recorded
immediately on reaching the load and at approximately 15 minute intervals for 1 hour, at
30 minute intervals between 1 hour and 4 hours, and at 1 hour intervals between 4 hours
and 12 hours after the application of the increment of load. The Engineer may require that
the full loading, or any portion of the loading, be maintained on the pile for periods longer
than shown in Table 1004-5-A.
Table 1004-5-A
Loading Sequence
Load as Percentage of Working
Load Minimum Time of Holding Load
Bored Piles Driven Piles
25 50 1 hour
50 100 1 hour
75 125 1 hour
100 150 1 hour
75 125 10 minutes
50 100 10 minutes
25 50 10 minutes
0 0 1 hour
100 150 6 hours
125 200 1 hour
125 250 6 hour
175 275 1 hour
200 300 24 hours Proof Road
175 275 10 minutes
150 250 10 minutes
125 225 10 minutes
100 200 10 minutes
75 150 10 minutes
50 100 10 minutes
25 50 10 minutes
0 0 1 hour
n) Presentation of Results
1) Results to be Submitted
Results shall be submitted as:
Page 1064
UNOPS LKOC
a) A summary in writing to the Engineer, unless otherwise directed, within 24 hours of

the completion of the test, which shall give for a proof test by maintained load for
each stage of loading, the period for which the load was held, the load and the
maximum settlement or uplift recorded.
b) The completed schedule of recorded data as given below within seven days of the
completion of the test.
2) Schedule of Recorded Data
The Contractor shall provide information about the tested pile in accordance with the
following schedule where applicable.
i) General
1) Site location
2) Contract identification
3) Proposed structure
4) Date of test
ii) Pile Details
1) Identification (number and location of the test pile)

2) Ground level at pile position
3) Head level as which test load is applied
4) Type of pile
5) Length in ground
6) Level in ground
7) Level of toe
8) Details of Permanent casing
iii) Installation Details
1) Dates and times of boring, driving and concreting of test pile and adjacent piles
2) Date and time of casting concrete
3) Driven length of pile or temporary casing at final set
4) Hammer type, size or weight
5) Dolly and packing, type and condition before and after driving
6) Driving log (depth, blows per 250 mm, interruptions or breaks in driving)
7) At final set and at redrive set, for drop or single acting hammers, the length of the
drop or stroke, for diesel hammers the length of the stroke and the blows per
minutes, for double-acting hammers the number of blows per minute
8) Condition of pile head or temporary casing after driving
iv) Test Procedure
1) Weight of kentledge
2) Tension pile, ground anchor or compression pile details
3) Plan of test arrangement showing position and distances of kentledge supports,
rafts, tension or compression piles and reference frame to test pile
4) Jack capacity
5) Method of Load measurement
6) Method(s) of penetration measurement
7) Relevant dates and times
v) Test Results
Page 1065
UNOPS LKOC
1) In tabular form
2) In graphical form: loads plotted against movements and time
o) Completion of a Test
1) Measuring Equipment
On completion of a test all equipment and measuring devices shall be dismantled,

checked and either stored so that they are available for use in further tests or removed
from the Site.
2) Kentledge
Kentledge and its supporting structure shall be removed from the test pile and stored so
that they are available for use in further tests or removed from the Site.
3) Temporary Piles
On completion of a preliminary test, temporary tension piles shall be cut off below ground
level, removed from the Site and the ground made good with approved material as
specified.
p) Measurment
The method of measurement for initial and routine load test shall be in numbers of pile
tested as per specifications.
q) Payment
Rates for initial testing of pilot piles for vertical compression/ static load test shall cover
complete installation and casting of test pile up to specified depth and all necessary work
including earth excavation up to cut-off level, for loading, supplying and fixing of testing
instruments recording the results, and unloading, dismantling and clearing the site.
These rates shall be inclusive of all plant/equipment, material and labour necessary for
any part of the works and submission of test results as specified.
Rates for routine static load test on working piles already driven shall cover cutting of pile
head up to test levels, earth excavation, all necessary wok for making arrangements for
loading, supplying and fixing of testing instruments, recording the results, and making all
arrangements for unloading, dismantling and clearing the site. All these rates shall also
cover all materials and labour necessary for any part of the works and submission of test
results as specified.
Pay items Unit
1004(4) Carrying out initial vertical

load test (Static) on pilot cast-in-situ pile Number (Each)
1004(5) Carrying out Routine vertical load

test (Static) on working cast-in-situ pile Number (Each)
1004.6 Sonic Integrity Test
1) Descriptions
Page 1066
UNOPS LKOC
Non-Destructive Testing is to be performed by the Employer through RDA professionals

or any reputed organization appointed by the Engineer on a number of constructed
working piles at the location of each abutment and pier position of a structure to verify the
integrity of the installed piles. The apparatus for the Integrity Test shall be selected and
arranged by the testing organization. Tests shall be carried out only under the direction of
experienced and competent professionals conversant with the test equipment and test
procedure.
Test piles are to be selected by the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide detailed
records as recorded during installation of each pile which is to be tested. The Contractor
shall cut down all pile heads at the cut-off level or otherwise prepare the pile for testing as
required by the Engineer. The pile head shall be formed to give a plane surface which is
normal to the axis of the pile.
Sonic Integrity Testing is a quick method to check the continuity of installed foundation
piles. This method detects pile defects like cracks, soil intrusion and variations in
diameter. The final pile length can also be checked.
If any pile after Integrity Test is found unsatisfactory in the opinion of the Engineer for
utilisation in the structure, the pile shall be replaced as directed by the Engineer. All extra
expenses shall be borne by the Contractor and payment shall be made in accordance
with sub section 1004.3(A)(i) of the Specifications.
2) Measurement and Payment
Sonic Integrity Test described in the Specifications, shall be carried out by the BRRL or
any approved organization professionals and the necessary charges made by the testing
authorities for performing the tests will be made by the Contractor and the amount, shall
be reimbursed to the Contractor by the Employer from the Provisional Sum as indicated in
the Bill of Quantities. The Contractor should include all costs associated with the Integrity
Tests including all taxes, overhead and profit under Contractor’s mark up of BoQ item.
Pay items Unit
1004(6) Provision for Integrity Tests Number
1004.7 Pile Records
Add the following after the 2nd paragraph:-
In case of cast insitu pile the Contractor shall keep records as indicated below of the
installation of each pile and shall submit two signed copies of these records to the
Engineer not later than noon of the next working day after the pile is installed. The signed
records shall form a record of the work.
The following data are required:

a) Pile location
b) Pile reference number
c) Pile type
d) Nominal cross-sectional dimensions or diameter
e) Length of preformed pile
f) Date and time of driving or redriving
g) Ground level at commencement of installation of pile
h) Working level
i) Pile toe level
Page 1067
UNOPS LKOC
j) Type, weight, drop and mechanical condition of hammer and equivalent information
for other equipment
k) Number and type of packing used and type and condition of dolly used during
driving the pile
l) Set of pile in mm per 10 blows or number of blows per 250 mm of penetration
m) If required, the sets taken at intervals during the last 3 metres of driving
n) If required, temporary compression of ground and pile from time of a marked
increase in driving resistance until pile reaches its final level
o) All information regarding obstructions delays and other interruptions to the
sequence of work
1004.8 Pile Dynamic Tests
a) DESCRIPTION
High-strain dynamic testing is performed by obtaining and analyzing records of shaft force
and velocity under drop weight impacts for evaluations of shaft load carrying capacity,
structural integrity, and load-movement and shaft-soil load transfer relationships. Testing
procedures shall conform to the ASTM D 4945 specification unless as otherwise noted
below. The following are specifications and instructions for high-strain dynamic testing of
drilled and cast-in-place foundation shafts.
This work shall consist of furnishing all materials, equipment and labor necessary for
conducting high-strain dynamic tests on drilled and cast-in-place shafts (hereafter each
noted as test shaft). The Contractor shall be required to supply material and labor as
hereinafter specified and including prior to, during, and after the load test. High-strain
dynamic tests (herein also called dynamic tests) are non-destructive quick tests. It is
intended that the test shaft be left in a condition suitable for use in production.
b) EQUIPMENT
The Contractor shall supply all materials and equipment required to prepare the test shaft,
dynamically test it, and return the test shaft to a condition suitable for use in the finished
structure. Equipment and procedures required to perform the test include but are not
limited to:
• If a permanent casing is not used as a feature to construct the test shaft, then a shaft
top extension, consisting of a thin walled casing or equivalent, shall be used to extend
the test shaft by length equal to two diameters. This top length, defined as the “test
area” must be exposed and readily accessible by the Testing Engineer at the time of
the test. If the top of the test shaft is below grade, then the Contractor shall have
equipment available to remove surrounding soil (creating a safe working environment)
so as to completely expose a test area as described above. Windows on possibly four
opposite sides of the test shaft may have to be cut off in the steel casing to reach the
concrete.
• Means to insure flat, level, (axial to test shaft) and solid concrete shaft top. Concrete
should be level with, or above the casing.
• A drop weight in the range of one to two percent (1 - 2%) of the anticipated test shaft
capacity, or as determined by the Engineer. The impacting surface of the drop weight
should have an area between 70 and 130% of the test shaft top area. The shape of
the ram weight should be as regular as possible (square, round, hexagonal, etc).
Page 1068
UNOPS LKOC
• A guide allowing variable drop heights typically between 1 to 2 m, or as determined by

the Engineer.
• A t top cushion consisting of new sheets of plywood with total thickness between 50 to
150 mm, or as determined by the Engineer.
• If protruding reinforcing bars are present, the Contractor has the option to incorporate
the reinforcing steel in the test area. Upon successful completion of the dynamic test,
the surrounding concrete can then be removed as to make the foundation suitable for
use in the structure. If the Contractor selects not to incorporate the steel in such a
manner as described above, then a steel beam or pipe (cross sectional area
approximately 20% of the shaft cross sectional area) shall be supplied with sufficient
length such that the ram impact will not interfere with the reinforcing bars. Steel
striker plates and plywood cushion must also be sized so that they cover as much of
the impact area as possible.
• One (1) kW of 115 Volt AC power.
Surveyors' transit, laser light, or equivalent for measurements of pile set under each
impact.
c) DYNAMIC TESTING FIRM
It is the Contractor’s responsibility to employ and compensate a specialized dynamic

testing firm. Dynamic testing is to be performed by an independent specialist from a firm
with a minimum of five (5) years experience in dynamic testing. The actual dynamic test
shall be conducted and/or supervised by a Licensed Professional Engineer with at least
two (2) years of dynamic testing experience or who has achieved Basic Level or better on
the Foundation QC High Strain Dynamic Pile Testing Examination. Selection of the firm
must be acceptable by the Engineer.
The independent dynamic testing firm must supply the following testing instrumentation in
addition to that outlined in ASTM specification D 4945-00 Section 5:
• Pile Driving Analyzer® (PDA) manufactured by Pile Dynamics, Inc., model PAK, PAX
or PAL or equivalent.
• Four calibrated strain transducers.
• Four calibrated accelerometers.
Prior to performing the dynamic test, the Testing Engineer must be provided with soil
borings, shaft installation records, concrete properties (strength, etc.) and details
regarding the anticipated dynamic loading equipment. The test Engineer is required to
perform wave equation analyses (using GRLWEAP software by Pile Dynamics, Inc. or
equivalent) to determine the suitability of the proposed dynamic load testing equipment
and an acceptable range of ram drop heights so as not to cause damage in the test shaft
during the test.
d) PROCEDURE
• The test shaft shall be constructed using approved installation techniques.
• If a permanent casing is not required, then the upper length equal to two shaft
diameters, noted as the "test area", must be cased in a thin wall tube or equivalent as
Page 1069
UNOPS LKOC
noted above. Casing of this test area must be made as a continuation of the
construction of the test shaft. There should not be soil contamination or non-
uniformities in the concrete located within or below the test area. Test shaft top
concrete shall be made level to the casing and smoothed.
• Prior to testing time, the Contractor shall make the shaft test area length completely
accessible to the Testing Engineer.
• Prior to the test, four "windows" (approximate size of 150 by 150 mm diametrically
opposite of each other will be located and removed from the casing, if appropriate, or
an entire band of the casing removed to expose a smooth concrete surface for
attachment of the sensors. Sensors are typically attached at least one diameter
below the shaft top. Sensors might be attached to the steel if the impedance
percentage of the steel is relatively high, and if the permanent casing is relatively long
(extending several diameters below the sensors).
• In cases where casing is not present, the Testing Engineer, or Contractor under the
direction of the testing Engineer, shall smooth (by grinding) areas around the pile
circumference such that proper sensor attachment can be accomplished.
• Sensors shall be attached by the Testing Engineer ot at the direction of the Testing
Engineer to the exposed concrete or steel casing in a secure manner as to prevent
slippage under impact.
• Shaft top should be examined to insure concrete is flush with or above the casing.
• Apply plywood cushion and then striker plate to the shaft top. If reinforcing protrudes
from the shaft top, then the steel beam or pipe (used to transfer the impact to the
shaft top) should be secured in such a manner as not to move under impact.
• At least two (2) hammer impacts should be applied to the top of the shaft. First drop
height should be minimal to allow the Testing Engineer to assess the testing
equipment, the driving system and stresses on the foundation. Subsequent impacts
can then be applied by utilizing sequentially higher drop heights until either stresses in
the foundation are excessive or the shaft permanent set for the applied impact
exceeds 2.5 mm.
• Upon completion of the test, it is the Contractors' responsibility to return the shaft to
acceptable production condition.
e) REPORTING OF RESULTS
It is the Testing Engineers' responsibility to submit a timely report of the testing results. In
addition to the field results, results from at least one (1) CAPWAP® analysis or equivalent
shall be submitted. CAPWAP analyses shall be performed by an Engineer that has
achieved Advanced Level or better on the Foundation QC High Strain Dynamic Pile
Testing Examination. The report must also provide the following:
• Wave Equation analysis results obtained prior to testing.
• CAPWAP (or equivalent) analysis results.
Page 1070
UNOPS LKOC
• For each impact the maximum measured force, maximum calculated tension force,
transferred energy to the sensor location, corresponding stresses, and the Case
Method bearing capacity.
• Assessment of the test results both with respect to pile capacity and integrity.
f) METHOD OF PAYMENT
The high strain dynamic testing procedure shall be considered as any material, labor,
equipment, etc. required above and beyond the requirements of the installation of the
foundation to be tested. This item should include everything necessary to test the shaft,
under direction from the Engineer. All costs associated with the normal production of the
test shaft are measured and paid for elsewhere in the contract documents.
g) BASIS OF PAYMENT
The complete and accepted "High Strain Dynamic Load Test" shall be paid for at the
contract price bid for "High Strain Dynamic Load Test", each. This shall constitute full
compensation for all costs incurred during the procurement, installation, conducting of
test, and subsequent removal of test equipment.
Payments shall be made under:
Pay Item: Pay Unit:

High Strain Dynamic Load Test Each
1005 WELL FOUNDATIONS FOR STRUCTURES
1005.1 Description
No change.
Materials
Delete section: ‘(b) Steel for reinforcements…’ and substitute the following :-
(b) Steel for reinforcement to SLS 375, CS 26 or BS 4449.
1006. RANDOM RUBBLE MASONRY

No change
1007. BRICK WORK AND BLOCK WORK FOR STRUCTURES

No change
1008. FORMWORK FOR STRUCTURES

No change
1009. BRIDGE EXPANSION JOINTS
1009.1 Description
No Change
1009.2 Materials
Page 1071
UNOPS LKOC
Supply of expansion joints shall be done by Employer (UNOPS) and contractor shall
responsible to be installing the expansion joints as per drawings at the expansion joint
location on slab and abutments
a) No change
(b) Delete and substitute the following:-
Similar to open joints filled expansion joints shall be constructed where shown in the
drawings. The filler shall be in correct position when the concrete on one side of the
joint is placed. After removal of the form, concrete on the other side shall be placed.
The specified thickness of premoulded filler shall be provided at locations of expansion

joints where shown in the drawing. The material shall conform to the requirements of
AASHTO M33 (ASTM D994) and as approved by the Engineer. The filler shall consist
of large pieces as far as possible and assembly of small pieces to make up the required
size shall not be permitted.
The premoulded filler shall be placed in correct position before concrete is placed
against the filler. The material shall form part of the joint and while concreting, care
shall be taken to prevent the filler material from being displaced. After the work is
completed, the exposed face of the joint shall be cleaned of all loose material sticking to
it.
Where shown on the drawings, the joints shall be sealed with joint seals in accordance
with the details shown on the drawings and provisions in these specifications.
The joint seals shall consist of recess in the joint filler which shall be filled with asphalt
layer, bitumen or rubber bitumen or similar compound specially manufactured for
sealing joints in concrete as approved by the Engineer. The sealed joint shall comply
with the following requirements:
i) The seal shall be in planned position.

ii) The seal shall satisfactorily resist the intrusion of foreign material and water.
iii) The seal shall provide bump-free passage of traffic.
The premoulded filler in the joint shall be raked down to the specified depth as shown in
the drawing and to the profile of the finished road surface. All foreign matter shall be
removed from the recess to its bottom. At least 72 hours prior to installing the joint seal,
the contractor shall repair all spalls, fractures, breaks, or voids in the concrete surface
of the joint recess. Immediately prior to placing the seal, the joint shall be cleaned with
air jet to remove all residue and foreign matter and the joint surface shall be surface dry.
Seals of approved compound shall then be placed to completely fill up the prepared
recess in the joint.
(c) Joints provided with steelwork
Add to the end of the section the following :-
Page 1072
UNOPS LKOC
Where proprietary expansion joints are used in bridge decks, the storage and installation
of joints, jointing materials, sealants and other associated items shall be in accordance
with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
Different joint systems shall not, except with the approval of the Engineer, be combined at
one end of a deck.
1009.4 Measurement and payment
Measurement: No change
b) Payment: The payment for expansion joints shall include for installation except
the supply of materials for expansion joints but including all labour,
tools, equipment, and incidentals necessary to complete the work as
specified in the drawings.
Pay item Description Pay Unit

1009 (1) Labour cost for Installation of Expansion Linear Metre
Joint with out supply of materials
1010 BRIDGE BEARINGS
Delete and substitute the following:-
Description
The work shall consist of furnishing and fixing in position of bearings in accordance with
the details shown on the drawings to the requirements of these specifications and the
applicable requirements of British Standards BS 5400: Part 9: ‘Bridge Bearing’ or
AASHTO M 251 of the AASHTO Standard Specifications of Highway Bridges.
The term "Elastomeric bearing" in this specification shall refer to bearing consisting of one
or more elastomer slabs bonded to metal plates during manufacture so as to form a
sandwich arrangement and caters for translation and/or rotation of superstructure by
elastic deformation of elastomer.
1010.2.Materials
Employer (UNOPS) shall supply the Elastomeric bearing to the Contractor and contractor
shall responsible to be placed the Bearing as per drawings over the bearing plinth on Pier
caps and Abutments.
1010.2.1 Properties of the Elastomer
The elastomer to be used for bearing shall be made from chloroprene rubber only
satisfying to the requirements of these specifications.
Grades of raw elastomer of proven use in elastomer bearings with low crystallization rates
and adequate shelf life (e.g. Neoprene WRT, Bayprene 110 or equivalent) shall be used.
No reclaimed elastomer or vulcanized wastage shall ne used. The raw elastomer content
of the compound shall not be lower than 60% and the ash content shall not exceed 5%.
Elastomer having all properties as given following table shall be used. Elastomer shall
high environmental resistance compatible with conditions of use. The adhesion strength
to steel plates shall not be less than 7 KN/m. Shear modulus of elastomer bearing shall
Page 1073
UNOPS LKOC
not be less than 0.80 Mpa nor greater than 1.20 Mpa.
The raw elastomer shall be Virgin Neoprene (polychloroprene). The elastomer compound
whose nominal hardness falls within the ranges of 46-55, 56-65 and 66-75 are classified
as types A, B and C respectively.
The elastomer compound shall meet the minimum requirements of Tables 1010(1) When
test specimens are cut from the finished product, the physical properties shall be
permitted to vary from those specified in Tables 1010(1) by 10 percent.
1010.2.2 Steel Laminates

Steel laminates used for reinforcement shall be made from rolled mild steel conforming to
ASTM A36 or A570, Grade 36 or Grade 40. The laminates shall have a minimum nominal
thickness of 16 gage. The steel plates separating the elastomeric layers will be
completely bonded by vulcanization to the elastomeric material on all surfaces using
special metal to rubber bonding adhesive.
1010.2.3 Bond
The vulcanized bond between fabric and reinforcement shall have a minimum peel
strength of 5.2 KN/m Steel laminated bearings shall develop a minimum peel strength of
7.0 KN/m2. Peel strength tests shall be performed by ASTM D429 Method B.
Table 1010(1)Neoprene Quality Control Tests

Test Method Properties of Elastomer Unit Type A Type B Type C
PHYSICAL
D 2240 Hardness (Shore A Durometer) IRHD 50 ± 5 60 ± 5 70 ± 5
D 412 Minimum Tensile Strength N/mm2/ 15.52 15.52 15.52

MPa
Minimum Ultimate Elongation 0% 400 350 300
ACCELERATED AGEING
D 573 70 hours at 100°C ± 1°C
Maximum change in Durometer IRHD 15 15 15
Hardness
Maximum change in Tensile % -15 -15 -15
Strength
Maximum change in Ultimate % -40 -40 -40
Elongation
COMPRESSION SET
D 395 22 Hours @ 100oC, Maximum % 35 35 35
Method B
OZONE RESISTANCE
D 1149 Test after 100 hours at 100 pphm No Cracks No No Cracks
ozone in air by volume, 20% Cracks
strain, 38oC ± 1oC
1010.3 Specification for Fabrication
a) Bearing with steel laminates shall be cast as a single unit in a mould and vulcanised
under heat and pressure. Casting of elements in separate units and subsequent
bonding shall not be permitted, nor shall cutting from large size cast be permitted.
b) Bearings of similar size to be used in particular bridge project shall be produced by
Page 1074
UNOPS LKOC
identical process and in one lot as far as practicable. Phased production may only
be resorted to when the total number of bearings is large enough.
c) The moulds used shall have standard surface finish adequate to produce bearings
free from any surface blemishes.
d) Steel plates for laminates shall be sand blasted, clean of all mill scales and shall be
free from all contaminants prior to bonding by vulcanisation. Rusted plates with
pitting shall not be used. All edges of plates shall be rounded.
e) Spacers used in mould to ensure cover and location of laminates shall be of

maximum size and number practicable. Care shall be taken to ensure uniform
vulcanising conditions and homogeneity of elastomer through the surface and body
of bearings.
Fabrication Tolerances
Laminated bearings shall be built to the specified dimension within the following
tolerances:
Overall Height
Design Thickness 32mm or less -0,+3mm
Design Thickness over 32mm -0,+6mm
2 Overall Horizontal Dimensions -0,+6mm
3 Thickness of Individual Layers of

Elastomer ± 20% of design
At any point within the bearings value,
maximum ± 3mm
4 Parallelism with Opposite Face
Top and bottom 1 in 200
Sides 1 in 50
5 Position of Exposed Connection
Members ± 3mm
Holes, slots or inserts
6 Edge Cover
Embedded laminates or connection -0,+3mm
members
Thickness -0, the smaller of
Top and bottom cover layer (if required) 1.5mm and +20%
of the nominal
cover layer
thickness
1010.4 Drawings
The Contractor shall supply and fix in position and maintain the bearings strictly in
accordance with the drawings and designs of this contract.
1010.5 Acceptance Specification
a) The manufacturer shall have at his plant all the test facilities required for the
process and acceptance control tests. The test facilities and their operation shall be
open to inspection by the Engineer on demand. The certificates on testing of Bridge
bearings obtained from any National Standard Testing Institute of Sri Lanka and or
Page 1075
UNOPS LKOC
RDA approved Testing Institute by the manufacturer will be acceptable.
b) Acceptance testing shall be commenced with the prior submittal of testing

programme by the manufacturer to the Engineer and after obtaining his approval.
c) The manufacturer of the bearings shall have not less than 5 (five) years successful
experience in manufacturing similar type and capacity bearings.
1010.6 Quality Control Certificate
A lot under acceptance shall comprise all bearings, including a pair of extra test bearings
of equal or near equal size produced under identical conditions of manufacture to be
supplied for a particular project.
The manufacturer shall certify for each lot of bearing under acceptance:
- that an adequate system of continuous quality control was operated in his plant.
- that the entire process remained in control during the production of the lot of
bearings under acceptance as verified from the quality control records/charts which
shall be open to inspection of the Engineer on demand.
- a certified copy of results of process control testing done on samples of elastomer

used in the production of the lot shall be appended and shall include at least the
following information:
Composition of the compound - raw elastomer and ash content, the grade of raw
elastomer used (including name, source, age on shelf). Test results of hardness,
tensile strength, elongation at break, compression set, accelerated ageing, etc.
1010.7 Certificate and Markings
Bearing shall be transported to bridge site after final acceptance by Engineer and shall be
accompanied by an authenticated copy of the certificate to that effect.
An information card giving the following details for the bearing, duly certified by the
manufacturer shall also be appended.
• Name of manufacturer
• Date of manufacture
• Elastomer grade used
• Bearing dimensions
• Production batch no
• Acceptance lot no
• Date of testing
• Specific bridge location
• Explanation of marking used on the bearing
All bearing shall have suitable index markings identifying the information as given above.
The markings shall be made in indelible ink or flexible paint and if practicable should be
visible after installation. The top of the bearing and direction of installation shall be
indicated.
1010.8 Installation
Page 1076
UNOPS LKOC
Bearings shall be installed and grouted according to the supplier's instruction and as
shown on the Drawings, or as directed by the Engineer.
Care shall be taken in packing, transportation, storage and handling to avoid any
mechanical damage, contamination with oil, grease and dirt, undue exposure to sunlight
and weather.
Installation of multiple bearings one behind the other on a single line of support shall be of
identical dimensions.
Bearings shall be placed between true horizontal surfaces (maximum tolerance 0.2%
perpendicular to load) and at true plan position of their centre lines marked on receiving
surfaces (maximum tolerance ±3 mm). Concrete surfaces shall be free from local
irregularities (maximum tolerance ± 1 mm in height).
For cast in place concrete construction of superstructure, where bearings are installed
prior to its concreting, the forms around the bearings shall be soft enough for easy
removal. Forms shall also fit the bearings snugly and prevent any leakage of mortar
grout. Any mortar contaminating the bearings during concreting shall be completely
removed before setting.
a) Maintenance
After installation routine maintenance inspection of all bearings shall be made till the
expiry of the maintenance period to check for any surface cracking or signs of damage,
deterioration or distress.
Damaged bearings shall be replaced immediately. To avoid difference in stiffness, all

adjacent bearings on the same line of support shall also be replaced.
1010.9 Measurement
The quantities of elastomer bearings shall be measured in number of each type of

finished dimension completed and accepted by Engineer.
1010.10 Payment
The work measured shall be paid for at the Contract unit price of Each number of bridge
bearings as shown in the Bill of Quantities. The payment shall be full compensation of
concrete plinths, mortar beds, levelling etc. complete as per drawing and direction of
Engineer and incidentals necessary to complete the work except the supply of
Elastomeric Bearing.
Pay item Unit
1010(1) Placing/fixing of Elastomeric Bearings except supply of Bearing Number
1011 WEARING COURSE
a) Description
This work shall consist of providing wearing course to be laid over the deck slab of
structures either in cement concrete or in asphaltic surface as indicated on the drawings.
Newly constructed concrete deck structure shall have integrally cast concrete wearing
Page 1077
UNOPS LKOC
course. In rehabilitating structures where wearing course is required to be laid on the

existing concrete deck the same shall be in asphaltic surfacing. In both the cases the
finished deck level at top of wearing course shall be in line and level with the adjacent
road way level unless otherwise specifically mentioned on the drawing.
b) Thickness
The shape and size of wearing course shall be in conformity with the camber and
thickness as shown on the drawings, but in no case the thickness shall be less than 40
mm at any location.
c) Concrete Wearing Course
i) Materials
The materials for the concrete wearing course shall conform to those mentioned under
the specification Section 1001. The grade of concrete shall be Grade 35(Cylinder
Strength) and shall conform to specifications.
ii) Method of Laying
The cement concrete wearing shall be cast while the structural concrete for the deck is
green and has been levelled as shown in the drawing. The concrete for the wearing
course shall be laid and finished to line and level as shown in the drawing. It is to be
ensured to the satisfaction of the Engineer that the concrete of the wearing course when
set gets a firm grip with structural concrete and becomes integral thereto.
iii) Method of Measurement
The concrete for wearing course shall be measured in cubic metres as per specification
Section 1001.
d) Asphaltic Wearing Course
i) Description
This work shall consist of the construction of hot-mixed, hot-laid, bituminous mixture
conforming to the requirements of this section, spread and compacted in layers on a tack
coat on bridge deck of concrete slab in conformity with the lines grade and cross sections
shown in the drawings and as directed by the Engineer.
ii) Materials
Materials shall be in accordance with specification Sub Section 506.2. The gradation of
the combined graded aggregate and mineral for the wearing asphalt surface shall be as
specified in specification Sub Section 506.3
Bituminous material for tack coat shall be cut back asphalt as per specification Sub
Section 506.2
iii) Job-Mix Formula of Asphalt Concrete
The method of job mix shall be as per specification Sub Section 506.4
iv) Construction Method
Page 1078
UNOPS LKOC
Reference is made to specification Sub Section 506.5 and the following shall be added
thereto.
Tack coat shall be provided prior to laying of the wearing course as per specification Sub
Section 502.
v) Method of Measurement
Measurement of asphaltic wearing course shall be as per specification Sub Section

506.6.
e) Measurement and Payment
Measurement and payment of wearing courses for concrete and asphaltic concrete
already scheduled under Sub Section 506 of specification.
Page 1079

SSCM Roads and Bridges - Annex III Technical Specifications 105 C1 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SSCM Roads and Bridges - Annex III Technical Specifications 105 C1 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SRI LANKA OPERATIONS CENTRE

102. DEFINITIONS .......................................................................................................................7

103. ARRANGEMENTS FOR TRAFFIC DURING CONSTRUCTION ...................................................11

108. CONTRACTOR’S ESTABLISHMENT ON SITE .........................................................................34

110. WORKMANSHIP AND QUALITY CONTROL ..........................................................................36

111. SELECTION OF LABOUR .....................................................................................................37

130.14 VEHICLES FOR THE ENGINEER, ..................................................................................................60

Roadbed (Existing Sub-grade (Bottom

Road Pavement Layers

“The Contractor shall provide offices, laboratories (with equipment), housing,

130 (15) Special and Additional Testing Provisional sum

405. DENSE GRADED AGGREGATE BASES ................................................................................................ 9

407. BITUMENBOUND BASES ............................................................................................................... 13

503. HOT BITUMEN APPLICATIONS .............................................................................................7

504. SAND SEALING ....................................................................................................................7

505. SEAL COAT TREATMENTS (SURFACE DRESSINGS) .................................................................8

705. DRAINAGE BACKFILL BEHIND EARTH RETAINING STRUCTURES ........................................6

703(7) Brick Manholes reconstructed Number

810 ROAD MARKINGS ..............................................................................................12

810.2 Materials ...................................................................................................12

10A to 60A : 14 KA

SERIES 1000 - BRIDGES AND OTHER STRUCTURES

1001. CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES....................................................................... 1002

1008. FORMWORK FOR STRUCTURES ..................................................................... 1071

1009. BRIDGE EXPANSION JOINTS ........................................................................... 1071

1010 BRIDGE BEARINGS .......................................................................................... 1073

1011 WEARING COURSE ........................................................................................... 1077

SERIES 1000 - BRIDGES AND OTHER STRUCTURES

1001. CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES

1001.3.Classification & uses of concrete

Add to the end of the paragraph the following:-

Delete subsections (d), and substitute with the following:-

4) Minimum Filler Content

Add the following:-

Pre-stressed concrete: fc’ = 50 N/mm² (Grade 60, Cube Strength)

Concrete Concrete Characteristic Maximum Maximum Size Minimum

Where, fc’ is the compressive strength at 28 days.

Delete subsection, substitute with the following :-

Slump ± 25 mm or ± one third of the required value, which ever is

Typical values of workability are tabulated below.

Description of Compacting Factor Slump

1001.7.Testing of Concrete for Acceptance

Delete subsection, substitute with the following:-

ii) Control of Concrete Production

Materials used shall be tested in accordance with Sub Section 1001.2.

2) Plant and Equipment

iii) Control of Strength

1) Sampling and Testing

iv) Characteristic strength

v) Target Mean Strength

2) 1.64 times the standard deviation of tests on at least 40 separate batches of

Specified characteristic Target Mean Current

vi) Testing Plan

Compliance with the specified characteristic strength may be assumed if:

viii) Control of Hardening

Delete subsections (d) and substitute with the following :-

d) Central Plant Mixers

Add additional section as follows:

Bodies of non-agitating equipment shall be smooth, water-tight metal containers equipped

h) Truck or Transit Mixers

1001.9. Placing and Compaction of Concrete

Delete subsection, substitute with the following:-

Concrete shall be placed so as to avoid segregation (from lower gradient to upper